Skip to main content

Full text of "Ptolemy's Tetrabiblos : or, Quadripartite : being four books of the influence of the stars"

See other formats


᾿ς χέει ὦ Σ μοῦ 


¥ 


pe apes ae ne 


ae oe = 


Sooke eee 


eee nee ae ee 


servescevespiak: a 


enc Sb Ealoter 92. fe Uk. « - 


oe 


225 921 


EX LIBRIS 
HILLEL HOUSE LITERARY 
SOCIETY 


PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 


PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 


QUADRIPARTITE 


BEING 


FOUR BOOKS 


OF THE 


INFLUENCE OF THE STARS 


NEWLY TRANSLATED FROM THE GREEK PARAPHRASE OF PROCLUS 


WITH 
A PREFACE, EXPLANATORY NOTES 
AND 
AN APPENDIX 
CONTAINING 


EXTRACTS FROM THE ALMAGEST OF PTOLEMY 


AND THE WHOLE OF HIs 


CENTILOQUY 


TOGETHER WITH 
A Short Notice of Mr. Ranger’s Zodiacal Planisphere 


AND AN EXPLANATORY PLATE 


By J. M. ASHMAND 
NEW EDITION 


“‘ Ye stars, which are the poetry of Heaven! 
If, in your bright leaves, we would read the fate 
Of men and empires,—’tis to be forgiven.”’ 
LORD BYRON. 


Lonpon: 
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY W. FOULSHAM & CO., Lid. 
DEALERS IN SCIENTIFIC BOOKS 
10/1l RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET, LONDON, E.C.4 


Made and Printed in Great Britain 


TO THE 
AUTHOR OF “WAVERLEY” 
THIS TRANSLATION 
OF A 
WORK CONTAINING THE BEST ACCREDITED PRINCIPLES 
OF 
ASTROLOGY 
IS DEDICATED 
With the most profound admiration of his unrivalled Talents 
WHICH COULD ALONE HAVE RESTORED 
INTEREST TO THE SPECULATIONS 
OF AN 


ANTIQUATED SCIENCE 


wig RM yk ‘ 
MeN ΔΌΛΙΑ ἢ 
, as eS ty Ὕ is 


We hak eo WA ‘ Ὦ 5: 


vi 


ra fs. ἔ 
᾽ it i f 
“ἐς οὐκ ἢ ᾿ ty 
Bice 


ADVERTISEMENT 


Tue use recently made of Astrology in the poetical machinery 
of certain works of genius (which are of the highest popu- 
larity, and above all praise), seems to have excited in the 
world at large a desire to learn something of the mysteries 
of that science which has, in all former ages, if not in these 
days, more or less engaged reverence and usurped belief. 
The apparent existence of such a general desire has caused 
the completion of the following Translation, and its pre- 
sentation to the public ; although it was originally undertaken 
only in part, and merely to satisfy two or three individuals 
of the grounds on which the now neglected doctrines of 
Astrology had so long and so fully maintained credit. 


CHAP. 


III. 


VII. 
VIII. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS 


BOOK I 
PRoEM . P " a 6 ᾽ ᾿ ἢ ᾿ . φ ᾿ ὁ 
KNOWLEDGE MAY BE ACQUIRED BY ASTRONOMY TO A CERTAIN EXTENT - ‘ 
THAT PRESCIENCE IS USEFUL . J ‘ ᾿ ᾿ P ὰ ᾿ . 
Tue INFLUENCES OF THE PLANETARY ORBS. ‘ i a é ὃ 3 
Benerics AND MALEFIcs . 5 ᾿ ἡ ᾿ ‘ ° ° 7 τ 
MascuLiInE AND FEMININE ‘ 2 ; - ᾿ ᾿ > ‘ > 
Diurnal AND NoctTurNAL ) A . Ἶ ‘ Ξ . ἰ s 
Tue INFLUENCE OF POSITION WITH REGARD TO THE SUN, ° . ° 
Tue INFLUENCE OF THE FIXED STARS. ᾿ - . ° ὸ ἀ ° 
ConsTELLATIONS NorTH OF THE ZODIAC . > P ὸ ὃ ° . 
CONSTELLATIONS SOUTH OF THE ZODIAC . A é i . . Ἴ 
Tue ANNUAL SEASONS ‘ ‘ : , ‘ ‘ ° é . Ὃ 
Tue INFLUENCE OF THE Four ANGLES ‘ ᾷ ᾿ ὺ ὁ ¢ ὁ 
Tropicat, ΕΟΟΙΝΟΟΤΙΑΙ,, ΕἾΧΕΡ, AND ΒΙΟΘΟΚΡΟΒΕΑΙ, SIGNS . . . . 
MAscuLiINE AND FEMININE SIGNS 3 Ἶ é é ν Ἂ « 
MutTvat CONFIGURATIONS OF THE SIGNS . i : é Ξ ‘ . 
SIGNS COMMANDING AND ΟΒΕΥΙΝΟ . ᾿ ᾿ ° “ Ξ Ὰ ‘ 
SIGNS BEHOLDING EACH OTHER, AND OF EQUAL PowER. ‘ . ἐ , 
Sicns INCONJUNCT . , ‘ 4 s ‘ . 
Houses OF THE PLANETS . F ᾿ ι ἡ ‘ 4 ‘ . . 
Tue TRIPLICITIES . ‘ ᾿ * ᾿ ‘ 4 . ὃ ὦ ; 
EXALTATIONS . ‘ ὃ " * Ξ ἂ Ὰ ἁ Ὃ ὁ 
Tue Disposition ΟΕ THE TERMS ν - ἐ b ὸ " ‘ ° 
Tue Terms (AccorDING TO ProLemy) : : . . . . . 
THe PLaces AND DEGREES OF EVERY PLANET ° ° ° ἃ ° ὃ 
Faces, CHARIOTS, AND OTHER SIMILAR ATTRIBUTES OF THE PLANETS . : 
APPLICATION, SEPARATION, AND OTHER FAacuLTIES ‘ . . . . 
BOOK II 

GENERAL DIvISION OF THE SUBJECT . 5 : ᾧ ἐ . . . 
PECULIARITIES OBSERVABLE THROUGHOUT EVERY ENTIRE CLIMATE . ὦ ὰ 
Tue FAMILIARITY OF THE REGIONS OF THE EARTH WITH THE TRIPLICITIES AND 

THE PLANETS . ὶ ; ᾿ > : ὲ . 4 d . 
Tue FAMILIARITY OF THE REGIONS OF THE EARTH WITH THE ΕἾΧΕΡ Srars . 
MopeE or ParTICULAR PREDICTION IN Ec.ipsks . ‘ ᾿ ᾿ : a 
Tur REGIONS OR COUNTRIES TO BE CONSIDERED AS LIABLE TO BE COMPREHENDED 

IN THE EvENT . A . ‘ é * ‘ é 4 ‘ 
Tue Time AND PERIOD OF THE EVENT F ‘ : é Ἢ F ὃ 
Tue Genus, Crass, oR KIND, LIABLE TO BE AFFECTED ° « . . 
THE QUALITY AND Nature ΟΕ THE Errect ὲ ᾿ ‘ : ᾿ ° 
Cotours ΙΝ Eciipses, COMETS, AND SIMILAR PHENOMENA . elena . 


ΙΧ 


PAGE 


VII. 
VIII. 


III. 
IV. 


CONTENTS 


Tue New Moon or THE YEAR ὃ “ Ἶ ὰ : : ᾿ ‘ 
THE PARTICULAR NATURES OF THE SIGNS BY WHICH THE DIFFERENT CONSTITU- 
TIONS OF THE ATMOSPHERE ARE PRODUCED . y x ᾿ Ξ . 
Moone or CONSIDERATION FOR PARTICULAR CONSTITUTIONS OF THE ATMOSPHERE 
Tue SIGNIFICATION oF METEORS ᾿ Oh SNe . i : ᾿ - 
BOOK III 
ProrM . : 4 “ : Ξ ἐ b Ἂ ᾿ ‘ . ‘ 
Tur CONCEPTION, AND THE PARTURITION, OR BIRTH; BY WHICH LATTER EVENT 
THE ANIMAL QUITS THE WOMB, AND ASSUMES ANOTHER STATE OF EXISTENCE 
Tuer Decree ASCENDING . 5 ᾿ ‘ ‘ ἐ : 4 ; ° 
DIsTRIBUTION OF THE DocTRINE OF NATIVITIES . " " 4 ὶ ὁ 
THE PARENTS - : : ᾿ 3 Ἷ Ἷ ᾿ . - if : 
BROTHERS AND SISTERS - Ε 4 ‘ Ἢ . : 4 ἔ ‘ 
Mate or FEMALE . : Σ ; : δ ὲ Ἔ : 3 . 
Twins . ‘ ‘ Ἢ Ἢ ν Ἢ ᾿ : ἢ ὃ Β a 
Monstrous or DerectriveE BirtHs . Ἴ Ἶ ᾿ ° Ἶ 3 : 
CHILDREN NOT REARED - é ‘ 5 ᾿ 4 Ε Ε Ξ : 
Tue DuraTIon or Lire . A ail ihe ἢ Υ . : - Ἰ 
THE ProroGaTory ΡΙΓΑΘΕΒ i ᾿ " ἢ δ 4 : : . 
Tue NuMBER OF PROROGATORS, AND ALSO THE PART OF FORTUNE. ᾿ . 
NuMBER OF THE Mopes oF PROROGATION . ἡ " ὃ ᾿ Ἷ y 
EXEMPLIFICATION . 3 6 Ἢ ‘ ὰ 3 ; * ν᾿ . 
Tue Form AND TEMPERAMENT OF THE Bopy . : ‘ iy ‘ 5 
Tue Hurts, Injuries, AND DisEasrs OF THE BopDy . ‘ : : : 
Tue QuaALity or THE MIND . 4 P 5 Ἵ 4 : Ξ ἢ 
Tue Diskasrs oF THE MIND. 4 4 5 Ἐ : " 3 ν᾿ 
BOOK IV 
PromrMmM . < : 5 Ξ Ξ . ° F " " 5 ὲ 
Tue Fortune or WEALTH 4 ν᾽ ‘ ° ° ° ὺ : ; 
Tue Fortune or Rank . ᾿ ὁ : Ξ | . : 5 
Tue Quatiry ΟΕ EMPLOYMENT ὰ Ἀ ν᾿ . : : : ν᾿ 
MarrIiaGE : ᾿ ‘ ) : Ε ν : Ἵ 5 4 4 
CHILDREN ᾿ ᾿ ; ὸ : : Per ΤῈ ὃ - : : 
FRIENDS AND ENEMIES ‘ ° . , h A . : ; 
TRAVELLING . J 4 ᾿ οἱ ᾿ ul < 2 P 4 : 
Tue Kinp or DratH 5 aha Ἶ : : 5 \ 
Tue PertopicaL Divisions or TIME. : ‘ ᾿ ν Ἵ ἢ 4 
APPENDIX 
Avmacsst, Boox vit, Cuap. 4 . Η ° . ° . . . 
ExTRACT FROM THE ALMAGEST, ΒΟΟΚ 11, CHAP. 9 . . . . : 
ΤΑΒΙΕ OF LATITUDES, FROM THE ALMAGEST ᾿ ὺ ὃ a : : 
ExTRACT FROM THE TABLE OF ASCENSIONS, IN THE ALMAGEST - . . 
ῬΤΟΙΕΜΥ 5 CENTILOQUY . ‘ Ὲ ‘ y i 4 - ἷ ᾿ 
Tue ZopiacaL PLANISPHERE, AND PLATE - ᾿ 4 ° 2 ‘ ‘ 


100 
106 
107 
114 


117 


117 
118 


120 
124 
128 
130 
132 
134 
137 


144 
147 
151 
152 
153 
161 


PREFACE 


F all sciences, whether true or false, which have at any time 
() engaged the attention of the world, there is not one of which 
the real or assumed principles are less generally known, in the 

present age, than those of Astrology. ‘The whole doctrine of this 
science is commonly understood to have been completely overturned ; 
and, of late, people seem to have satisfied themselves with merely 
knowing the import of its name. Such contented ignorance, in persons, 
too, sufficiently informed in other respects, is the more extraordinary, 
since Astrology has sustained a most conspicuous part throughout the 
history of the world, even until days comparatively recent. In the East, 
where it first arose, at a period of very remote antiquity, and whence it 


1 Sir Isaac Newton has the following remarks in regard to the origin of 
Astrology : :— After the study of Astronomy was set on foot for the use of 
navigation, and the AZgyptians, by the heliacal risings and settings of the stars, 
had determined the length of the solar year of 365 days, and by other observa- 
tions had fixed the solstices, and formed the fixed stars into asterisms, all which 
was done in the reigns of Ammon, Sesac, Orus, and Memnon,” (about 1000 
years before Christ), “‘it may be presumed that they continued to observe the 
motions of the planets, for they called them after the names of their gods ; 
and Nechepsos, or Nicepsos, King of Sais,” [772 B.c.], “‘ by the assistance of 
Petosiris, a priest of gypt, invented astrology, grounding it upon the aspects 
of the planets, and the qualities of the men and women to whom they were 
dedicated? ; and in the beginning of the reign of Nabonassar, King of Babylon, 
about which time the Athiopians, under Sabacon, invaded Agypt ” [751 B.c.], 
“those Aigyptians who fled from him to Babylon, carried thither the A’gyptian 
year of 365 days, and the study of astronomy and astrology, and founded the 
zra of Nabonassar, dating it from the first year of that king’s reign ” [747 B.c.], 
“and beginning the year on the same day with the Agyptians for the sake of 
their calculations. So Diodorus : ‘ they say that the Chaldean in Babylon, being 
colonies of the Aigyptians, became famous for astrology, having learned it from the 
priests of Egypt.’ »—Newton’s Chronology, pp. 251, 252. ἢ 

Again, in p. 327: ‘‘ The practice of observing the stars began in Egypt i in 
the days of Ammon, as above, and was propagated from thence, in the reign 
of his son Sesac, inno Afric, Europe, and Asia, by conquest ; and then Atlas 
formed the sphere of the Libyans ” [956 B.c.], ‘‘ and Chiron that of the Greeks 
[939 B.c.]; and the Chaldzans also made a sphere of their own. But astrology 


2 It is maintained by astrologers, that the planets, having been observed to 
produce certain effects, were consequently dedicated to the several personages 
whose names they respectively bear. 


xi 


xil PREFACE 


came to subjugate the intellect of Europe, it still even now holds sway. 
In Europe, and in every part of the world where learning had “ im- 
press’'d the human soil,” Astrology reigned supreme until the middle 
of the 17th century. It entered into the councils of princes, it guided 
the policy of nations, and ruled the daily actions of individuals. All 
this is attested by the records of every nation which has a history, and 


was invented in Egypt by Nichepsos, or Necepsos, one of the Kings of the 
Lower Agypt, and Petosiris his priest, a little before the days of Sabacon, and 
propagated thence into Chaldza, where Zoroaster, the legislator of the Magi, 
met with it: so Paulinus ; 


* Quique magos docuit mysteria vana Necepsos.’” 


The arcana of Astrology constituted a main feature in the doctrines of the 
Persian Magi; and it further appears, by Newton’s Chronology, p. 347, that 
Zoroaster (although the zra of his life has been erroneously assigned to various 
remoter periods) lived in the reign of Darius Hystaspis, about 520 B.c., and 
assisted Hystaspes, the father of Darius, in reforming the Magi, of whom the 
said Hystaspes was Master. Newton adds, p. 352, that “‘ about the same time 
with Hystaspes and Zoroaster, lived also Ostanes, another eminent Magus : Pliny 
places him under Darius Hystaspis, and Suidas makes him the follower of 
Zoroaster : he came into Greece with Xerxes about 480 B.c., and seems to be 
the Otanes of Herodotus. In his book, called the Octateuchus, he taught the 
same doctrine of the Deity as Zoroaster.” 

Having quoted thus far from Newton, it seems proper to subjoin the follow- 
ing extract from the “ Ancient Universal History: ”—‘In the reign of 
Gushtasp ” [the oriental name of Darius Hystaspis], “‘ King of Persia, flourished 
a celebrated astrologer, whose name was Gjamasp, surnamed Al Hakim, or the 
wise. ‘The most credible writers say that he was the brother of King Gushtasp, 
and his confidant and chief minister. He is said to have predicted the coming 
of the Messiah ; and some treatises under his name are yet current in the East. 
Dr. Thomas Hyde, in speaking of this philosopher, cites a passage from a very 
ancient author, having before told us that this author asserted there had been 
among the Persians ten doctors of such consummate wisdom as the whole world 
could not boast the like. He then gives the author’s words: ‘ Of these, the 
sixth was Gjamasp, an astrologer, who was counsellor to Hystaspis. He is the 
author of a book intitled Fudicia Gjamaspts, in which is contained his judgment 
on the planetary conjunctions. And therein he gave notice that Jesus should 
appear ; that Mohammed should be born; that the Magian religion should be 
abolished, etc. ; nor did any astrologer ever come up to him.’ [E. lib. Mucy. 
apud Hyde.| Of this book there is an Arabic version, the title of which runs 
thus: The Book of the Philosopher Gjamasp, containing Judgments on the 
Grand Conjunctions of the Planets, and on the Events produced by them. This 
version was made by Lali; the title he gave it in Arabic was Al Keranai, and he 
published it a.p. 1280. In the preface of his version it is said that, after the 
times of Zoroaster, or Zerdusht, reigned Gushtasp, the son of Lohrasp,} a very 


1 This seems to be a mistake of the Arabian author, for Gushtasp was 
identical with Darius Hystaspis, and Lohrasp [otherwise Cyaxares] was father 
of Darius the Mede, who was overcome by Cyrus, 536 B.c.—See Newton. 


PREFACE xili 


by none more fully than by those of England. Yet, with these striking 
facts before their eyes, the present generation seem never, until now, to 
have inquired on what basis this belief of their forefathers was estab- 
lished, nor by what authority the delusion (if it was one) could have been 
for so many ages supported. Among a thousand persons who now treat 
the mention of Astrology with supercilious ridicule, there is scarcely 
one who knows distinctly what it is he laughs at, or on what plea his 
ancestors should stand excused for having, in their day, contemplated 
with respect the unfortunate object of modern derision. 


powerful prince ; and that in his reign flourished in the city of Balch, on the 
borders of Chorassan, a most excellent philosopher, whose name was Gjamasp, 
author of this book; wherein is contained an account of all the great con- 
junctions of the planets which had happened before his time, and which were 
to happen in succeeding ages; and wherein the appearances of new religions 
and the rise of new monarchies were exactly set down. This author, throughout 
his whole piece, styles Zerdusht, or Zoroaster, our Prophet. [D’Herbelot, 
Bibl. Orient. Art. Gjamasp.] The notion of predicting the rise and progress 
of religions from the grand conjunctions of the planets, has been likewise 
propagated in our western parts: Cardan was a bold assertor of this doctrine. 
The modern Persians are still great votaries of astrology, and although they 
distinguish between it and astronomy, they have but one word to express astro- 
nomer and astrologer ; viz. manegjim, which is exactly equivalent to the Greek 
word astpoAoyos. Of all the provinces of Persia, Chorassan is the most famous 
for producing great men in that art ; and in Chorassan there is a little town 
called Genabed, and in that town a certain family which, for 6 or 700 years 
past, has produced the most famous astrologers in Persia; and the king’s 
astrologer is always either a native of Genabed, or one brought up there. Sir 
John Chardin affirms that the appointments in his time for these sages amounted 
to six millions of French livres per annum.—Albumazar of Balch (scholar of 
Alkendi, a Jew, who was professor of judicial astrology at Bagdad, in the 
Caliphate of Almamoum?) became wonderfully famous. He wrote expressly 
from the Persian astrologers, and it may be from the works of Gjamasp, since 
he also reports a prediction of the coming of Christ in the following words : 
viz. ‘In the sphere of Persia, saith Aben Ezra, there ariseth upon the face of 
the sign Virgo a beautiful maiden, she holding two ears of corn in her hand, and 
a child in her arm: she feedeth him, and giveth him suck, &c. This maiden,’ 
saith Albumazar, ‘ we call Adrenedefa, the pure Virgin. She bringeth up a 
child in a place which is called Abrie [the Hebrew land], and the child’s name 
is called Eisi [Jesus].? This made Albertus Magnus believe that our Saviour, 
Christ, was born in Virgo; and therefore Cardinal Alliac, erecting our Lord’s 
nativity by his description, casteth this sign into the horoscope. But the mean- 
ing of Albumazar was, saith Friar Bacon, that the said virgin was born, the 
Sun being in that sign, and so it is noted in the calendar ; and that she was to 
bring up her son in the Hebrew land. [Mr. John Gregory’s Notes on various 
Passages of Scripture.]”—Ancient Universal History, vol. 5, pp. 415 to 419. 


1 This caliph reigned in the earlier part of the 9th century, and caused 
Ptolemy’s Great Construction to be translated into Arabic, as. hereafter 
mentioned. 


xiv PREFACE 


The general want of information on these points, and the indifference 
with which such want has been hitherto regarded, cannot surely be 
attributed solely to the modern disrepute of the science ; for mankind 
have usually, in every successive age, exercised great industry in tracing 
all previous customs, however trifling or obsolete, and in examining all 
sorts of creeds, however unimportant or erroneous, whenever there has 
appeared any striking connection between such matters and historical 
facts ; and, since astrology is most unquestionably blended intimately 
with history, it therefore becomes necessary to seek for some further 
hypothesis, by which this ignorance and indifference may be accounted 
for. 

Perhaps astrology has been conceived to have borne the same relation 
to astronomy as alchymy did to chymistry. Ifsuch has been the notion, 
it has certainly been adopted in error, for a modern chymist is still 
almost an alchymist: it is true that he no longer delays his work in 
deference to the planets, nor does he now try to make gold, nor to distil 
elixir of earthly immortality ; but nevertheless he still avails himself, to 
a certain degree, of the same rules and the same means as those of the old 
alchymist : he is still intent upon the subtle processes of Nature, and 
still imitates her as far as he can. He reduces the diamond to charcoal 
by an operation analogous to that by which the alchymist sought to 
transmute lead into gold ; and he mainly differs from the alchymist only 
in having assured himself that there is a point beyond which Nature 
forbids facsimiles. Not so slightly, however, does the astronomer differ 
from the astrologer, but toto celo : the astrologer considered the heavenly 
bodies and their motions merely as the mechanism wherewith he was to 
weave the tissue of his predictions; and astronomy is no more an 
integral part of astrology, than the loom is of the web which has been 
woven by it. To have an idea of what alchymy was, it is sufficient to 
have an idea of chymistry ; but astronomy, in itself, will never give a 
notion of astrology, which requires additional and distinct consideration. 

It may be urged, that in the present day a general idea of this by- 
gone and disused science is quite sufficient for everybody not professedly 
antiquarian. Such an assertion would doubtless never be controverted, 
provided the proposed general idea might comprehend the truth. But 
the present actual general idea of astrology is by no means so compre- 
hensive ; indeed, nothing can well be more inaccurate, or even more 
false: it seems to have been adopted not from the elements of the 
science itself, but from trite observations made by writers against the 
science ; and consequently the world now wonders at the lamentable 
defect of understanding that could ever have permitted belief in it— 
forgetting that astrology has been consigned to neglect, not in conse- 
quence of any primd facie palpability in its imputed fallacies, nor in- 
deed of any special skill or acuteness on the part of its professed adver- 
saries, but rather in consequence of the sudden and astonishing growth 
of other undoubted sciences, with which it has been presumed to be 


PREFACE ΧΥ͂ 


incompatible, and which during the thousands of years of the reign of 
astrology were either unborn, or still slumbering in continued infancy.} 

The words “‘ professed adversaries,” which have just now been used, 
are of course not intended to be applied to those mighty explorers of 
Nature’s laws and man’s powers, who, in their lofty career, may have 
made an incidental swoop at the pretensions of astrology. Directly 
engaged in more exact pursuits, they stopped not to dissect this their 
casual prey, which, after having been thus struck by eagles, was left 
to regale crows and daws, and these, in their convivial loquacity, accused 
their unfortunate victims of crimes incapable of being committed, and 
of offences which had never been imagined. Of the real faults of their 
victim these garrulous bipeds seem not to have been aware, or, if aware, 
they seem to.have considered them as not sufficiently prominent. Nor 
was this want of candour or information absolutely confined to the mere 
vulgar herd of vituperative scribblers, for even the sparkling essay 
against astrology, written by Voltaire (in his irrepressible desire to con- 
vince the world that he was au fatt in everything), proves only that the 
writer, though the most generally informed man of his time, had mis- 
taken the really assailable points of the object of his attack. 

The author of the present Translation has no intention now of either 
advocating or impugning the doctrines of the science of which his 
Translation discourses : his purpose is a different one. He has that sort 
of respect for “ the dead, which are really dead,” which, although it does 
not incline him to “ praise ” them “‘ more than the living, which are yet 
alive,” is still sufficient to incite him to endeavour to avert the imputa- 
tion of idiot credulity, to which their faith in astrology seems now to 
subject them in the general opinion of the enlightened “living.” And, 
while he disclaims all idea of presuming to offer any argument on either 
side of the question, as to the validity of the science, he must still, at the 


1 To this view of the case, the following remarks seem not inapplicable : 
they are taken from a periodical work of deserved reputation :— 

“ The study of astrology itself, as professing to discover, by celestial pheno- 
mena, future mutations in the elements and terrestrial bodies, ought, perhaps, 
not to be despised.2 The theory of the tides, for example, is altogether an 
astrological doctrine, and, long before the days of Sir Isaac Newton, was as 
well understood as it is at this moment. The correspondence alleged by the 
ancient physicians to exist between the positions of the Moon and the stages of 
various diseases, is so far from being rejected by the modern faculty, that it has 
been openly maintained.” The writer then recounts sundry incidents, asserted 
by the astrologers to be dependent on the Moon, and he adds these words: “‘ The 
fact of these allegations might be so easily ascertained, that it is surprising they 
should still be pronounced incredible, and denied rather than contradicted.” 


2 “ Sir Christopher Heydon’s Defence of Astrology, p. 2, edit. 1603.” 
“Dr. Mead on the Influence of the Sun and Moon upon Human Bodies. 
ἊΝ also Edinb. Rev. vol. 12, p. 36—Balfour on Sol-Lunar Influence.” Black- 
woods Magazine for Dec., 1821, Part 2, No. 59. 


xvi PREFACE 


same time, confess his admiration of the ingenuity and contrivance 
manifest in its construction, and avow his readiness to believe that all its 
harmonized complications might have easily held dominion over some 
of the strongest minds in that darker period when it flourished. 

In executing here the desire of attempting to vindicate the ancient 
credence in astrology, an elaborate disquisition would surely be not only 
unnecessary, but misplaced : it seems sufficient to refer the reader to the 
work of which the following is a translation, and to these undisputed 
facts—that the science was formerly inculcated by the highest and most 
erudite authorities of the period—that it was insisted on by votaries in 
all parts of the world, attesting and producing instances of its truth ;— 
and, moreover, that it was so finely and beautifully put together, as to 
cause the only deficiency of one small, though most important, link in 
its whole chain of argument, to be undetected by dull minds, and readily 
supplied by enthusiastic genius. For centuries after centuries all 
branches of learning were either made subservient to astrology, or 
carried on in close alliance with it; and many of the illustrious names 
which it recalls to our recollection are gratefully reverenced even by 
modern science. ‘The genius of Roger Bacon, although he was the first 
of that school of natural philosophy which acknowledges none but 
experimented truths, was nevertheless bowed to the doctrines of judicial 
astrology; and his greater Namesake, who after an interval of 
several centuries succeeded to him in giving proper direction to the 
mental energy, was still an arguer in favour of celestial influences: it 
may be, therefore, fairly inferred, that the subtle spell which had 
strength to enthrall “ stuff” so ‘ stern,” could have been of no weak 
or vulgar order, but that it was sufficiently potent and refined to interest 
and amuse even the present age.} 


1 In the 51st No. of the Quarterly Review, Art. “ Astrology and Alchymy,” 
the following observations are made :— 

“‘ Certainly, if man may ever found his glory on the achievements of his 
wisdom, he may reasonably exult in the discoveries of astronomy; but the 
knowledge which avails us has been created solely by the absurdities which it 
has extirpated. Delusion became the basis of truth. Horoscopes and nativities 
have taught us to place the planet in its sure and silent path ; and the acquire- 
ments which, of all others, now testify the might of the human intellect, derived 
their origin from weakness and credulity ” (p. 181). Again; “ Astrology, like 
alchymy, derives no protection from sober reason ; yet, with all its vanity and 
idleness, it was not a corrupting weakness. Tokens, predictions, prognostics, | 
possess a psychological reality. All events are but the consummation of preceding 
causes, Clearly felt, but not distinctly apprehended. When the strain is sounded, 
the most untutored listener can tell that it will end with the key-note, though 
he cannot explain why each successive bar must at last lead to the concluding 
chord. The omen embodies the presentiment, and receives its consistency 
from our hopes or fears.” (p. 208). 

It may, perhaps, be difficult to assent to all of the propositions involved in 
these extracts ; but there are among them some which are clearly unquestionable. 


PREFACE xvii 


In this little volume will be found the whole of the elements of 
astrology, and the entire ground-work of those stupendous tomes in 
folio and quarto on the same subject, which were produced in myriads 
during the 16th and 17th centuries, for the due mystification of the 
then world. ‘The present volume is addressed equally to the general 
reader, as well as to the votary of pure astrology, if any such there be ; 
to the one it offers amusement ; for the other, it should contain the 
most glowing interest. Even to the speculative metaphysician it will 
furnish food for contemplation ; for, in addition to its peculiar hypothe- 
sis of cause and effect, it develops many of those apparent incongruities 
of character so often united in the same individual ; and this develop- 
ment, even although adapted to the doctrine of the stars, still merits 
attention ; inasmuch as the phenomena of which it treats (in whatever 
way they may be produced or regulated) will ever remain in actual 
existence. 

The only English translation of Ptolemy’s Tetrabiblos, hitherto 
published, appears to have been first set forth in 1701, under the name 
of “The Quadripartite.” That publication has been long removed 
from general sale ; and its gross misinterpretation of the author, caused 
by the carelessness or ignorance of Whalley and his assistants, by whom 
it was produced, has rendered most of its pages unintelligible: its 
absence is, therefore, scarcely to be regretted. ‘The second edition of the 
same translation, professing to be “ revised, corrected, and improved,” 
and published by Browne and Sibley, in 1786, was not, in any one in- 
stance, purified from the blunders and obscurities which disgraced its 
predecessor: it seems, in fact, less excusable than the former edition, 
of which it was merely a reprint, without being at all corrected, not 
even in certain typographical errata which the former printer had been 
zealous enough to point out in his final page. Even this second publica- 
tion, worthless as it intrinsically is, can rarely now be met with, and, like 
the former, only at a very heavy price. 

The present Translation has been made from Proclus’s Greek Para- 
phrase of Prolemy’s original text ; the edition followed is that of the 
Elzevirs, dated in 1635.4 But, in the course of translation, continual 
references have been also had to various editions of the original text, in 
order to ascertain the proper acceptation of doubtful passages. The 
editions thus inspected were that by Camerarius, printed at Nuremberg 
in 1535; that by Melancthon, printed at Basle in 1553; and that by 
Junctinus, printed, with his own enormous commentaries, at Lyons, in 
1581. Independently of these references, the present translation has 


1 This edition was printed in double columns, one containing Proclus’s 
Greek Paraphrase, the other the Latin translation of Leo Allatius ; and William 
Lilly (no light authority in these matters) thus wrote of it in the year 1647: 
“ς Indeed Ptolemy hath been printed in folio, in quarto, in octavo, in sixteens: 
that lately printed at Leyden ” [where the Elzevirs were established] “I 


XVIil PREFACE 


been collated with the Latin of Leo Allatius, and with two other Latin 
translations: one printed at Basle, together with a translation of the 
Almagest in 1541; the other by itself at Perugio, in 1646.1 The 
Translator has devoted all this extreme care and attention to his labours, 
in the wish to render Ptolemy’s astro-judicial doctrine into English as 


conceive to be most exact ; it was performed by Allatius.” ΤῸ the said edition 
is prefixed an anonymous address to the reader, in Latin, and to the following 
effect :-— 


“41 have reckoned it part of my duty to give you, benevolent reader, some 
short information as to the publication of this little work, which, having hitherto 
existed only in Greek,? is now, in its Latin dress, accessible to the curiosity 
of all persons. This Paraphrase of Proclus on the Tetrabiblos of Ptolemy was 
translated a few years ago by Leo Allatius, a Greek by birth, eminently skilled 
in the learning of his own nation, as well as in Latin literature, and already 
celebrated for other writings in both languages. He lives, I have understood, 
in Rome, in the family of Cardinal Biscia, and holds some office in the Vatican 
Library. He undertook his present work, however, for his own private gratifica- 
tion, and that of certain friends; but when writings compiled with this view 
have once quitted their author’s hands, it will often happen that they have 
also, at the same time, escaped his control. So this offspring of Allatius, having 
emerged from Rome, arrived at Venice, from whence it was forwarded to me 
by a certain great personage of illustrious rank, in order that I might cause it 
to be printed. The names of Ptolemy and Proclus, so celebrated among 
mathematicians and philosophers, besides the subject of the work itself, seemed 
to me a sufficient warrant for committing it to the press. Whereupon I delayed 
not to avail myself of the advantages I possessed in having access to our excellent 
and most accurate typographers, the Elzevirs, and I earnestly solicited them to 
publish it: they, in their love for the commonwealth of letters, took upon 
themselves the charge of printing it in the form you see. You will learn from 
it, inquisitive Reader, how much power the stars have over the atmosphere and 
all sublunary things: for the stars, and those brighter bodies of heaven, must 
not be imagined to be idle. The whole doctrine of the stars is not, however, 
here treated of, but only that distinct part of it which the Greeks call judicial 
and prognostic, and which, while confined within certain limits is as enter- 
taining as it is useful, and is partly considered to be agreeable to nature. Bunt 
should it pretend to subject to the skies such things as do not depend thereupon, 
and should it invite us to foresee by the stars such things as are above the 
weakness of our apprehension, it will assuredly deserve to be reprehended as a 
vain and empty art, which has been demonstrated in many learned books by 


1 This translation from the Perugio press has been serviceable in presenting 
certain various readings; but it does not seem to possess any other peculiar 
merit. It professes to be a translation from the original text of Ptolemy ; and 
so likewise does the translation printed at Basle, as above quoted. 

2 This assertion is applicable only to Proclus’s Paraphrase. ‘There were 
several prior translations of the original Tetrabiblos in Latin and Arabic; and 
it appears by an extract from the Bibliotheca Greca of Fabricius [which will be 
found in a subsequent page], that a Latin version, done from the Arabic, was 
printed at Venice as early as the year 1493. 


PREFACE xix 


purely and perfectly as possible ; and, with the same view, he has like- 
wise added, in an Appendix, certain extracts from such parts of the 
Almagest as were found to be referred to in his present work. Further 
illustration is also given by notes gathered from the “‘ Primum Mobile ” 
of Placidus,! and from a variety of other sources whence any elucidation 
of the text might be derived. Even Whalley’s ‘ Annotations ” (to use 
his own grandiloquent designation) have occasionally yielded informa- 
tion, not altogether unimportant, although generally incomplete. 

It seems improper to close this Preface (notwithstanding the bulk 
it has already attained), without annexing the following short notice 
of the life and works of the great man from whom the Tetrabiblos has 
emanated. 

Claudius Ptolemy was born at Pelusium, in A’gypt, and became an 


the great Picus of Mirandola. The Chaldeans, Genethliacs, and Planetarians, 
have been always held in disrepute, because they professed to know not only 
more than they actually did know, but also more than is allowed to man to 
know. Even Ptolemy, while he employs himself in his present work upon the 
Doctrine of Nativities, is scarcely free from the charge of superstition and 
vanity : perhaps, in a Pagan, this may be forgiven ; but it is hardly to be toler- 
ated, that persons professing Christianity should be led away by such an empty 
study, in which there is no solid utility, and the whole pleasure of which is 
puerile. Finally, I warn you that some persons doubt whether this was really 
produced by Ptolemy”: nevertheless, it has certainly appeared to Porphyry 
and Proclus (who were doubtless great philosophers, although hostile to the 
Christian faith) to be worthy of receiving elucidation by their Commentaries 
upon it.3 Peruse it, however, friendly reader, with caution, having first shaken 
off the weakness of credulity, for the sinew of wisdom is not to believe rashly. 
Farewell.” 

In addition to the remarks made in the foregoing address regarding Leo 
Allatius, it may be observed that he was appointed Keeper of the Vatican 
Library by Pope Alexander VII, with whom he was in high favour. It is said 
of him, that he had a pen with which he had written Greek for forty years, and 
that he shed tears on losing it. Another story of him states, that the Pope had 
often urged him to take holy orders, that he might be advanced in the church, 
and one day asked him why he had not done so: “ Because,” said Allatius, “1 
would be free to marry.”—‘“‘ Why, then, do you not marry? ”—“ Because I 
would be free to take orders.” —Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary. 

1 It appears by the printed works of this author, that he was named Didacus 
Placidus de Titis. He was a native of Bologna, by profession a monk, and was 
styled Mathematician to the Archduke Leopold William of Austria. He wrote 
in the earlier part of the 17th century, and his work, now cited, is considered 
to contain the most successful application of Ptolemy’s astrological rules to 
practice. The original is extremely scarce; but a new English edition, by 
Cooper, may be had of the Publishers of this work. 

2 The reader is again referred to the extract from Fabricius (inserted in a 
subsequent page), containing that learned person’s account of this book among 
the other works of Ptolemy. 

3 Their Commentaries were printed at Basle, in 1559. 


xx PREFACE 


illustrious disciple of the school of Alexandria, in which city he flourished 
during the reign of Adrian and that of Antoninus Pius. The date of his 
birth has been commonly assigned to the 7oth year of the Christian 
zera; but the accuracy of this date seems questionable ; for he has him- 
self noted in one part of his works, that Antoninus reigned twenty-three 
years. He must have, therefore, survived that prince; and, as it is 
not probable that he continued his scientific labours until after ninety 
years of age, which he must have done had he been born about the year 
70, because Antoninus died in the year 161, it seems that his birth would 
be more properly ascribed to some later period. Moreover, it is asserted 
by the Arabians, that he died in the 78th year of his age ; and a similar 
statement is also made by Luca Gauricus, in the dedication of his 
version of the Almagest! to Dominico Palavicini: Gauricus has, how- 
ever, placed his death in the year 147, which does not accord with the 
fact of his having survived Antoninus. 

Ptolemy has recorded that he observed, at Alexandria, an eclipse of 
the Moon, in the 9th year of Adrian ; and that he made many observa- 
tions upon the fixed stars in the 2nd year of Antoninus Pius: whence 
it may be concluded, that his observations upon the heavens were 
principally made during the period from a.p. 125 to A.D. 140, or there- 
abouts ; and it also follows, of course, that the supposition, entertained 
by some authors, of his identity with the Ptolemy who was always in 
attendance upon Galba, as his personal astrologer, and who promised 
Otho that he should survive Nero and obtain the empire, is entirely 
without foundation. To Gauricus’s? version of the Almagest there is 
also another dedication, addressed to Pope Sixtus, and composed by 
George Trapezuntius, describing Ptolemy as “ regid stirpe ortundum,” 
and explaining that he had, “ with a truly regal mind,” applied himself 
to the sciences, because the ancient sceptré of the Ptolemies had pre- 
viously passed into the hands of Cleopatra, and because the kingdom 
of Akgypt had been since reduced to the state of a Roman province. 
The authentic details of the circumstances of Ptolemy’s life are, how- 
ever, extremely few. It is said that he was distinguished among the 
Greeks by the epithets “‘ most wise,” and “ most divine,” on account of 
his great learning ; and, according to the Preface to Whalley’s transla- 
tion of the Tetrabiblos, the Arabians report that ‘‘ he was extremely 
abstemious, and rode much on horseback’; adding, that although he 
was “spruce in apparel,” yet his breath was not remarkable for an 
agreeable odour. 

The errors of the Ptolemaic theory of the universe have now been 
long discarded ; but there are many points in which modern sciences, 
and modern astronomy in particular, have reaped incalculable benefits 
from the labours and researches of its great founder. He has preserved 


1 Printed at Basle, 1541. 
2 Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary. 


PREFACE xxi 


and transmitted to us the observations and principal discoveries of re- 
moter periods, and has enriched and augmented them with his own. 
He corrected Hipparchus’s catalogue of the fixed stars, and formed 
tables for the calculation and regulation of the motions of the Sun, 
Moon, and planets. He was, in fact, the first who collected the scattered 
and detached observations of Aristotle, Hipparchus, Posidonius, and 
others on the economy of the world, and digested them into a system, 
which he set forth in his Meyady Xvyragis or Great Construction, 
divided into thirteen books, and called, after him, the Ptolemaic System. 
This and all his other astronomical works are founded upon the hypothe- 
sis, that the earth is at rest in the centre of the universe, and that the 
heavenly bodies, stars, and planets, all move round it in solid orbs, 
whose motions are all directed by one primum mobile, or first mover, of 
which he discourses at large in the “ Great Construction.” In that 
work he also treats of the figure and divisions of the earth, of the right 
and oblique ascensions of the heavenly bodies, and of the motions of the 
Sun, Moon, and planets ; and he gives tables for finding their situations, 
latitudes, longitudes, and motions: he treats also of eclipses, and the 
methods of computing them ; and he discourses of the fixed stars, of 
which he furnishes a numerous catalogue, with their magnitudes, lati- 
tudes, and longitudes. 

It has been truly said, that ““ Ptolemy’s order, false as it was, enabled 
observers to givea plausible account of the motions of the Sun and Moon, 
to foretell eclipses, and to improve geography? ; ” or, in other words, 
that it represented the actual phenomena of the heavens as they really 
appear to a spectator on the earth. It is therefore clear that Ptolemy’s 
astrology is just as applicable to modern and improved astronomy as it 
was to his own. 


1 In France, about the beginning of the 16th century, Oronce Finé, the 
Royal Reader, attempted, under the patronage of Francis I, to produce an 
astronomical clock, in which everything moved according to the principles 
of Ptolemy. It was kept, about fifty years ago, in the monastery of St. Geneviéve, 
at Paris. In Lilly’s Catalogue of Astrological Authors, Orontius Finzus is 
mentioned as the writer of a work on the twelve houses of heaven, printed in 
Paris, 1553. 

2 Spectacle de la Nature. 

3 The objection which has been urged against astrology, that the signs are 
continually moving from their positions, cannot invalidate this conclusion. 
That objection has, in fact, no real existence ; for Ptolemy seems to have been 
aware of this motion of the signs, and has fully provided for it in the 25th 
Chapter of the 1st Book of the Tetrabiblos. From that chapter it is clear that 
the respective influences he ascribes to the twelve signs (or divisions of the 
zodiac) were considered by him as appurtenant to the places they occupied, and 
not to the stars of which they were composed. He has expressly and repeatedly 
declared that the point of the vernal equinox is ever the beginning of the zodiac, 
and that the 30 degrees following it ever retain the same virtue as that which 
he has in this work attributed to Aries, although the stars forming Aries may 


Xxli PREFACE 


In the year 827! the “‘ Great Construction ” was translated by the 
Arabians into their own language, and by them communicated to 
Eurepe. It is through them that it has been usually known by the name 
of the Almagest. In the 13th century, the Emperor Frederic II 
caused it to be translated from the Arabic into Latin, and Sacrobosco? 
was consequently enabled to write his famous work upon the sphere. 
It was not, however, until about the end of the 15th century that the 
“Great Construction ” was translated into Latin from the original 
text ; and this important service was rendered to science by Purbach, a 
_professor of philosophy at Vienna, who learned the Greek tongue at the 
instigation of Cardinal Bessarion. By means of this translation, the 
Ephemerides of George Miiller, surnamed Regiomontanus, a disciple 
of Purbach’s, were first composed. ‘The Greek text of the Almagest, or 
Great Construction, was first published at Basle, by Simon Grynzus, in 
1538; and it was again printed at the same place in 1551, with certain 
other works of Ptolemy.? The rest of Ptolemy’s works connected with 
astronomy, and now extant, are the Tetrabiblos, or Four Books of the 
Influence of the Stars* (now translated) ; the Centiloquy, or Fruit of his 
Four Books, being a kind of supplement to the former; and the 
Significations of the Fixed Stars. The last is merely a daily calendar, 


have quitted those degrees: the next 30 degrees are still be accounted as 
Taurus, and so of the rest. There is abundant proof throughout the Tetrabiblos, 
that Ptolemy considered the virtues of the constellations of the zodiac distinctly 
from those of the spaces they occupied. 

1 The French say 813, but $27 is the date given by English chronologists. 

2 ‘This scientific man was a Mathurine Friar, and a professor in the University 
of Paris: he died in 1256. It is pointed out in the Edinburgh Review, No. 68, 
that he was a native of Yorkshire, and his real name John Holywood, euphonized, 
in Paris, into Sacrobosco. 

3 Chalmers.—The Tetrabiblos was among these works. 

4 To such readers as may be curious to know in what manner this book 
was promulgated in Europe, after the revival of letters, the following extract 
from the Bibliotheca Greca of Fabricius will furnish information :— 

“Lib, IV. Cap. XIV. §4. Τετραβιβλος, Συνταξις Μαθηματικὴ Quadri- 
partitum, sive quatuor libri de apotelesmatibus et judiciis astrorum, ad Syrum (h). 
Grece primum editi a Foachimo Camerario, cum versione sua duorum priorum 
librorum, et precipuorum e reliquis locorum. Norimb. 1535, 4to.—Hinc cum 
versione Phil, Melancthonis, qui in prefat. ad Eraamum Ebnerum. Senatorem 
Norimbergensem testatur se editionem Camerarii multis mendis purgasse, tum 
numeros in locis apheticis tam Greci quam Latini textus emendasse. Basil, 
1553, 8vo.—Latine pridem verterat Aigidius Tebaldinus, sive latino-barbaré 
ex Hispanica versione, Alfonsi Castella Regis jussu, ex Arabico (i) confecta. 
Vertit et Antonius Gogava, Lovan. 1548, 4to; Patavii, 1658, 1zmo; Pragze, 
1610, 12mo. Commentario illustravit Hieron. Cardanus prioribus duobus 
libris Camerarii, posterioribus Gogave versione servata, Basil, 1554, fol. ; 
1579, fol.; Lugd. 1555, 8vo, et in Cardani opp.—Georgit Valle com- 
mentarius, anno 1502 editus, nihil aliud est, quam Latina versio scholiorum 


PREFACE Xxlii 


showing the risings and settings of the stars, and the nature of the weather 
thereby produced. ‘There are likewise extant his geographical work 
(which has rendered important service to modern geographers), and also 
his celebrated book on Harmonics, or the Theory of Sound. 

Proclus, to whom the world is indebted for the improved text of the 
Tetrabiblos,1 was born at Constantinople, in the year 410. He studied 


Grezcorum, sive exegeseos jejune Demophili in tetrabiblon, que cum 
Porphyrit sive Antiocht isagoge, Grece et Latine, addita Huzeron Wolf 
versione, lucem vidit Basil. 1559, fol. In his scholiis Dorotheus allegatur, p. 48, 
110, et 139; Cleopatra, p. 88; Porphyrius Philosophus, p. 169. Meminit et 
auctor Petosiridis ac Necepso, p. 112 :—Aeyet de παλαιον tov Nexeyw (ita leg. 
pro χεῴψω ut p. 112) και Πετοσιριν, ovrot yap πρωτοι to δὲ αςρολογιας 
ἐχηπλωσαν mpoyvwsixov? Paraphrasin tetrabibli a Proclo concinnatam Grace 
edidit Melancthon, Basil. 1554, 8vo. Greece et Latine cum versione sua 
Leo Allatius, Lugd. Batav. 1654, 8vo. Locum Ptolemzi e codice Greco 
MS. in collegio Corporis Christi Oxon, feliciter restituit Seldenus, p. 35 ad 
Marmora Arundeliana. Haly Heben Rodoan Arabis commentarium laudat 
Cardanus, cum Demophilo Latine editum.” 

“ (8) Schol. Grec.—IIpoogwver tw Συρω o Πτολεμαῖος to βιβλιον, προς 
ον και TAS αλλας αὐυτου TATAS πραγματειας προσεφωνησεν. Λεγουσι δε τινες 
ws πέπλαξςαι αὐτο το του Συρω ονομα. Αλλοι de ort ov πεπλαςαι, αλλ᾽ ιατρος 
nu ουὅτος αχθεις και δια τουτων των μαθηματων. 

“() Selden. Uxor Hebr. p. 342. Czterum de Alphonsi Regis cura in 
promovenda Arabica Quadripartiti versione, vide, si placet, Nic: Antonium 
in Bibl. veteri Hispana, t. 2, p. 55, vel Acta Erud. A. 1697, p. 302. Latino 
versio ex Arabico facta lucem vidit Venet, 1493, fol. Viderit porro Gassendus 
qui in Philosophia Epicuri, ubi contra Astrologos disputat. t. 2, p. 501. con- 
tendit tetrabiblon indignum esse Ptolemzi genio et subdititum. Equidem Jo. 
Pico judice, 1. 1, contra Astrologos, p. 285, Ptolemzus malorum sive Apoteles- 
maticorum est optimus.” 

1 Tt will be seen by the preceding note, that Proclus’s Paraphrase of the 
Tetrabiblos should properly be considered as superior to the other readings 
of that book ; since it appears, on the authority of Fabricius, that Melancthon, 
after having been at the pains of correcting and republishing, in 1553 (with 
his own emendations), the edition of Camerarius, containing the reputed 
original text, still deemed it advisible, in the following year, to edit Proclus’s 
Paraphrase. This Paraphrase must, therefore, necessarily have had claims to 
his attention not found in the text he had previously edited.4 

2 “ Nechepsos and Petosiris are anciently spoken of, for they first explained 
prognostication by Astrology.” 

3 This was perhaps a reprint of the edition of 1635, from which the present 
translation has been made; unless there may have been an error of the press 
in stating 1654 instead of 1635, which seems probable, as the edition of 1635. 
is unnoticed by Fabricius. 

4 “ Ptolemy addresses the book to Syrus, to whom he has also addressed all 
his other treatises. Some say that this name of Syrus was feigned; others, 
that it was not feigned, but that he was a physician, and educated in these 
sciences.” 


XXIV PREFACE 


at Alexandria and at Athens, and became very eminent among the later 
Platonists. He succeeded Syrianus, a celebrated philosopher, in the 
rectorship of the Platonic school at Athens, and died there in 485.1 He 
was a most voluminous author, in poetry as well as in prose. Among 
his works there are Hymns to the Sun, to Venus, and to the Muses ; 
Commentaries upon several pieces of Plato, and upon Ptolemy’s 
Tetrabiblos?; an Epitome or Commendium of all the Astronomical 
Precepts demonstrated in the Almagest; and elements of Theology 
and Natural Philosophy. He was in dispute with the Christians on the 
question of the eternity of the world, which he undertook to prove in 
eighteen elaborate arguments. A late writer in a certain periodical 
work has erroneously identified him with another Proclus, who was in 
favour with the Emperor Anastasius, and who destroyed the ships of 
Vitalianus, when besieging Constantinople in 514, by burning them 
with great brazen mirrors, or specula. 


Signs of the Zodiac. 
¢” Aries -- Libra 
8% ‘Taurus ™m Scorpio 
π Gemini _f Sagittarius 
σρ Cancer ve Capricorn 
8 Leo wv Aquarius 
ny Virgo % Pisces 


1 Chalmer’s Biographical Dictionary. 
2 It will, of course, be understood that this Commentary is distinct from 
his Paraphrase, now translated. 


PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 


OR 


FOUR BOOKS 


OF THE 


INFLUENCE OF THE STARS 
BOOK THE FIRST 


CHAPTER I 


PROEM 


Te studies preliminary to astronomical prognostication, O 
Syrus! are two: the one, first alike in order and in power, 
leads to the knowledge of the figurations of the Sun, the 
Moon, and the stars; and of their relative aspects to each other, and 
to the earth: the other takes into consideration the changes which 
their aspects create, by means of their natural properties, in objects 
under their influence. 

The first mentioned study has been already explained in the 
Syntaxis! to the utmost practicable extent; for it is complete in 
itself, and of essential utility even without being blended with the 
second ; to which this treatise will be devoted, and which is not equally 
self-complete. ‘The present work shall, however, be regulated by that 
due regard for truth which philosophy demands: and since the 
material quality of the objects acted upon renders them weak and 
variable, and difficult to be accurately apprehended, no positive or 
infallible rules (as were given in detailing the first doctrine, which is 
always governed by the same immutable laws) can be here set forth: 
while, on the other hand, a due observation of most of those general 
events, which evidently trace their causes to the Ambient, shall not 
be omitted. 

It is, however, a common practice with the vulgar to slander every- 
thing which is difficult of attainment, and surely they who condemn 
the first of these two studies must be considered totally blind, what- 
ever arguments may be produced in support of those who impugn the 
second. ‘There are also persons who imagine that whatever they 


1 The Almagest, or Magna Constructio. 


2 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


themselves have not been able to acquire, must be utterly beyond the 
reach of all understanding ; while others again will consider as useless 
any science of which (although they may have been often instructed 
in it) they have failed to preserve the recollection, owing to its diffi- 
culty of retention. In reference to these opinions, therefore, an 
endeavour shall be made to investigate the extent to which prognosti- 
cation by astronomy is practicable, as well as serviceable, previously to 
detailing the particulars of the doctrine. 


CHAPTER II 
KNOWLEDGE MAY BE ACQUIRED BY ASTRONOMY TO A CERTAIN EXTENT 


THAT a certain power, derived from the ethereal nature, is diffused 
over and pervades the whole atmosphere of the earth, is clearly evident 
to all men. Fire and air, the first of the sublunary elements, are 
encompassed and altered by the motions of the ether. These elements 
in their turn encompass all inferior matter, and vary it as they them- 
selves are varied ; acting on earth and water, on plants and animals. 


1 The following extract from an old geographical work, framed on the 
rules of Ptolemy, explains the system on which this action of the ether is made 
to depend :— 

“Chap. 2. The world is divided into two parts, the elemental region and the 
ethereal. The elemental region is constantly subject to alteration, and com- 
prises the four elements; earth, water, air and fire. The ethereal region, 
which philosophers call the fifth essence, encompasses, by its concavity, the 
elemental ; its substance remains always unvaried, and consists of ten spheres ; 
of which the greater one always spherically environs the next smaller, and so 
on in consecutive order. First, therefore, around the sphere of fire, Gop, 
the creator of the world, placed the sphere of the Moon, then that of Mercury, 
then that of Venus, then that of the Sun, and afterwards those of Mars, of 
Jupiter, and of Saturn. Each of these spheres, however, contains but one 
star: and these stars, in passing through the zodiac, always struggle against 
the primum mobile, or the motion of the tenth sphere; they are also entirely 
luminous. In the next place follows the firmament, which is the eighth or 
starry sphere, and which trembles or vibrates (trepidat) in two small circles at 
the beginning of Aries and Libra (as placed in the ninth sphere) ; this motion 
is called by astronomers the motion of the access and recess of the fixed stars.” 
(Probably in order to account for the procession of the equinoxes.) ‘‘'This is 
surrounded by the ninth sphere, called the chrystalline or watery heaven, 
because no star is discovered in it. Lastly, the primum mobile, styled also the 
tenth sphere, encompasses all the before-mentioned zthereal spheres, and is 
continually turned upon the poles of the world, by one revolution in twenty-four 
hours, from the east through the meridian to the west, again coming round to 
the east. At the same time, it rolls all the inferior spheres round with it, by 
its own force ; and there is no star init. Against this primum mobile, the motion 
of the other spheres, running from the west through the meridian to the east, 


CHAP. II. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 3 


The Sun, always acting in connection with the Ambient, contributes 
to the regulation of all earthly things: not only by the revolution of 
the seasons does he bring to perfection the embryo of animals, the 
buds of plants, the spring of waters, and the alteration of bodies, but 
by his daily progress also he operates other changes in light, heat, 
moisture, dryness and cold ; dependent upon his situation with regard 
to the zenith. 

The Moon, being of all the heavenly bodies the nearest to the 
Earth, also dispenses much influence; and things animate and in- 
animate sympathize and vary with her. By the changes of her illumin- 
ation, rivers swell and are reduced; the tides of the sea are ruled by 
her risings and settings; and plants and animals are expanded or 
collapsed, if not entirely at least partially, as she waxes or wanes. 

The stars likewise (as well the fixed stars as the planets), in performing 
their revolutions, produce many impressions on the Ambient. They 
cause heats, winds, and storms, to the influence of which earthly things 
are conformably subjected. 

And, further, the mutual configurations of all these heavenly bodies, 
by commingling the influence with which each is separately invested, 
produce a multiplicity of changes. The power of the Sun however 
predominates, because it is more generally distributed; the others 
either co-operate with his power or diminish its effect: the Moon more 
frequently and more plainly performs this at her conjunction, at her 
first and last quarter, and at her opposition: the stars act also to a 
similar purpose, but at longer intervals and more obscurely than the 
Moon ; and their operation principally depends upon the mode of their 
visibility, their occultation and their declination. 

From these premises it follows not only that all bodies, which may 
be already compounded, are subjected to the motion of the stars, but 
also that the impregnation and growth of the seeds from which all 
bodies proceed, are framed and moulded by the quality existing in the 
Ambient at the time of such impregnation and growth. And it is upon 
this principle that the more observant husbandmen and shepherds are 
accustomed, by drawing their inferences from the particular breezes 
which may happen at seed-time and at the impregnation of their cattle, 
to form predictions as to the quality of the expected produce. In 
short, however unlearned in the philosophy of nature, these men can 
foretell, solely by their previous observation, all the more general and 


contends, Whatever is beyond this, is fixed and immovable, and the professors 
of our orthodox faith affirm it to be the empyrean heaven which Gop inhabits 
with the elect.””—Cosmographia of Peter Apianus (named Benewitz), dedicated 
to the Archbishop of Saltzburg, edited by Gemma Frisius, and printed at 
Antwerp 1574. 

1 It will be recollected that the Ptolemaic astronomy attributes motion and 
a regular course to those stars which we now call fixed, but which the Greeks 
merely termed amAaveis, undeviating. 


4 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book 1. 


usual effects which result from the plainer and more visible configura- 
tions of the Sun, Moon, and stars. It is daily seen that even most 
illiterate persons, with no other aid than their own experienced observa- 
tion, are capable of predicting events which may be consequent on the 
more extended influence of the Sun and the more simple order of the 
Ambient, and which may not be open to variation by any complex 
configurations of the Moon and stars towards the Sun. ‘There are, 
moreover, among the brute creation, animals who evidently form 
prognostication, and use this wonderful instinct at the changes of the 
several seasons of the year, spring, summer, autumn, and winter ; and, 
also, at the changes of the wind. 

In producing the changes of the seasons, the Sun itself is chiefly the 
operating and visible cause. ‘There are, however, other events which, 
although they are not indicated in so simple a manner, but dependent 
on a slight complication of causes in the Ambient, are also foreknown by 
persons who have applied their observation to that end. Of this kind, 
are tempests and gales of wind, produced by certain aspects of the Moon, 
or the fixed stars, towards the Sun, according to their several courses, and 
the approach of which is usually foreseen by mariners. At the same 
time, prognostication made by persons of this class must be frequently 
fallacious, owing to their deficiency in science and their consequent in- 
ability to give necessary consideration to the time and place, or to the 
revolutions of the planets; all which circumstances, when exactly 
defined and understood, certainly tend towards accurate foreknowledge. 

When, therefore, a thorough knowledge of the motions of the stars, 
and of the Sun and Moon, shall have been acquired, and when the situa- 
tion of the place, the time, and all the configurations actually existing 
at that place and time, shall also be duly known; and such knowledge 
be yet further improved by an acquaintance with the natures of the 
heavenly bodies—not of what they are composed, but of the effective — 
influences they possess ; as, for instance, that heat is the property of the 
Sun, and moisture of the Moon, and that other peculiar properties 
respectively appertain to the rest of them ;—when all these qualifica- 
tions for prescience may be possessed by any individual, there seems 
no obstacle to deprive him of the insight, offered at once by nature and 
his own judgment, into the effects arising out of the quality of all the 
various influences compounded together. So that he will thus be com- 
petent to predict the peculiar constitution of the atmosphere in every 
season, as, for instance, with regard to its greater heat or moisture, or 
other similar qualities ; all which may be foreseen by the visible position 
or configuration of the stars and the Moon towards the Sun. 

Since it is thus clearly practicable, by an accurate knowledge of the 
points above enumerated, to make predictions concerning the proper 
quality of the seasons, there also seems no impediment to the formation 
of similar prognostication concerning the destiny and disposition of 
every human being. For by the constitution of the Ambient, even at 


CHAP. I1.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS ς 


the time of any individual’s primary conformation, the general quality 
of that individual’s temperament may be perceived ; and the corporeal 
shape and mental capacity with which the person will be endowed at 
birth may be pronounced ; as well as the favourable and unfavourable 
events indicated by the state of the Ambient, and liable to attend the 
individual at certain future periods; since, for instance, an event 
dependent on one disposition of the Ambient will be advantageous to a 
particular temperament, and that resulting from another unfavourable 
and injurious. From these circumstances, and others of similar im- 
port, the possibility of prescience is certainly evident. 

There are, however, some plausible assailants of this doctrine, whose 
attacks although greatly misapplied seem yet worthy of the following 
observations. 

In the first place, the science demands the greatest study and a con- 
stant attention to a multitude of different points; and as all persons 
who are but imperfectly practised in it must necessarily commit fre- 
quent mistakes, it has been supposed that even such events as have been 
truly predicted have taken place by chance only, and not from any 
Operative cause in nature. But it should be remembered that these 
mistakes arise, not from any deficiency or want of power in the science 
itself, but from the incompetency of unqualified persons who pretend to 
exercise it. And, besides this, the majority of the persons who set 
themselves up as professors of this science, avail themselves of its name 
and credit for the sake of passing off some other mode of divination ; 
by that means defrauding the ignorant, and pretending to foretell many 
things which from their nature cannot possibly be foreknown; and 
consequently affording opportunities to more intelligent people to 
impugn the value even of such predictions as can rationally be made. 
The reproach, however, thus brought upon the science is wholly 
unmerited ; for it would be equally just to condemn all other branches 
of philosophy, because each numbers among its professors some mis- 
chievous pretenders. 

Secondly, it is not attempted to be denied that any individual, 
although he may have attained to the greatest possible accuracy in the 
science, must still be liable to frequent error, arising out of the very 
nature of his undertaking, and from the weakness of his limited capacity 
in comparison with the magnitude of his object. For the whole theory 
of the quality of matter is supported by inference rather than by positive 
and scientific proof; and this is caused principally by the concretion 
of its temperament out of a multitude of dissimilar ingredients. And, 
although the former configurations of the planets have been observed 
to produce certain consequences (which have been adapted to configura- 
tions now taking place), and are, after long periods, and in a greater 
or less degree, resembled by subsequent configurations, yet these subse- 
quent configurations never become exactly similar to those which have 
preceded them. For an entire return of all the heavenly bodies to the 


6 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


exact situation in which they have once stood with regard to the earth 
will never take place, or at least not in any period determinable by human 
calculation, whatever vain attempts may be made to acquire such un- 
attainable knowledge.1 The examples referred to for guidance being 
therefore not exactly similar to the existing cases to which they are now 
applied, it must naturally follow that predictions are sometimes not 
borne out by the events. Hence arises the sole difficulty in the con- 
sideration of events produced by the Ambient. For no other con- 
current cause has been hitherto combined with the motion of the 
heavenly bodies; although the doctrine of nativities, particularly 
that part of it relating to peculiar individual temperament, demands 
also the consideration of other concomitant causes, which are neither 
trifling nor unimportant, but essentially potent in affecting the in- 
dividual properties of the creatures born. Thus the variety in seed has 
the chief influence in supplying the peculiar quality of each species ; 
for, under the same disposition of the Ambient and of the horizon, each 
various kind of seed prevails in determining the distinct formation of 
its own proper species ; thus man is born, or the horse is foaled ; and 
by the same law are brought forth all the other various creatures and 
productions of the earth. It is also to be remembered, that considerable 
variations are caused in all creatures by the respective places where they 
may be brought forth: for although, under the same disposition of the 
Ambient, the germs of the future creatures may be of one species, 
whether human or of the horse, the difference in situation, of the places 
in which they are generated, produces a dissimilarity in the body and 
spirit of one from the body and spirit of another: and in addition to 
this it must be considered that different modes of nurture, and the 
variety of ranks, manners, and customs, contribute to render the course 
of life of one individual greatly different from that of another?; con- 


1 There seems reason to suppose that this was a favourite speculation among 
the ancients. In Scipio’s Dream, as related by Cicero, the phantom of his 
illustrious grandfather is made to speak of this entire return of all the celestial 
bodies to some original position which they once held, as being the completion 
of the revolution of one great universal year: and the phantom adds, “ but 
I must acquaint you that not one-twentieth part of that great year has been 
yet accomplished.” 

This quotation is from memory, and perhaps may not be verbally 
correct. 

2 In this passage the author seems to have anticipated, and exposed the 
absurdity of an argument now considered very forcible against astrology: viz. 
that “if the art were true, then any two individuals born under the same 
meridian, in the same latitude, and at the same moment of time, must have one 
and the same destiny; although one were born a prince, and the other a 
mendicant.” Such a monstrous conclusion is nowhere authorized by any 
astrological writer ; it is, on the contrary, always maintained by all of them, 
that the worldly differences and distinctions, alluded to in the text, inevitably 


CHAP. 1.7 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 7 


sequently, unless every one of these varieties be duly blended with the 
causes arising in the Ambient, the prejudgment of any event will 
doubtless be very incomplete. For, although the greatest multiplicity 
of power exists in the Ambient, and although all other things act as con- 
current causes in unison with it, and can never claim it as a concurrent 
cause in subservience to them, there will still, nevertheless, be a great 
deficiency in predictions attempted to be made by means of the heavenly 
motions alone, without regard to the other concurrent causes just now 
adverted to. 

Under these circumstances, it would seem judicious neither to deny 
altogether the practicability of prescience, because prognostications 
thus imperfectly derived are sometimes liable to be fallacious ; nor, on 
the other hand, to admit that all events, whatever, are open to previous 
inquiry ; as if such inquiry could in all cases be securely conducted 
without having recourse to mere inference, and as if it were not limited 
by the narrow extent of mere human abilities. The art of navigation, 
for instance, is not rejected, although it is in many points incomplete ; 
therefore the bare fact that predictions are frequently imperfect cannot 
authorise the rejection of the art of prescience: the magnitude of its 
scope, and the faint resemblance that it bears to a divine attribute, 
should rather demand grateful commendations, and receive the utmost 
regard and attention. And, since no weakness is imputed to a physician, 
because he inquires into the individual habit of his patient, as well as 
into the nature of the disease, no imputation can justly attach to the 
professor of prognostication, because he combines the consideration of 
species, nurture, education and country, with that of the motion of the 
heavens: for as the physician acts but reasonably, in thus considering 
the proper constitution of the sick person as well as his disease ; so, in 
forming predictions, it must surely be justifiably allowable to compre- 
hend in that consideration every other thing connected with the subject 
in addition to the motion of the heavens, and to collect and compare 
with that motion all other co-operating circumstances arising elsewhere. 


prevent this exact resemblance of destiny ; and all that they presume to assert 
is, that, in their respective degrees, any two individuals, so born, will have a 
partial similarity in the leading features of their fate. Whether their assertion 
is uniformly borne out, I will not take upon me to determine, but it would be 
unfair not to subjoin the following fact :— 

In the newspapers of the month of February, 1820, the death of a Mr. Samuel 
Hemmings is noticed: it was stated that he had been an ironmonger, and 
prosperous in trade ; that he was born on the 4th of June, 1738, at nearly the 
same moment as his late Majesty, and in the same parish of St. Martin’s-in-the- 
Fields ; that he went into business for himself in October, 1760; that he 
married on the 8th September, 1761 ; and finally, after other events of his life 
had resembled those which happened to the late King, that he died on Saturday, 
the 29th January, 1820. 

These coincidences are, at least, highly remarkable. 


Β΄ PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [Book 1. 


CHAPTER III 
THAT PRESCIENCE IS USEFUL 


Ir appears, then, that prescience by astronomy is possible under certain 
adaptation ; and that alone it will afford premonition, as far as symptoms 
in the Ambient enable it to do so, of all such events as happen to men by 
the influence of the Ambient. These events are, from their commence- 
ment, always in conformity with the spiritual and corporeal faculties, 
and their occasional affections; as well as with the shorter or longer 
duration of those affections. They are also conformable with other 
things which, although not actually in man’s immediate person, are still 
absolutely and naturally connected with him: in connection with his 
body they are applicable to his estate, and his conjugal cohabitations ; 
in connection with his spirit, they relate to his offspring? and his rank ; 
and they are also connected with all fortuitous circumstances which may 
occasionally befall him. 

That the foreknowledge of these can be attained has already been 
demonstrated ; and it remains to speak of the utility of the attainment. 
First, however, let it be said in what respect and with what view it is 
proposed to draw advantage from this science ; if it be considered in its 
tendency to promote the good of the mind, no object more advantageous 
can surely be wanting to induce the world to rejoice and delight in it, 
since it offers an acquaintance with things divine and human: if it be 
considered in respect to the benefits it is capable of conferring on the 
body, its utility in this view also, will be found on comparison to excel 
that of all other arts conducive to the comforts of life, for it is of 
more general application and service than all the others together. And, 
although it may be objected to the art of prescience, that it does not 
co-operate towards the acquirement of riches or glory, let it also be 
remembered that the same objection attaches to every other art and 
science ; since there it not one which can of itself produce either riches 
or glory, not yet is there one which is on that plea deemed useless : 
it seems, therefore, that the science of prognostication, with its high 
qualifications and its aptitude to the most important objects, does not, in 
any greater degree, deserve to be condemned. 

In general, however, the persons who attack and reprobate it as being 
useless, do not pay due regard to the manner in which it becomes 
necessary ; but deny its utility on the specious argument that it 18 


1 The Greek word for this, γοναι, though found in the Elzevir edition 
from which this translation is made, does not appear in other copies; the 
Basle edition of 1553 says merely, ἢ τε τιμὴ και To αἀξιωμα, “ honour and rank,” 
which is the sense also given in the Latin translation of Perugio, 1646, without 
any mention of “ offspring.” 


CHAP. III. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 9 


superfluous and puerile to attempt to foreknow things which must 
inevitably come to pass: thus considering it in a mode at once ab- 
stracted, unlearned, and unfair. For, in the first place, this fact ought 
to be kept in view, that events which necessarily and fully happen, 
whether exciting fear or creating joy, if arriving unforeseen, will either 
overwhelm the mind with terror or destroy its composure by sudden 
delight ; if, however, such events should have been foreknown, the mind 
will have been previously prepared for their reception, and will preserve 
an equable calmness, by having been accustomed to contemplate the 
approaching event as though it were present, so that, on its actual 
arrival, it will be sustained with tranquillity and constancy. 

In the next place, it must not be imagined that all things happen to 
mankind, as though every individual circumstance were ordained by 
divine decree and some indissoluble supernal cause ; nor is it to be 
thought that all events are shown to proceed from one single inevitable 
fate, without being influenced by the interposition of any other agency. 
Such an opinion is entirely inadmissable ; for it is on the contrary most 
essential to observe, not only the heavenly motion which, perfect in 
its divine institution and order, is eternally regular and undeviating ; 
but also the variety which exists in earthly things, subjected to and 
diversified by the institutions and courses of nature, and in connection 
with which the superior cause operates in respect to the accidents 
produced. 

It is further to be remarked that man is subject, not only to events 
applicable to his own private and individual nature, but also to others 
arising from general causes. He suffers, for instance, by pestilences, 
inundations, or conflagrations, produced by certain extensive changes in 
the Ambient, and destroying multitudes at once; since a greater and 
more powerful agency must of course always absorb and overcome one 
that is more minute and weaker. In great changes, therefore, where a 
stronger cause predominates, more general affections, like those just 
mentioned, are put in operation, but affections which attach to one 
individual solely are excited when his own natural constitution peculiar 
to himself may be overcome by some opposing impulse of the Ambient, 
however small or faint. And in this point of view it is manifest that all 
events whatsoever, whether general or particular, of which the primary 
cause is strong and irresistible, and against which no other contrary 
agency has sufficient power to interpose, must of necessity be wholly 
fulfilled ; and that events indicated by a minor cause must of course be 
prevented and annihilated, when some other agency may be found 
contending for an opposite effect; if, however, no such opposing 
agency can be found, they also must be fulfilled, in due succession to the 
primary cause. Nevertheless, the fulfilment of events thus indicated 
must not be ascribed solely to the vigour of the cause producing them, 
nor to any inevitable fate, but rather to the absence of any opposing 
influence capable of prevention. And thus, with all things whatsoever 


B 


10 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book I. 


which trace their causes and origin to nature, the case is exactly similar ; 
for stones,? plants, animals, wounds, passions, and diseases, all will of 
necessity operate on man to a certain degree; and they fail to do so, 
if antidotes be found and applied against their influence. 

In exercising prognostication, therefore, strict care must be taken 
to foretell future events by that natural process only which is admitted 
in the doctrine here delivered; and, setting aside all vain and un- 
founded opinions, to predict that, when the existing agency is manifold 
and great, and of a power impossible to be resisted, the corresponding 
event which it indicates shall absolutely take place ; and also, in other 
cases, that another event shall not happen when its exciting causes are 
counteracted by some interposing influence. It is in this manner that 
experienced physicians, accustomed to the observation of diseases, 
foresee that some will be inevitably mortal, and that others are sus- 
ceptible of cure. 

Thus, when any opinion is given by the astrologer with respect to the 
various accidents liable to happen, it should be understood that he 
advances nothing more than this proposition ; viz. that, by the property 
inherent in the Ambient, any conformation of it, suitable to a particular 
temperament, being varied more or less, will produce in that tempera- 
ment some particular affection. And it is also to be understood that 
he ventures this opinion with the same degree of confidence, as that with 
which a physician may declare that a certain wound will increase or 
grow putrid; or a man acquainted with metals say that the magnet? 
will attract iron. But neither the increase nor putrefaction of the wound 
nor the magnet’s attraction of iron, is ordained by any inevitable law, 
although these consequences must necessarily follow, in due obedience 
to the first principles of the existing order of nature, when no means 
of prevention can be found and applied. But, however, neither of these 
consequences will take place, when such antidotes shall be presented as 
will naturally prevent them—and a similar consideration should be 
given to the predictions of the astrologer—because, if garlick be rubbed 


1 In allusion to the sympathetic powers anciently attributed to certain 
stones. 

2 Whalley, in translating this chapter, makes the following remark on this 
mention of the magnet: ‘“ However much later it was that the loadstone 
became known in Europe, what is mentioned of it in this chapter makes it 
evident that it was known in Agypt, where Ptolemy lived, in his time.”—That 
worthy translator forgot (if indeed he ever knew) that the loadstone’s property 
of attracting iron was known to Thales, and commented on by Plato and 
Aristotle, all of whom lived some centuries, more or less, before Ptolemy. It 
is its polarity that was not known until the 11th or 12th century; and the 
French say that the earliest notice of that polarity is found in a poem of Guyot 
of Provence, who was at the Emperor Frederick’s Court at Mentz in 1181.— 

866 the French Encyclopedia, &c. 


CHAP. III. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS II 


on the magnet, iron will experience no attraction ;1 and if proper 
medicines be applied to the wound, it will cease to increase or to putrefy. 
And therefore all events which happen to mankind take place also in the 
regular course of nature, when no impediments thereto are found or 
known: but again, on the other hand, if any impediments or obstruc- 
tions be found in the way of events which may be predicted by the 
regular course of nature to happen, such events will either not take 
place at all, or, if they should take place, will be much diminished in their 
force and extent. 

The same order and consequence exist in all cases, whether the events 
have a general or only a particular operation; and it may therefore 
well be demanded, why prescience is believed to be possible as far as it 
regards general events, and why it is allowed to be serviceable in prepar- 
ing for their approach ; while in particular instances its power and use 
are altogether denied. That the weather and the seasons, and the in- 
dications of the fixed stars, as well as the configurations of the Moon, 
afford means of prognostication, many persons admit; and they 
exercise this foreknowledge for their own preservation and comfort, 
adapting their constitutions to the expected temperature, by cooling 
and refreshing things for the summer, and by warm things for the winter. 
They also watch the significations of the fixed stars, to avoid dangerous 
weather, in making voyages by sea; and they notice the aspects of the 


1 Respecting the effect here asserted to be produced on the magnet by 
garlick, I have found the following mention in a book called “‘ The Gardener’s 
Labyrinth,” printed at London in 1586. ‘ Here also 1 thought not to ouerpasse 
the maruellous discord of the adamant-stone and garlike, which the Grcekes 
name to be an Antipatheia or naturall contrarietie betweene them ; for such 
is the hatred or contrarietie between these two bodies (lacking both hearing and 
feeling), that the adamant rather putteth away, than draweth to it, iron, if the 
same afore be rubbed with garlike ; as Plutarchus hath noted, and, after him, 
Claudius Ptolemeus. Which matter, examined by diuers learned, and founde 
the contrarie, caused them to judge, that those skilful men (especially Ptolemie) 
ment the same to be done with the Egyptian Garlike ; which Dioscorides wrote 
to be small garlike, and the same sweete in taste, possessing a bewtifull head, 
tending unto a purple colour. There be which attribute the same to Ophio- 
scoridon, which Antonius Microphonius Biturix, a singular learned man, and 
wel practised in sundry skilles, uttered this approoued secrete to a friend whom 
he loued.” 

In the same book, the ““ Ophioscoridon ” is thus spoken of: “There is 
another wild garlike which the Greekes name Ophioscoridon; in English 
Ramsies ; growing of the owne accord in the fallow fieldes.” 

Cornelius Agrippa (according to the English translation) has stated that 
the presence of the diamond also neutralizes the attractive power of the magnet. 
But as that great magician was somewhat inclined to quibbling, it is not 
impossible that by the word he uses for “‘ diamond ” (viz. adamas) he may mean 
the adamant or loadstone ; which would reduce his assertion merely to this,” 
that one magnet will counteract another. 


12 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book I. 


Moon, when at the full, in order to direct the copulation of their herds 
and flocks, and the setting of plants or sewing of seeds: and there is not 
an individual who considers these general precautions as impossible or 
unprofitable. Still, however, these same persons withhold their assent 
to the possibility of applying prescience to particular cases ; such, for 
instance, as any particular excess or diminution of cold or heat, whether 
arising out of the peculiar temperament producing the original cold or 
heat, or from the combination of other properties ; nor do they admit 
that there are any means of guarding against many of these particular 
circumstances. And yet, if it be clear that persons, who prepare them- 
selves by cooling things, are less affected by any general heat of the 
weather, there seems no reason for supposing that a similar preparation 
would not be equally effectual against any particular conjuncture 
oppressed by immoderate heat. It appears, however, that this idea, 
of the impracticability of attaining foreknowledge of particular 
circumstances, must originate solely in the mere difficulty of the 
acquirement ; which difficulty is certainly rendered peculiarly arduous 
by the necessity of conducting the enquiry with the greatest accuracy 
and precision : and to this it must be added, that, as there is rarely found 
a person capable of arranging the whole subject so perfectly that no 
part of the opposing influence can escape his attention, it frequently 
happens that predictions are not properly regulated by due consideration 
of that opposing influence, and that the effects are at once considered 
fully liable to be brought to pass, agreeably to the primary agency and 
without any intervention. This defect, of not sufficiently considering 
the opposing influence, has naturally induced an opinion that all future 
events are entirely unalterable and inevitable. But, since the fore- 
knowledge of particular circumstances, although it may not wholly 
claim infallibility, seems yet so far practicable as to merit consideration, 
so the precaution it affords, in particular circumstances, deserves in like 
manner to be attended to ; and, if it be not of universal advantage, but 
useful in few instances only, it is still most worthy of estimation, and 
to be considered of no moderate value. Of this, the Aigyptians seem 
to have been well aware; their discoveries of the great faculties of this 
science have exceeded those of other nations, and they have in all cases 
combined the medical art with astronomical prognostication. And, 
had they been of opinion that all expected events are unalterable and 
not to be averted, they never would have instituted any propitiations, 
remedies, and preservatives against the influence of the Ambient, 
whether present or approaching, general or particular. But, by means 
of the science called by them Medical Mathematics, they combined 
with the power of prognostication the concurrent secondary influence 
arising out of the institutions and courses of nature, as well as the con- 
trary influence which might be procured out of nature’s variety ; and 
by means of these they rendered the indicated agency useful and ad- 
vantageous: since their astronomy pointed out to them the kind of 


CHAP. Iv. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 13 


temperament liable to be acted upon, as well as the events about to 
proceed from the Ambient, and the peculiar influence of those events, 
while their medical skill made them acquainted with everything suitable 
or unsuitable to each of the effects to be procured. And it is by this 
process that remedies for, present and preservatives against future 
disorders are to be acquired: for, without astronomical knowledge, 
medical aid would be most frequently unavailing; since the same 
identical remedies are not better calculated for all persons whatsoever, 
than they are for all diseases whatsoever. 

The practicability and utility of prescience having been thus far 
briefly explained, the ensuing discourse must be proceeded with. It 
commences, introductorily, with an account of the efficient properties of 
each of the heavenly bodies, taken from the rules of the ancients, whose 
observations were founded in nature. And, first, of the influences of 
the planets and of the Sun and Moon. 


CHAPTER IV 
THE INFLUENCES OF THE PLANETARY ORBS 


Tue Sun? is found to produce heat and moderate dryness. His magni- 
tude, and the changes which he so evidently makes in the seasons, render 
his power more plainly perceptible than that of the other heavenly 
bodies ; since his approach to the zenith of any part of the earth 
creates a greater degree of heat in that part and proportionately dis- 
poses its inhabitants after his own nature. 

The Moon principally generates moisture; her proximity to the 
earth renders her highly capable of exciting damp vapours, and of thus 
operating sensibly upon animal bodies by relaxation and putrefaction. 
She has, however, also a moderate share in the production of heat, in 
consequence of the illumination she receives from the Sun. 

Saturn produces cold and dryness, for he is most remote both from 
the Sun’s heat and from the earth’s vapours. But he is more effective 
in the production of cold than of dryness. And he and the rest of the 
planets derive their energy from the positions which they hold with 
regard to the Sun and Moon; and they are all seen to alter the con- 
stitution of the Ambient in various ways. 

Mars chiefly causes dryness, and is also strongly heating, by means 
of his own fiery nature, which is indicated by his colour, and in con- 
sequence of his vicinity to the Sun ; the sphere of which is immediately 
below him. 


1 This seems to explain the origin of the old alliance between medicine and 
astrology, so universally preserved until almost within the last century. 
2 Tt will be recollected that the Ptolemaic hypothesis considers the Sun as 
a planetary orb, in consequence of his apparent progress through the zodiac. 
. 


®; 


14 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


Jupiter revolves in an intermediate sphere between the extreme cold 
of Saturn and the burning heat of Mars, and has consequently a temper- 
ate influence: he therefore at once promotes both warmth and moisture. 
But, owing to the spheres of Mars and the Sun, which lie beneath him, 
his warmth is predominant: and hence he produces fertilizing breezes. 

To Venus also the same temperate quality belongs, although it exists 
conversely ; since the heat she produces by her vicinity to the Sun is 
not so great as the moisture which she generates by the magnitude of 
her light, and by appropriating to herself the moist vapours of the 
earth, in the same manner that the Moon does. 

Mercury sometimes produces dryness, and at other times moisture, 
and each with equal vigour. His faculty of absorbing moisture and 
creating dryness proceeds from his situation with regard to the Sun, 
from which he is at no time far distant in longitude; and, on the other 
hand, he produces moisture, because he borders upon the Moon’s 
sphere, which is nearest to the earth; and, being thus excited by the 
velocity of his motion with the Sun, he consequently operates rapid 
changes tending to produce alternately either quality. 


CHAPTER V 
BENEFICS AND MALEFICS 


Or the four temperaments or qualities above mentioned, two are 
nutritive and prolific, viz. heat and moisture; by these all matter 
coalesces and is nourished: the other two are noxious and destructive, 
viz. dryness and cold ; by these all matter is decayed and dissipated. 

Therefore, two of the planets, on account of their temperate quality, 
and because heat and moisture are predominant in them, are considered 
by the ancients as benefic, or causers of good: these are Jupiter and 
; Venus. And the Moon also is so considered for the same reasons. 

But Saturn and Mars are esteemed of a contrary nature, and malefic, 
or causers of evil: the first from his excess of cold, the other from his 
excess of dryness. 

The Sun and Mercury are deemed of common influence, and pro- 
ductive either of good or evil in unison with whatever planets they may 
be connected with. 


CHAPTER VI 
MASCULINE AND FEMININE 


Tuere are two primary sexes, male and female; and the female sex 
partakes chiefly of moisture. The Moon and Venus are therefore said 
to be feminine, since their qualities are principally moist. 

The Sun, Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars are called masculine. Mercury is 


CHAP. VII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 15 


common to both genders, because at certain times he produces dryness, 
and at others moisture, and performs each in an equal ratio. 

The stars, however, are also said to be masculine and feminine, by 
their positions with regard to the Sun. While they are matutine and 
preceding the Sun, they are masculine ; when vespertine and following 
the Sun, they become feminine. 

And they are further regulated in this respect by their positions with 
regard to the horizon. From the ascendant to the mid-heaven, or from 
the angle of the west to the lower heaven, they are considered to be 
masculine, being then oriental: and in the other two quadrants, 
feminine, being then occidental. 


CHAPTER VII 
DIURNAL AND NOCTURNAL 


Tue day and the night are the visible divisions of time. The day, in its 
heat and its aptitude for action, is masculine :—the night, in its moisture 
and its appropriation to rest, feminine. 

‘Hence, again, the Moon and Venus are esteemed to be nocturnal ; the 
Sun and Jupiter, diurnal ; and Mercury, common ; since in his matutine 
position he is diurnal, but nocturnal when vespertine. 

Of the other two planets, Saturn and Mars, which gre noxious, 
one is considered to be diurnal, and the other nocturnal. Neither of 
them, however, is allotted to that division of time with which its nature 
accords (as heat accords with heat), but each is disposed of on a contrary 
principle: and for this reason, that, although the benefit is increased 
when a favourable temperament receives an addition of its own nature, 
yet, the evil arising from a pernicious influence is much mitigated when 
dissimilar qualities are mingled with that influence. Hence the coldness 
of Saturn is allotted to the day, to counterbalance its heat; and the 
dryness of Mars to the night, to counterbalance its moisture. ‘Thus 
each of these planets, being moderated by this combination, is placed 
in a condition calculated to produce a favourable temperament. 2 


1 « Astronomers call the planets matutine, when, being oriental from the 
Sun, they are above the earth when he rises; and vespertine, when they set 
after him.” Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary. 

2 Whalley here appends the following note: ‘‘'To this chapter may be 
properly added, that a planet is said to be diurnal, when, in a diurnal nativity, 
above the earth ; and, in a nocturnal nativity, under the earth: but nocturnal, 
when, in a nocturnal nativity, above the earth ; or, in a diurnal nativity, under 
the earth.” 


16 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


CHAPTER VIII 
THE INFLUENCE OF POSITION WITH REGARD TO THE SUN 


THE respective powers of the Moon and of the three superior planets are 
either augmented or diminished by their several positions with regard to 
the Sun. 

The Moon, during her increase, from her first emerging to her first 
quarter, produces chiefly moisture; on continuing her increase from 
her first quarter to her full state of illumination, she causes heat ; from 
her full state to her third quarter she causes dryness; and from her 
third quarter to her occultation she causes cold. 

The planets, when matutine, and from their first emerging until they 
arrive at their first station, are chiefly productive of moisture; from 
their first station until they rise at night, of heat; from their rising at 
night until their second station, of dryness; and from their second 
station until their occultation, cher produce cold.1 

But it is also sufficiently plain that they must likewise cause, by their 
intermixture with each other, many varieties of quality in the Ambient : 
because, although their individual and peculiar influence may for the 
most part prevail, it will still be more or less varied by the power of the 
other heavenly bodies configurated with them. 

, ) : 


CHAPTER IX 
THE INFLUENCE OF THE FIXED STARS 


NEXT in succession, it is necessary to detail the natures and properties 
of the fixed stars ; all of which have their respective influences, analo- 
gous to the influences of the planets: and those stars which form the 
constellations of the zodiac require to be first described. 


Aries. ‘The stars in the head of Aries possess an influence similar in 
its effects to that of Mars and Saturn: those in the mouth act similarly 
to Mercury, and in some degree to Saturn; those in the hinder foot, 
to Mars ; those in the tail, to Venus. 


1 Although all the positions mentioned in this paragraph are not applicable 
to Venus and Mercury, which can never rise at night, that is to say, at sunset, 
and although the author in the beginning of the chapter speaks only of the 
Moon and the three superior planets, there yet seems no reason why the orbits 
of Venus and Mercury should not be similarly divided by their inferior and 
superior conjunctions, and their greatest elongations. 

The following is from Whalley: “The first station, in this chapter men- 
tioned, is when a planet begins to be retrograde ; and the second station when, 
from retrogradation, a planet becomes direct. They” (the planets) “ begin 
to rise at night when in opposition to the Sun.” 


CHAP. Ix. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 17 


Taurus. ‘Those stars in Taurus, which are in the abscission of the 
sign, resemble in their temperament the influence of Venus, and in 
some degree that of Saturn: those in the Pleiades are like the Moon and 
Mars. Of the stars in the head, that one of the Hyades which is bright 
and ruddy, and called Facula,1 has the same temperament as Mars : 
the others resemble Saturn, and, partly, Mercury; and those at the 
top of the horns are like Mars. 


Gemini. ‘The stars in the feet of Gemini have an influence similar 
to that of Mercury, and moderately to that of Venus. 

The bright stars in the thighs are like Saturn: of the two bright 
stars on the heads, the one, which precedes and is called Apollo,? is like 
Mercury ; the other which follows, called Hercules,’ is like Mars. 


Cancer. ‘he two stars in the eyes of Cancer are of the same influence 
as Mercury, and are also moderately like Mars. ‘Those in the claws are 
like Saturn and Mercury. ‘The nebulous mass in the breast, called the 
Przesepe, has the same efficacy as Mars and the Moon. ‘The two placed 
on either side of the nebulous mass, and called the Asini, have an in- 
fluence similar to that of Mars and the Sun. 


Leo. Of the stars in Leo, two in the head are like Saturn and partly 
like Mars. ‘The three in the neck are like Saturn, and in some degree like 
Mercury. ‘The bright one in the heart, called Regulus,‘ agrees with 
Mars and Jupiter. ‘Those in the loins, and the bright one in the tail, 
are like Saturn and Venus: those in the thighs resemble Venus, and, 
in some degree, Mercury. 


Virgo. ‘The stars in the head of Virgo, and that at the top of the 
southern wing, operate like Mercury and somewhat like Mars: the other 
bright stars in the same wing, and those about the girdle, resemble 
Mercury in their influence, and also Venus moderately. ‘The bright 
one in the northern wing, called Vindemiator, is of the same influence 
as Saturn and Mercury: that called Spica Virginis is like Venus and 
partly Mars: those at the points of the feet and at the bottom of the 
garments are like Mercury, and also Mars, moderately. | 


Libra. 'Those stars at the points of the claws of Scorpio operate 


1 The little Torch ; now known by the name of Aldebaran. 

2 Castor. 3 Pollux. 4 Cor Leonis. 

5 Called by the ancients χηλαι, Chele, or the claws of Scorpio; which 
sign they made to consist of 60 degrees, omitting Libra. Thus Virgil in the 
first Georgic, line 33, &c. 


Quo locus Erigonen inter, Chelasque sequentes 
Panditur : ipse tibi jam brachia contrahit ardens 
Scorpius, et cceli justa plus parte reliquit. 


Ovid, likewise, takes the following notice of Scorpio :— 
Porrigit in spatium signorum membra duorum. 


Met. 2, 1. 198. 
ΒΞ 


18 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


like Jupiter and Mercury : those in the middle of the claws, like Saturn, 
and in some degree like Mars. 


Scorpio. ‘The bright stars in the front of the body of Scorpio have 
an effect similar to that produced by the influence of Mars, and partly 
to that produced by Saturn: the three in the body itself, the middle 
one of which, called Antares,1 is ruddy and more luminous, are similar 
to Mars and moderately to Jupiter: those in the joints of the tail are 
like Saturn and partly like Venus: those in the sting, like Mercury and 
Mars. ‘The nebula is like Mars and the Moon. 


Sagittarius. ‘The stars at the point of the arrow in Sagittarius have 
influence similar to that of Mars and the Moon: those on the bow, and 
at the grasp of the hand, act like Jupiter and Mars: the nebula in the 
face is like the Sun and Mars: those in the waist and in the back re- 
semble Jupiter, and also Mercury moderately: those in the feet, 
Jupiter and Saturn: the four-sided figure in the tail is similar to Venus, 
and in some degree to Saturn. 


Capricorn. ‘The stars in the horns of Capricorn have efficacy similar 
to that of Venus, and partly to that of Mars. The stars in the mouth 
are like Saturn, and partly like Venus: those in the feet and in the belly 
act in the same manner as Mars and Mercury: those in the tail are like 
Saturn and Jupiter. 


Aquarius. ‘The stars in the shoulders of Aquarius operate like Saturn 
and Mercury; those in the left hand and in the face do the same: 
those in the thighs have an influence more consonant with that of Mer- 
cury, and in a less degree with that of Saturn: those in the stream of 
water have power similar to that of Saturn, and, moderately, to that 
of Jupiter. 

Pisces. "Those stars in Pisces, which are in the head of the southern 
fish, have the same influence as Mercury, and, in some degree, as Saturn : 
those in the body are like Jupiter and Mercury: those in the tail and 
in the southern line are like Saturn, and, moderately, like Mercury. 
In the northern fish, those on its body and back-bone resemble 
Jupiter, and also Venus in some degree: those in the northern line 
are like Saturn and Jupiter ; and the bright star in the knot acts like 
Mars, and moderately like Mercury.? 


1 Adams’s Treatise on the Globes calls this star ‘‘ Kalb al Akrab, or the 
Scorpion’s heart,” and adds, that “‘ the word Antares (if it is not a corruption) 
has no signification.” But it should be observed that Ptolemy states that this 
star partakes of the nature of Mars: it seems therefore not improbable that 
Antares may be a regular Greek word, compounded of ἀντι pro and apys 
Mars, and signifying Mars’s deputy, or lieutenant, or one acting for Mars. 

2 Salmon, in his ‘‘ Hore Mathematice, or Soul of Astrology” (printed — 
by Dawks, 1679) divides each sign of the zodiac into six faces of five degrees 
each, “‘ because that in every sign there are various stars of differing natures ” ; 


CHAP. X. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 19 


CHAPTER X 


CONSTELLATIONS NORTH OF THE ZODIAC 


Tue constellations north of the zodiac have their respective influences, 
analogous to those of the planets, existing in the mode described in the 
following list. 


Ursa Minor. ‘The bright stars in this constellation are like Saturn, and 
in some degree like Venus. 


Ursa Major is like Mars, but the nebula under the tail resembles the 
Moon and Venus in its influence. 

Draco. ‘The bright stars operate like Saturn and Mars. 

Cepheus is like Saturn and Jupiter. 


Bootes is like Mercury and Saturn ; but the bright and ruddy star, called 
Arcturus, is like Mars and Jupiter. 


Corona Borealis is like Venus and Mercury. 
Hercules (or the Kneeler) is like Mercury. 
Lyra is like Venus and Mercury. 

Cygnus is like Venus and Mercury. 
Cassiopeia is like Saturn and Venus. 


Perseus is like Jupiter and Saturn: but the nebula, in the hilt of the 
sword, is like Mars and Mercury. 


Auriga. ‘The bright stars are like Mars and Mercury. 
Serpentarius is like Saturn, and moderately like Venus. 

Serpens is like Saturn and Mars. 

Sagitta is like Saturn, and moderately like Venus. 

Aquila is like Mars and Jupiter. 

Delphinus is like Saturn and Mars. 

Equus (or Pegasus). ‘The bright stars are like Mars and Mercury. 
Andromeda is like Venus. 

Delta (or the Triangle) is like Mercury. 


and he gives a particular description to each face, depending on its ascension 
or culmination. ‘This seems an attempt to adapt Ptolemy’s signification of the 
several stars, composing the different signs, to some general rule or mode of 
judgment: but it does not merit the implicit assent of astrologers. It is 
understood that Salmon was not the inventor of this division of the signs into 
faces, but that it came originally from the Arabian schools. 


Ps 


20 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS ' [Book I. — 


CHAPTER XI 
CONSTELLATIONS SOUTH OF THE ZODIAC 


Tue influences of the constellations south of the zodiac, existing in a 
similar mode, are as follows :— 


Piscis Australis. ‘The bright star in the mouth is of the same influence 
as Venus and Mercury. 

Cetus is like Saturn. 

Orion. ‘The stars on the shoulders operate similarly to Mars and 
Mercury ; and the other bright stars to Jupiter and Saturn. 

Fluvius (or Eridanus). The last bright one is of the same influence as 
Jupiter ; the rest are like Saturn. 

Lepus is like Saturn and Mercury. 

Canis. ‘The bright star in the mouth is like Jupiter, and partly like 
Mars: the others are like Venus. 

Procyon.’ 'The bright star is like Mercury, and in some degree like Mars. 

Hydrus. 'The bright stars are like Saturn and Venus. 

Crater is like Venus, and in some degree like Mercury. 

Corvus is like Mars and Saturn. 

Argo. ‘The bright stars are like Saturn and Jupiter. 

Centaurus. ‘The stars in the human part of the figure are of the same 
influence as Venus and Mercury; the bright stars in the horse’s 
part are like Venus and Jupiter. 

Lupus. 'The bright stars are like Saturn, and partly like Mars. 

Ara is like Venus, and also Mercury in some degree. 

Corona Australis. ‘The bright stars are like Saturn and Jupiter. 


The respective influences of the several stars have been observed by 
the ancients to operate in conformity with the mode pointed out in the 
foregoing distributions. ? 


1 Canis Minor. 

2 “ Of the fixed stars in general,’ Whalley says, “‘'Those of the greatest 
magnitude are the most efficacious ; and those in, or near, the ecliptic, more 
powerful than those more remote from it. Those with north latitude and 
declination affect us most. Those in the zenith, influence more than others, 
more remote. Likewise such as are in partial conjunction with, or in the 
antiscions of any planets, or which rise and set, or culminate with any planet, 
or are beheld by any planet, have an increase of power: but of themselves 
the fixed stars emit no rays.’ 


CHAP. XIII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 21 


CHAPTER XII 


THE ANNUAL SEASONS 


Tue year comprises four seasons ; spring, summer, autumn, and winter ; 
of these, the spring partakes chiefly of moisture, for on the dissipation of 
cold and recommencement of warmth, an expansion of the fluids takes 
place: the summer is principally hot, owing to the Sun’s nearest 
approach to the zenith: the autumn is principally dry, because the 
recent heat has absorbed the moisture: and the winter is chiefly cold, 
the Sun being then at his farthest distance from the zenith. | 

The beginning of the whole zodiacal circle (which in its nature as a 
circle can have no other beginning, nor end, capable of being deter- 
mined), is therefore assumed to be the sign of Aries, which commences 
at the vernal equinox :} since the moisture of spring forms a primary 
beginning in the zodiac, analogous to the beginning of all animal life ; 
which, in its first age of existence, abounds principally in moisture: the 
spring, too, like the first age of animal life, is soft and tender; it is 
therefore suitably placed as the opening of the year, and is followed by 
the other seasons in appropriate succession. ‘The summer comes second, 
and, in its vigour and heat, agrees with the second age of animals; the 
prime of life, and the period most abounding in heat. Again, the age 
when the prime of life has passed away, and in which decay prepares to 
advance, is chiefly abundant in dryness, and corresponds to the autumn. 
And the final period of old age, hastening to dissolution, is principally 
cold, like the winter. 


CHAPTER XIII 
THE INFLUENCE OF THE FOUR ANGLES 


Tue angles are the four cardinal points of the horizon, whence are 
derived the general names of the winds. With respect to their qualities, 
it is to be observed that the eastern point, or angle of the ascendant, 


1 This sentence shows the futility of the objection raised against astrology 
(and mentioned in the Preface to this translation) that the signs have changed 
and are changing places. It is clear from this sentence that Ptolemy ascribes 
to the 30 degrees after the vernal equinox, that influence which he has herein 
mentioned to belong to Aries; to the next 30 degrees, the influence herein 
said to belong to Taurus ; and so of the rest of the zodiac. We should rather 
say that the stars have changed places, than that the parts of heaven, in which 
they were once situated, have done so. Ptolemy himself seems to have foreseen 
this groundless objection of the moderns, and has written, in the 25th chapter 
of this book, what ought completely to have prevented it. It has certainly 
been one of the misfortunes of astrology to be attacked by people entirely 
ignorant of its principles. 


22 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BooK I. 


is chiefly dry in its nature; because, on the Sun’s arrival therein, the 
damps occasioned by the night begin to be dried up: and all winds 
blowing from that quarter, under the common name of east winds, are 
arid and free from moisture. 

The southern point, or angle of the mid-heaven, is the most hot ; 
because the Sun’s meridan position, which produces greater warmth 
and heat, declines (in this part of the earth) towards the south. The 
winds, therefore, which blow from that quarter, and are commonly 
called south winds, are hot and rarefying. 

The western point, or occidental angle, is moist ; because, when the 
Sun is there, the moisture, which had been overpowered during the 
day, recommences its operation : and the winds proceeding from thence, 
and commonly called west winds, are light and damp. 

The northern point, or angle of the lower heaven, is the most cold ; 
for the Sun’s meridian position in this part of the earth is far removed 
from it in declination: and all winds thence proceeding, under the 
common name of north winds, are cold and frosty. 

It will, of course, be seen that a thorough acquaintance with the fore- 
going matters is essential in order to acquire the faculty of distinguishing 
temperaments in every shape and variation: since it is sufficiently 
obvious that the effective influence of the stars must be greatly diversi- 
fied by the constitutions of the seasons, as well as those of the ages of 
life, and of the angles; and also that the stars have a much stronger 
influence on any constitution, when there may not be in it any tendency 
contrary to their own, as the whole influence is then entire and unalloyed. 
For example, stars effecting heat operate more vigorously in constitu- 
tions of heat ; and those effecting moisture in constitutions of moisture. 
On the other hand, should a tendency, contrary to their own, exist in 
any constitution, the stars accordingly become less efficacious ; in con- 
sequence of being attempered and mixed with that contrary tendency : 
and this happens, for instance, when stars effecting heat are attempered 
by constitutions of cold, or stars producing moisture by constitutions of 
dryness. The influence of every star is thus modified by the proportion- 
ate admixture presented by constitutions of a nature different from its 
own. 

In succession to the previous instructions, the following description 
of the natural and peculiar properties of the signs of the zodiac is 
annexed : the general temperaments of the signs are analogous to those 
of the seasons, which are respectively established under each sign, but 
they have, also, certain peculiar energies, arising from their familiarity 
with the Sun, the Moon, and the stars, which shall be hereafter specified ; 
—and the simple and unmixed influences existing in the signs, as con- 
sidered only in themselves and with regard to each other, will be first 
stated. 


CHAP. Xv.] PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 23 


CHAPTER XIV 
TROPICAL, EQUINOCTIAL, FIXED, AND BICORPOREAL SIGNS 


Amonc the twelve signs, some are termed tropical, others equinoctial, 
others fixed, and others bicorporeal. 

The tropical signs are two: viz. the first thirty degrees after the 
summer solstice, which compose the sign of Cancer ; and the first thirty 
degrees after the winter solstice, composing the sign of Capricorn. 
These are called tropical, because the Sun, after he has arrived at their 
first points, seems to ¢wrn, and to change his course towards a contrary 
latitude ;1 causing summer by the turn he makes in Cancer, and winter 
by that which he makes in Capricorn. 

There are also two equinoctial signs: Aries, the first after the vernal 
equinox ; and Libra, the first after the autumnal equinox: they are so 
called, because the Sun, when in the first point of either, makes the day 
and night equal. 

Of the remaining eight signs, four are fixed, and four bicorporeal. 
Those signs, which severally follow immediately after the two tropical 
and the two equinoctial signs, are termed fixed, because, during the 
Sun’s presence in them, the cold, heat, moisture or dryness, of the season, 
which commenced on his arrival in the preceding tropical or equinoctial 
sign, is then more firmly established: not, however, that the tempera- 
ment of the season has in itself actually increased in vigour, but, having 
continued for some time in operation, it then renders all things more 
strongly affected by its influence. 

The bicorporeal signs severally follow the fixed signs; and, being 
thus intermediately placed between the fixed and the tropical signs, 
they participate in the constitutional properties of both, from their 
first to their last degrees. 


CHAPTER XV 
MASCULINE AND FEMININE SIGNS 


Acatn, among the twelve signs, six are called masculine and diurnal, and 
six feminine and nocturnal. They are arranged in alternate order, one 
after the other, as the day is followed by the night, and as the male is 
coupled with the female. 

The commencement, it has been already said, belongs to Aries ; 
since the moisture of the spring forms an introduction for the other 
seasons. And, as the male sex governs, and the active principle takes 


1 In other words, the Sun then begins to diminish his declination, which, 
at the first points of the said signs, is at its greatest amount. 


24 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS _ [Book 1. 


precedence of the passive, the signs of Aries and Libra are consequently 
considered to be masculine and diurnal. These signs describe the equi- 
noctial circle, and from them proceed the principal variation, and most 
powerful agitation, of all things. The signs immediately following 
them are feminine and nocturnal; and the rest are consecutively 
arranged as masculine and feminine, by alternate order. 

Masculine or feminine qualities are, however, by some persons, 
attributed to the signs by means of a different arrangement, and by 
making the sign ascending (which is also called the horoscope) the 
first of the masculine signs. They also consider the first tropical 
sign to be that in which the Moon is posited, because she undergoes 
more frequent and rapid changes and variations than any other 
heavenly body; and it is by a similar mode of reasoning that they 
establish the horoscope as the first masculine sign, on account of its 
being more immediately under the Sun. Again, certain of these persons 
likewise allow the alternate arrangement of the signs ; while there are, 
again, others who do not admit it; but, instead thereof, divide the 
whole zodiac into quadrants, and denominate those between the 
ascendant and the mid-heaven, and between the western angle and the 
lower haven, oriental and masculine; and the other two quadrants, 
occidental and feminine. 

There have also been other additional appellations bestowed on the 
signs, in consequence of their apparent formations and figures: they 
have been called quadrupedal, terrestrial, imperial, fruitful, and have 
received various other distinguishing epithets of the same sort; but 
these distinctions seem too unimportant to be even enumerated here, 
since their origin is obvious, and since, should they ever be thought 
serviceable towards the inference of future effects, they may be easily 
applied without the aid of further instruction. 


CHAPTER XVI 


MUTUAL CONFIGURATIONS OF THE SIGNS 


THERE are certain familiarities or connections between different parts 
of the zoidac ; and the chief of these is that which exists between such 
parts as are configurated with each other. 

This mutual configuration attaches to all parts diametrically distant 
from each other, containing between them two right angles, or six 
signs, or a hundred and eighty degrees: it also exists in all parts at the 
triangular distance from each other, containing between them one right 
angle and a third, or four signs, or a hundred and twenty degrees ; 
also, in all parts at the quadrate distance from each other, containing 
between them exactly one right angle, or three signs, or ninety degrees ; 
and, also, in all parts at the hexagonal distance from each other, contain- 
ing between them two-thirds of a right angle, or two signs, or sixty 


CHAP. XVI.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 25 


degrees.t These several distances are taken for the following reasons: 
the distance by diameter, however, is in itself sufficiently clear, and 
requires no further explanation; but, as to the rest, after the dia- 
metrical points have been connected by a straight line, AB; the space 
of the two right angles, contained on the diameter, is then to be divided 
into aliquot parts of the two greatest denominations; that is to say, 
into halves, AFC, CFB, and into thirds, AFD, DFE, EFB: there will 
then be provided for the third part (AD) a super-proportion (DC), 
equal to its own half; and for the half (AC) a super-proportion (CE), 
equal to its own third part ; so that the division into two aliquot parts, 


AC, CB, will make the quartile distance AC; and the division into 
three aliquot parts, AD, DE, EB, will make the sextile distance AD, 
and the trinal distance AE. The respective super-proportions (on either 
side of the intermediate quartile AC, formed by the one right angle 
AFC), will also again make the quartile AC (if there be added to the 
sextile, AD, the super-proportion DC, equal to the half of the sextile), 
and the trine AE (if there be added to the quartile AC the super-propor- 
tion CE, equal to the third part of the quartile). 

Of these configurations, the trine and the sextile are each called 


1 Whalley, in his note upon this chapter, seems to have been surprised that 
no mention is made here by Ptolemy of the conjunction ; but he overlooked 
the fact that the chapter treats only of parts of the zodiac configurated with 
each other ; and that it was not possible for Ptolemy to conceive how any part 
could be configurated with itself. It is, therefore, by no means wonderful 
that the conjunction is not inserted here along with the rest of the aspects ; 
although it is frequently adverted to in subsequent chapters, and its efficacy 
particularly described. 


26 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [ΒΟΟΚ I. 


harmonious, because they are constituted between signs of the same 
kind ; being formed between either all feminine or all masculine signs. 
The opposition and quartile are considered to be discordant, because 
they are configurations made between signs not of the same kind, but of 
different natures and sexes.! 


CHAPTER XVII 
SIGNS COMMANDING AND OBEYING 


Any two signs configurated with each other at an equal distance from 
the same, or from either equinoctial point, are termed commanding 
and obeying, because the ascensional and descensional times of the one 
are equal to those of the other, and both describe equal parallels. 

The signs in the summer semicircle are commanding; those in the 
winter semicircle, obeying: for, when the Sun is present in the former, 
he makes the day longer than the night; and, when in the latter, he 
produces the contrary effect. 


CHAPTER XVIII 
SIGNS BEHOLDING EACH OTHER, AND OF EQUAL POWER 


Any two signs, equally distant from either tropical sign, are equal to 
each other in power ; because the Sun, when present in one, makes day 
and night, and the divisions of time, respectively equal in duration to 
those which he produces when present in the other. Such signs are also 
said to behold each other, as well for the foregoing reasons, as because 
each of them rises from one and the same part of the horizon, and sets in 
one and the same part.” 


1 From the tenor of this chapter~it was formerly doubted whether the 
author intended to admit in his theory only zodiacal aspects, and to reject 
those which are called mundane ; but Placidus has referred to the 4th Chapter 
of the 8th Book of the Almagest (which will be found in the Appendix to this 
translation) to prove that Ptolemy distinctly taught two kinds of aspect ; one 
in the zodiac and one in the world. Whalley quotes the opinion of Placidus, 
which he says is farther confirmed by the 12th Chapter of the 3rd Book of this 
very treatise, where it is stated that the ascendant and the eleventh house are 
in sextile to each other; the ascendant and the mid-heaven in quartile; the 
ascendant and the ninth house in trine ; and the ascendant and the occidental 
angle in opposition ; all which certainly seems to be applicable to mundane 
aspects in particular. 

2 Whalley has a very lengthy note upon this and the preceding chapter, to 
show that Ptolemy here speaks of zodiacal parallels, or parallels of declination, 
and to point out the necessity of observing a planet’s latitude, in order 
to ascertain its true parallels, It is, however, to be recollected, that the 


CHAP. XIX. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 27 


᾿ CHAPTER XIX 
SIGNS INCONJUNCT 


Aut signs, between which there does not exist any familiarity in any 
of the modes above specified, are inconjunct and separated. 

For instance, all signs are inconjunct which are neither commanding 
nor obeying, and not beholding each other nor of equal power, as well as 
all signs which contain between them the space of one sign only, or the 
space of five signs, and which do not at all share in any of the four 
prescribed configurations: viz. the opposition, the trine, the quartile, 
and the sextile. All parts which are distant from each other in the space 
of one sign only are considered inconjunct, because they are averted, as 
it were, from each other ; and because, although the said space between 
them may extend into two signs, the whole only contains an angle equal 
to that of one sign: all parts distant from each other in the space of 
five signs are also considered inconjunct, because they divide the whole 
circle into unequal parts; whereas the spaces contained in the con- 
figurations above-mentioned, viz. the opposition, trine, quartile, and 
sextile, produce aliquot divisions.1 


parallels now alluded to are distinct from the mundane parallels, which are 
equal distances from the horizon or meridian, and are considered by Ptolemy 
in the 14th and 15th Chapters of the 3rd Book of this work ; although not 
under the express name of mundane parallels. 

1 Tt has never been very clearly shown how the followers of Ptolemy have 
reconciled the new aspects [called the semiquadrate, quintile, sesquiquadrate, 
biquintile, &c.] with the veto pronounced in this chapter. Kepler is said to 
have invented them, and they have been universally adopted ; even Placidus, 
who has applied Ptolemy’s doctrine to practice better than any other writer, 
has availed himself of them,? and, if the nativities published by him are to be 
credited, he has fully established their importance. 

Salmon, in his “Hore Mathematice,” beforementioned, gives a long 
dissertation (from p. 403 to p. 414) on the old Ptolemaic aspects, illustrative 
of their foundation in nature and in mathematics; and, although his con- 
clusions are not quite satisfactorily drawn, some of his arguments would seem 
appropriate, if he had but handled them more fully and expertly ; particularly 
where he says that the aspects are derived “‘ from the aliquot parts of a circle, 
wherein observe that, although the zodiac may have many more aliquot parts 
than these four (the sextile, quartile, trine, and opposition), yet those other 
aliquot parts of the circle, or 360 degrees, will not make an aliquot division of 
the signs also, which in this design was sought to answer, as well in the 
number 12, as in the number 360.” The passage in which he endeavours to 
show that they are authorized by their projection, also deserves attention. 

All Salmon’s arguments, however, in support of the old Ptolemaic aspects, 
militate against the new Keplerian ones; and so does the following extract 


* Except the semiquadrate, which he has not at all noticed. 


28 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


a 
CHAPTER XX 


HOUSES OF THE PLANETS . 


Tuose stars which are denominated planetary orbs have particular 
familiarity with certain places in the zodiac, by means of parts designated 
as their houses, and also by their triplicities, exaltations, terms, and so 
forth. 

The nature of their familiarity by houses is as follows : 

Cancer and Leo are the most northerly of all the twelve signs ; they 
approach nearer than the other signs to the zenith of this part of the 
earth, and thereby cause warmth and heat: they are consequently 
appropriated as houses for the two principal and greater luminaries ; 
Leo for the Sun, as being masculine; and Cancer for the Moon, as 
being feminine. It has hence resulted, that the semicircle from Leo 
to Capricorn has been ordained solar, and the semicircle from Aquarius 
to Cancer, lunar; in order that each planet might occupy one sign in 
each semicircle, and thus have one of its houses configurated with the 
Sun and the other with the Moon, conformably to the motions of its 
own sphere, and the peculiar properties of its nature. 

Saturn, therefore, since he is cold and inimical to heat, moving also 
in a superior orbit most remote from the luminaries, occupies the signs 
opposite to Cancer and Leo: these are Aquarius and Capricorn; and 
they are assigned to him in consideration of their cold and wintry 
nature; and because the configuration by opposition does not 
co-operate towards the production of good. 

Jupiter has a favourable temperament, and is situated beneath the 
sphere of Saturn; he therefore occupies the next two signs, Sagittarius 


from the “ Astrological Discourse ” of Sir Christopher Heydon: “ For thus, 
amongst all ordinate planes that may be inscribed, there are two whose sides, 
joined together, have pre-eminence to take up a semicircle, but only the hexagon, 
quadrate, and equilateral triangle, answering to the sextile, quartile, and trine 
irradiated. ‘The subtense, therefore, of a sextile aspect consisteth of two signs, 
which, joined to the subtense of a trine, composed of four, being regular and 
equilateral, take up six signs, which is a complete semicircle. In like manner, 
the sides of a quadrate inscribed, subtending three signs, twice reckoned, do 
occupy likewise the mediety of a circle. And what those figures are before 
said to perform ” (that is, to take up a semicircle) “‘ either doubled or joined 
ogether, may also be truly ascribed unto the opposite aspect by itself; for 
that the diametral line, which passeth from the place of conjunction to the 
opposite point, divideth a circle into two equal parts: the like whereof cannot 
be found in any other inscripts ; for example, the side of a regular pentagon” 
(the quintile) “ subtendeth 72 degrees, of an octagon” (the semiquadrate) “ but 
45; the remainders of which arcs, viz. 108 and 135 degrees, are not subtended by 
the sides of any ordinate figure.” : 
1 Saturn being also malefic in his nature. 


CHAP. XXI.] PTOLEMY’S TELRABIBLOS 29 


and Pisces. These signs are airy and fruitful, in consequence of their 
trinal distance from the houses of the luminaries, which distance 
harmonises with the operation of good. 

Mars is dry in nature, and beneath the sphere of Jupiter: he takes the 
next two signs, of a nature similar to his own, viz. Aries and Scorpio, 
whose relative distances from the houses of the luminaries are injurious 
and discordant. . 

Venus, possessing a favourable temperament, and placed beneath the 
sphere of Mars, takes the next two signs, Taurus and Libra. These are 
of a fruitful nature, and preserve harmony by the sextile distance ; and 
this planet is never more than two signs distant from the Sun. 

Mercury never has greater distance from the Sun than the space of 
one sign, and is beneath all the other planets: hence he is placed 
nearest to both luminaries, and the remaining two signs, Gemini and 
Virgo, are allotted to him. 


CHAPTER XxXI 
THE TRIPLICITIES 


Tue familiarity existing by triplicity arises in the following mode: 

The triplicity preserves accordance with an equilateral triangle, and 
the whole zodiacal orbit is defined by three circles, viz. that of the 
equinox, and those of the two tropics ; the twelve signs are, therefore, 
distributed among four equilateral triangles. 

The first triangle, or triplicity, is formed by three masculine signs, 
Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, having the Sun, Jupiter, and Mars as lords 
by house. Mars, however, being contrary in condition to the solar 
influence, this triplicity receives, as its lords, only Jupiter and the Sun. 
By day, therefore, the Sun claims the principal co-regency of it, and 
Jupiter by night. Aries is on the equinoctial circle, Leo on the summer, 
and Sagittarius on the winter circle. ‘This triplicity is principally 
northern, owing to the concurrent dominion of Jupiter, who is fruitful 
and airy, and expressly connected with winds proceeding from the 
north ; it is, however, also north-west, in consequence of being, in 


1 The planets, having two houses, are said to be more powerful in one by 
day and in the other by night: thus, 


Saturn’s day house is Aquarius, his night house Capricorn » 
Jupiter’s Sagittarius — Pisces 

Mar’s ----: Aries —- Scorpio 

Venus’s —- ‘Taurus ---- Libra 

Mercury’s —— Gemini Virgo 


The above is from Whalley ; but the same disposition is to be found in all 
modern astrological writers. 


30 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [Book I. 


some degree, combined with the west by means of the house of Mars, 
who introduces western breezes and the feminine qualities of that 
quarter, in consequence of his lunar condition.? 

The second triplicity, formed by Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, is 
allotted to the dominion of the Moon and Venus, since it consists of 
feminine signs. The Moon rules it by night, and Venus by day. ‘Taurus 
is on the summer circle, Virgo on the equinoctial, and Capricorn on the 
winter. ‘This triplicity is southern, in consequence of the dominion of 
Venus, whose warm and moist influence produces south winds: it, 
however, additionally receives a mixture of the east, by means of Saturn ; 
for, as Capricorn is the house of that planet, and an eastern sign, 
Saturn becomes effective of winds from that quarter, and furnishes this 
triplicity with a mixture of the east, with which quarter he is further 
connected by means of his solar condition.? 

The third triplicity is composed of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, 
masculine signs. It holds connection with Saturn and Mercury by 
containing their houses, and is therefore attributed to them, and not to 
Mars, to which planet it bears norelation. Saturn rules it by day, owing 
to his condition,’ and Mercury by night. Gemini is on the summer 
circle, Libra on the equinoctial, and Aquarius on the winter. ‘This 
triplicity is principally eastern, by the influence of Saturn; but it 
becomes north-east by receiving also a mixture of the north from the 
condition of Jupiter, with which planet Saturn has, in this respect, a 
diurnal familiarity.* 

The fourth triplicity, formed by Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, is left 
to the remaining planet, Mars, who has right in it by means of 
his house, Scorpio. But, as the signs which compose this triplicity 
are feminine, the Moon by night and Venus by day, through their 
feminine condition, govern it, together with Mars. Cancer is on the 
summer circle, Scorpio on the winter, and Pisces on the equinoctial. 
This triplicity is western, in consequence of the government of the 
Moon and Mars; but it is also blended with the south by the joint 
dominion of Venus, and therefore becomes south-west. 


1 The “lunar condition ” here spoken of refers to the position of Aries 
(Mars’s house) in the lunar semicircle. 

* Capricorn being in the solar semicircle. 

3 The reason for making Saturn diurnal lord of this triplicity may be found 
in Chap. vii. 

4 This familiarity seems to arise from the sextile aspect between Aquarius, 
the diurnal house of Saturn, and Sagittarius, the diurnal house of Jupiter. 


CHAP. XXII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 31 


oc 
CHAPTER XXII 


EXALTATIONS 


Tuat which is termed the exaltation of the planets is considered by the 
following rules : 

The Sun on his entrance into Aries is then passing into the higher 
and more northern semicircle; but, on his entrance into Libra, into 
the moresouthern and lower one: his exaltation, therefore, is determined 
to be in Aries, as, when present in that sign, he begins to lengthen the 
days, and the influence of his heating nature increases at the same time. 
His fall is placed in Libra, for the converse reasons. 

Saturn on the contrary, in order to preserve his station opposite to the 
Sun, in this respect, as well as in regard to their respective houses, 
obtains his exaltation in Libra, and his fall in Aries: since, in all cases, 
the increase of heat must be attended by a diminution of cold, and the 
increase of cold by a diminution of heat. 

The Mood, again, after conjunction with the Sun in Aries, the seat 
of his exaltation, makes her first appearance, and begins to augment her 
light in Taurus, the first sign of her own triplicity, which is consequently 
ascribed to be her exaltation ; while Scorpio, the opposite sign, is her 
fall. 

Jupiter, since he is efficacious in exciting fruitful breezes from the 
north, and since he becomes most northerly, and augments his peculiar 
influence when in Cancer, accordingly obtains his exaltation in that 
sign, and his fall in Capricorn. 

Mars possesses a fiery nature, which receives its greatest intensity in 
Capricorn, in which sign ‘this planet becomes most southerly; his 
exaltation is therefore placed in Capricorn, in opposition to that of 
Jupiter, and his fall in Cancer. 

Venus is of a moist nature, and becomes chiefly moist when in Pisces. 
Under that sign a dampness begins to be perceptible in the atmosphere, 
and Venus, from being in that sign, derives an augmentation of her own 
proper influence : her exaltation is consequently placed therein, and her 
fall in Virgo. 

Mercury is of a nature opposite to that of Venus, and is more dry: 
in opposition to her, therefore, he takes his exaltation in Virgo, in which 
sign the autumnal dryness makes its first appearance ; and he receives 
his fall in Pisces. ᾿ 


32 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK 1. 


CHAPTER XXIII 
THE DISPOSITION OF THE TERMS! 


THERE are two methods of disposing the terms of the planets, in reference 
to the dominion of the triplicities; one is Zgyptian, the other Chaldaic. 

But the Agyptian method preserves no regular distribution, neither 
in point of successive order nor in point of quantity. 

In point of order it is defective, since it, in some instances, allots the 
first degrees of a sign to the lord of the house, in others to the lord of the 
triplicity, and in others again to the lord of the exaltation. By selecting 
examples this failure in order will easily be seen; for instance, if the 
order were regulated by the government of houses, for what reason 
should Saturn take the first degrees in Libra, since that sign is the house 
of Venus? or why should Jupiter take them in Aries, which, is the house 
of Mars? If the government of triplicities were followed, for what 
reason should Mercury take the first degrees in Capricorn, which is 
in the triplicity ruled by Venus? If the government by exaltations, 
why should Mars take the first degrees in Cancer? that sign being the 
exaltation of Jupiter. And if the order were regulated even by con- 
sidering the planet which possesses most of these dignities in the sign, 
for what reason should Mercury take the first degrees in Aquarius, in 
which sign he rules only by triplicity, and why not Saturn, who has 
government in it by house, as well as by triplicity? or why in short 
should Mercury, who does not possess any kind of dominion in Capri- 
corn, receive the first degrees in that sign also? ‘The same want of 
order is abundantly evident in the rest of the distribution. 

An equal irregularity exists in the respective quantities of degrees 
allotted by the Aigyptians to the several terms of the planets. For it is 
by no means a proper nor sufficient demonstration of accuracy that the 
ageregate sum of all the numbers of every single planet amounts to the 
precise total requiring to be divided into portions of time ; 3 since, even 
if it be admitted that this total, collected from every single star, is 
correctly asserted by the Aigyptians, it may still be objected that the 
same total, so collected by them, may be found in many other ways by 


1 Th reference to the terms of the planets, Placidus has these words (accord- 
ing to Cooper’s translation) : “‘ The dignity of the planets in the signs and their 
parts, which are called the bounds and terminations ” (quasi, terms), “‘ have a 
real and natural foundation; to wit, the powerful aspect or proportional 
influxes to the movable points in which the stars begin to produce the primary 
qualities. So that, according to those things we have explained in the philosophy 
of the heavens, these are found to agree so well with the Agyptian boundaries ” 
(terms), “ that they are highly deserving of admiration.” 

2 This total is the 360 degrees of the zodiac, requiring to be divided according 
to correspondent portions of the equator ; by which all time is reckoned. 


CHAP. XXIII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 33 


interchanging the numbers in a sign. ‘There are persons also who con- 
tend that in every latitude the same space of time is occupied in ascension 
by every star; this, however, is manifestly wrong: for, in the first 
place, these persons are guided by the vulgar opinion of the plane 
heights of ascension, which is totally foreign to truth, and according to 
which, in the parallel of Lower Aigypt, the signs of Virgo and Libra 
ΘΙ ascend each in thirty-eight degrees and a third,! and Leo and 
Scorpio each in thirty-five degrees ; when it is, on the contrary, shown 
by the Tables,? that the latter two signs occupy in their several ascensions 
more than thirty-five degrees each, but Virgo and Libra less. It 
should further be observed, that those who support this opinion seem 
(by so doing) not only to dispute the quantity of the terms most gener- 
ally received, but to be driven also to the necessity of falsifying many 
points ; since (as it is indispensable to keep to the same total amount 
of all the terms together) they make use of parts of degrees ; but even 
that contrivance does not enable them to reach the true point. 

The old terms, admitted by many persons on the authority of former 
tradition, are as follows : 


THE TERMS ACCORDING TO THE JEGYPTIANS 


_ Aries Taurus Gemini’ Cancer Virgo 
Jupiter |6|} 6] Ven.|8} 8] Μεγ [6] 6} Mars|7| 7] Jup.|6| 6} Μετ. 7} 7 
Venus δ [δῦ Μετ 6 14] Jup. 6 12] Ven. 6113 | Ven. Ven, [tol 27 
Mercury ΠΝ ἢ Pop. [4 22 Ven. le 17} Mer ΠΡΝ Sat Jup isla 
Mars |5|25| Sat. |5|27| Mars|7|24| Jup.|7 26} Mer, 634 | Mars|7 8 


Sagittarius | Capricorn Pisces 


Saturn [6] 6] Mars|7| 77 Jup. [12] 12] Mer.|7| 7] Μετ. 7} 7] Ven. |12/ 12 


Mercury 8 14| εη. 4 11 Ven.|5|17] Jup.|7|14] Ven.|6| 13] Jup. [4 τό 
Μετ. 3 | 19 


Sat. | 5 | 26] Sat. i ἊΨ Mars | 5 | 25 {Mars |g | 28 


upiter 21 Mer.| 4 | 21} Ven. | 8 | 22 
Ρ 7 { 


Venus | 7| 28] Jup.| ς] 24 


Mars 230] Sat. [6 30] Mars} 4 | 30 Mars| 4 30} Sat. ᾿ς [30] Sat. | 2| 30 


1 The degrees here mentioned are degrees of the equator. 
2 See, in the Appendix, an extract from these tables; the whole of which 
are to be found in the Almagest. 


Ἂς 
34 ~ PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


Thus, by the Agyptian distribution, it appears that the total numbers 
of the degrees for each planet, added together, make 360 :—viz. for 
Saturn 57, Jupiter 79, Mars 66, Venus 82, and Mercury 76. 

The method of the Chaldzans contains a certain simplicity of arrange- 
ment as to quantity, and preserves an order of succession rather more 
comformable to the dominion of the triplicities. It is, nevertheless, 
highly imperfect, as may be easily discovered even without being pointed 
out: for in the first triplicity (which the Chaldzans also attribute to 
the same signs ; viz. Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius), Jupiter, the lord of the 
triplicity, takes the first degrees ; Venus, who rules the next triplicity, 
follows him ; after her, in succession, are Saturn and Mercury, the lords 
of the triplicity of Gemini; and lastly Mars, lord of the remaining 
triplicity. In the second triplicity (also allotted to the same signs, viz. 
Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn), Venus stands first ; next to her, Saturn 
and Mercury; after them Mars, and Jupiter last. In the other two 
triplicities a similar order of succession is closely followed ; and with 
respect to the third triplicity, which is ascribed to two lords, viz. 
to Saturn and Mercury, Saturn is placed first in order by day and 
Mercury by night. 

The quantity of degrees allotted to each planet is also simply regu- ~ 
lated in the Chaldaic method ; it diminishes in graduation from the 
quantity given to the planet first in order, so that each successive planet 
takes one degree less than that which preceded it. Thus the first 
planet takes eight degrees, the second seven, the third six, the fourth 
five, and the fifth four. By this arrangement the degrees of Saturn 
amount by day to 78, and by night to 66; the degrees of Jupiter to 
72, of Mars to 69, of Venus to 75, and of Mercury by day to 66, and by 
night to 78—the whole amounting to 360. 

Of these two distributions of the terms, that of the Hgyptians seems 
more to be relied on than the other ; since it has been handed down and 
recommended in the writings of the Agyptian authors, and also because 
the degrees of the terms, in nativities rectified by them as examples, are 
universally in accordance with this distribution ; while, on the other 
hand, neither the order nor the number of the Chaldaic method has 
ever been recorded or explained by any writer—not even by the writers 
of that very nation: the accuracy of that method is consequently 
doubtful, and its irregularity as to the order of placing the planets 
is widely open to censure. 

There is, however, an ancient writing which has fallen into the 
author’s possession, and which gives a rational and consistent account 
of the nature of the terms; of the order in which they are to be 
taken, and of the quantity belonging to each. It will be found in 
the subsequent chapter. 


CHAP. xx1Vv.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 35 


CHAPTER XXIV 
THE TERMS ACCORDING TO PTOLEMY 


In arranging the order in which the planets take their terms in each 
sign, their exaltations, triplicities, and houses, are taken into considera- 
tion ; and whatever planet, whether benefic or malefic, may possess two 
rights of dominion in one and the same sign, such planet is universally 
placed first in order in that sign. In other cases, however, where it 
does not happen that a malefic possesses two rights of dominion in the 
sign, it is always placed last. 

The lord of the exaltation is placed first ; then the lord of the tri- 
plicity ; and then the lord of the house ; in regular succession, according 
to the series of the signs ; but it must again be remembered that any 
planet, having two rights of dominion in the same sign, takes precedence, 
as before mentioned, of those having only one. In Cancer and Leo, 
however, the malefics occupy the first degrees ; as those signs are the 
houses of the Moon and the Sun, which take no terms; and the 
malefics being found to have greater potency in those signs therefore 
take precedence in them. Mars, consequently, receives the first degrees 
in Cancer, and Saturn in Leo, by which arrangement a proper order is 
preserved. 

The respective quantities of degrees for the several terms is thus 
determined : viz. when there is no planet found to be lord by two rights 
in the same sign, or in the two signs next following, each of the benefics, 
Jupiter and Venus, takes seven degrees ; the malefics, Saturn and Mars, 
take five degrees each ; and Mercury, being of common influence, takes 
six degrees ; thus completing the whole thirty. Since, however, there 
are some cases in which a planet has always a double right—(for Venus 
obtains the sole government of Taurus and Pisces, as the Moon does 
not share in the terms)—it is to be observed that when such double 
right (whether it exist in the same sign or in the signs next following 
as far as may complete a quadrant) may be possessed by any planet, that 
planet receives in addition one degree. The planets thus entitled were 
distinguished by points in the ancient writing above mentioned. And 
the degree, added to the quantity of the planet which exercises a double 
tight, is subtracted from those of single right; most generally from 
Saturn and Jupiter, in consequence of their slower motion. 


1 The cause of this disposition is that Cancer, the house of the Moon, 
partakes of moisture, and counteracts Mars’s dryness; while Leo, the Sun’s 
house, is hot, and counteracts Saturn’s cold.—Vide Chap. iv, and conclusion 
of Chap. vii of this book. 

It may further be observed, that Jupiter’s right, by triplicity, to the first 
degrees in Leo, is of course surrendered to Saturn, on the principle that the 
malefics have greater potency in the houses of the luminaries. 


36 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK I. 


These terms are detailed in the following table :— 


— |—_—_—— J ———_—__ |__| 


6 [19] Jup. | 5} 18 


Sat. 
Ven. 


Mercury |7|21] Jup. 


7 


Mars 5 [26] Sat. , mb; Mars| 6 | 26] Ven. |7 | 27 62: ] Sat. [624 
6 
Saturn [430 ΠΡ} 20] Sat.| 4) 30] δεῖ. 3] 30 


Libra 


Scorpio | Sagittarius | Capricorn 


ws Ven. 614] Μεγ. 6} 12 


| | | ..-... 


| I 


CHAPTER XXV 
THE PLACES AND DEGREES OF EVERY PLANET 


Tue signs have been subdivided by some persons into parts still more 
minute, which have been named places and degrees of dominion. ‘Thus 
the twelfth part of a sign, or two degrees and a half, has been called a 
place, and the dominion of it given to the signs next succeeding. Other 
persons again, pursuing various modes of arrangement, attribute to 
each planet certain degrees, as being aboriginally connected with it, 
in a manner somewhat similar to the Chaldaic arrangement of the terms. 
But all these imaginary attributes cannot be herein detailed, for they 


CHAP. XXVI. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 37 


receive no confirmation from nature, are not capable of being rationally 
demonstrated, and are, in fact, merely the offspring of scientific vanity. 

The following observation, however, deserves attention, and must not 
be omitted. 

The beginnings of the signs, and likewise those of the terms, are to be 
taken from the equinoctial and tropical points. This rule is not only 
clearly stated by writers on the subject, but is also especially evident by 
the demonstration constantly afforded, that their natures, influences and 
familiarities have no other origin than from the tropics and equinoxes, as 
has been already plainly shown. And, if other beginnings were allowed, 
it would either be necessary to exclude the natures of the signs from the 
_ theory of prognostication, or impossible to avoid error in then retaining 
and making use of them ; as the regularity of their spaces and distances, 
upon which their influence depends, would then be invaded and broken 
in upon. 


CHAPTER XXVI 


FACES, CHARIOTS, AND OTHER SIMILAR ATTRIBUTES OF THE PLANETS 


Tue familiarities existing between the planets and the signs are such 
as have been already particularised. 

There are also, however, further peculiarities ascribed to the planets. 
Each is said to be in its proper face, when the aspect it holds to the Sun, 
or Moon, is similar to that which its own house bears to their houses : 
for example, Venus is in her proper face when making a sextile aspect 
to either luminary, provided she be occidental to the Sun, but oriental 
to the Moon, agreeably to the primary arrangement of her houses.? 

Each planet is also said to be in its proper chariot, or throne, or 
otherwise triumphantly situated, when it holds familiarity with the 
place which it actually occupies by two, or more, of the prescribed 
modes of connection: for when it is so circumstanced, its influence and 
energy are specially augmented by the familiarity it thus holds with 
the sign which encompasses it, and which is similar in influence and 
co-operates with it. 

Lastly, each planet (although it may possess no familiarity with the 
sign encompassing it) is said to rejoice, when any connection subsists 
between itself and other stars of the same condition ; as, notwithstand- 
ing the distance between them, a certain sympathy and communication 


1 Vide Chapters xii and xiv of this Book. 

2 Vide Chapter xx. It of course follows that Saturn is in his proper face 
when he is five signs, or in quintile, after the Sun or before the Moon; that 
Jupiter is so when in trine ; Mars when in quartile ; Venus when in sextile ; 
and Mercury when only one sign (or in modern phrase, in semi-sextile), after 
the Sun or before the Moon. 


38 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book I. 


of influence is derived from their mutual resemblance. In the same 
manner, again, when a planet occupies a place adverse and dissimilar in 
condition to itself, much of its influence is dissipated and lost ; in con- 
sequence of the interposition and admixture of the other different 
influence, arising out of the dissimilar temperament of the sign by which 
it is encompassed. 


CHAPTER XXVII 
APPLICATION, SEPARATION, AND OTHER FACULTIES 


In all cases when the distances between planets or luminaries are but 
trifling,1 the planet which precedes is said to apply to that which follows ; 
and that which follows to be separating from that which precedes.? 
The same rule obtains both in respect to bodily conjunction and to any 
other of the aspects before described ; except that, in the application 
and separation of the bodily conjunction, it is also essential to observe 
the actual latitudes of the bodies, in order to receive and consider only 
such a transit as may be made in the same parts of the zodiac. Butinthe 
application and separation of aspects merely, the same attention is not 
requisite, since all the rays are uniformly converged into one focus, 
that is to say, into the angle of the rence 4 and meet there alike from 
every quarter. 

It appears, therefore, by the whole a what has been already delivered, 


1 This has been understood to mean, when the planets or luminaries are 
within each other’s orbs; Saturn’s orb being 10 degrees, Jupiter’s 12, Mars’s 
7 degrees 30 minutes, the Sun’s 17 degrees, Venus’s 8, Mercury’s 7 degrees 
30 minutes, and the Moon’s 12 degrees 30 minutes. 

5. Astrologers generally agree, that the inferior planets always apply to the 
superior, but the superior never to the inferior, except when the inferior be 
retrograde. In the present instance it seems most probable that the author 
means the planet which is more occidental, by “ the planet which precedes.” 
He often uses ““ precedent ” as equivalent to “ occidental” in regard to the 
daily revolution of the heavens: and thus a planet in the first degree of Aries 
would precede, and be more occidental than one in the sixth degree of Aries, 
to which latter it would, by the regular planetary motion, be applying. 

3 On this, Whalley says that “the less the difference of latitude of the 
planets in conjunction, the more powerful will be the influence: for if two 
planets in conjunction have each considerable latitude of different denomination, 
the influence of such conjunction will be much lessened.” 

4 Tovr’ est ert To Kevtpov τῆς γῆς. ‘The precise meaning of the word 
Kevtpov is “‘ centre,” rather than “‘ angle”; but Ptolemy uses it throughout 
this work, in speaking of the four angles of heaven, and I conceive he uses it 
here to signify an angle at, or on, the earth. The following definition of an 
aspect, by Kepler, strengthens my opinion: “ An aspect is an angle formed 
on the earth, by the luminous rays of two planets ; efficacious in ΘΗΜΘΑΒΩΒ 
sublunary nature.’ 


CHAP. XVII. ] PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 39 


that the effective influence of the stars must be considered as arising 
not only from their own peculiar natures and properties, but also from 
the quality of the surrounding signs, and from configuration with the 
Sun and the angles ; all which has been pointed out. The influence of 
each planet, however, is strengthened chiefly when it may be oriental, 
swift and direct in its proper course and motion—for it has then its 
greatest power : but, on the other hand, it loses strength when occidental 
and slow in motion or retrograde; as it then acts with smaller effect.} 
Its influence also receives accession or diminution, from its position with 
regard to the horizon ; as, if it be situated in the mid-heaven, or suc- 
cedent to the mid-heaven, it is especially strong ; likewise, if it be on the 
actual horizon, or succedent to the horizon, it is also powerful— 
particularly if in the eastern quarter. Should it, however, be below 
the earth, and configurated with the ascendant, either from the lower 
heaven, or from any other part below the earth, its influence then be- 
comes more languid ; but if, when below the earth, it hold no such 
configuration, it is entirely deprived of efficacy.* 


_ 1 Placidus (Cooper’s translation) says that “‘ the three superiors are supposed 

to be stronger, if they are found to be matutine, or eastern, from the Sun ; the 
three inferiors, vespertine, or western; for then they have a greater degree 
of light, in which consists their virtual influence, and then they are called 
oriental; but occidental if otherwise. Every one knows how largely, yet to 
no purpose, authors have treated of the orientality of the planets.” 

Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary has the following words on the same 
subject : ‘ Now the three superior planets are strongest, being oriental and 
matutine; but the three inferior when they are occidental and vespertine. 
The reason is, because the first in the first case, but the last in the second, do 
then descend to the lowest part of their orbit, are increased in light, and 
approaching nearer the earth ; and so on the contrary, the inferiors matutine, 
the superiors vespertine are weakened.” 

2 In a note on the 6th Chapter of this Book, Whalley says that, “ according 
to Ptolemy, such as are between the ascendant and mid-heaven obtain the first 
place of strength, and are said to be in their oriental orientality : but, between 
the western horizon and the lower heaven, in their occidental orientality, which 
is the second place of strength: between the lower heaven and the ascendant, 
in their oriental occidentality, the first degree of weakness ; and between the 
mid-heaven and western horizon, in their occidental occidentality, the weakest 
place of all.” This is all very pretty jargon, but certainly nor “ according to 
Ptolemy,” who distinctly says, on the contrary, that if a planet “is on the 
actual horizon, or succedent to the horizon, it is also powerful, and particularly 
if in the eastern quarter.” The last member of this sentence, as well as the 
conclusion of this 27th Chapter, shows that Ptolemy did not consider a situation 
between the mid-heaven and western horizon to be “ the weakest place of all.” 


BOOK THE SECOND 


CHAPTER I 


GENERAL DIVISION OF THE SUBJECT 


[= great and leading points, requiring to be attended to as a 


necessary means of introduction to the consideration of 

particular predictions, having been succinctly defined, the 
further parts of the subject, comprehending everything which may 
tend to facilitate prediction, and render it complete, shall now be duly 
proceeded in ; and, at the same time, care shall be taken to confine the 
whole doctrine within the limits of natural reason. 

The foreknowledge to be acquired by means of Astrology is to be 
regarded in two great and principal divisions. ‘The first, which may 
be properly called General, or Universal, concerns entire nations, 
countries, or cities; and the second, denominated Particular, or Gene- 
thliacal, relates to men individually. 

In considering these respective divisions, it seems proper to give 
priority to that which has the more general application and influence : 
because, in the first place, general events are produced by causes greater 
and more compulsatory than the causes of particular events ; secondly, 
because natures of more extended potency must invariably control those 
which are more limited in action; and, thirdly, because particular 
events, or individual affections, are comprehended in those of general 
influence.! It is therefore especially necessary, in desiring to investigate 
particular events, to treat first of those which are general. 

Again, ἈΠΕ events are subdivided according to their operation 
upon entire countries, and upon certain cities or districts: one sub- 
division being rogarded as affecting entire countries, and the other 
certain cities or districts only. ‘They are also separately considered 
according to the causes by which they are produced ; war, pestilence, 
famine, earthquakes, inundations, and other similar visitations being 
dependent on such greater and more important causes, as arise only after 
considerable periods; while slighter causes, arising more frequently, 
have reference only to the revolution of the seasons ; their greater or less 
variation in cold and heat; the severity or mildness of the weather ; 
the occasional abundance or scarcity of provisions; and other like 
occurrences. 

Hence the consideration of those events which concern whole 


1 Vide Chap. 111, Book I, pp. 13-14. 
40 


CHAP. II. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 41 


countries, and are dependent on the greater causes (since it has a more 
extended scope than the other, which attaches only to certain cities, or 
districts, and is subject to slighter causes) takes precedence. And, for its 
due investigation, two essential points are to be attended to: the first 
is, the appropriate familiarity of the zodiacal signs and the fixed stars 
with the several regions which may be concerned; and the second 
comprises the indications occasionally arising in those parts of the heavens 
where such familiarity is found: for instance, the eclipses of the Sun 
and Moon, and such transits as may be made by the planets, when 
matutine, and in their respective stations. 

The nature of the sympathy between these things must, however, 
be explained first ; and a brief description will therefore be given of the 
chief peculiarities observable in whole nations ; in regard to their 
manners and customs, as well as to their bodily formation and tempera- 
ment ; considered agreeably to their familiarity with those stars and 
signs whence the natural cause of their peculiarities duly proceeds. 


CHAPTER II 
PECULIARITIES OBSERVABLE THROUGHOUT EVERY ENTIRE CLIMATE 


Tue peculiarities of all nations are distinguished according to entire 
parallels and entire angles, and by their situation with regard to the 
Sun and the Ecliptic. 

The climate which we inhabit is situated in one of the Northern 
Quadrants : but other nations, which lie under more southern parallels, 
that is to say, in the space between the equinoctial line and the summer 
tropic, have the Sun in their zenith, and are continually scorched by it. 

hey are consequently black in complexion, and have thick and curled 
hair. They are, moreover, ugly in person, of contracted stature, hot in 
disposition, and fierce in manners, in consequence of the incessant heats 
to which they are exposed; and they are called by the common name 
of Athiopians. But the human race does not alone afford evidence of 
the violent heat in these regions ; it is shown also by all other animals 
and by the state of the surrounding atmosphere. 

The natives of those countries which lie under the more remote 
northern parallels (that is to say, under the Arctic circle and beyond it?) 
have their zenith far distant from the zodiac and the Sun’s heat. Their 
constitutions, therefore, abound in cold, and are also highly imbued 
with moisture, which is in itself a most nutritive quality, and, in these 
latitudes, is not exhausted by heat : herice they are fair in complexion, 
with straight hair, of large bodies and full stature. They are cold in 
disposition, and wild in manners, owing to the constant cold. ‘The state 
of the surrounding atmosphere and of animals and‘plants, corresponds 


+ “Under the Bears,” in the Greek, 
Cc 


42 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [ΒΟΟΚ II. 


with that of men; who (as natives of these countries) are designated 
by the general name of Scythians. 

The nations situated between the summer tropic and the Arctic 
circle, having the meridian Sun neither in their zenith nor yet far remote 
from it, enjoy a well-temperated atmosphere. ‘This favourable tem- 
perature, however, still undergoes variation, and changes alternatively 
from heat to cold; but the variation is never vast nor violent. ‘The 
people who enjoy this kindly atmosphere are consequently of proportion- 
ate stature and complexion, and of good natural disposition: they live 
not in a state of dispersion, but dwell together in societies, and are 
civilised in their habits. Among the nations comprehended in this 
division, those verging towards the south are more industrious and 
ingenious than the others, and more adapted to the sciences: and these 
qualifications are engendered in them by the vicinity of the zodiac to 
their zenith, and by the familiarity thus subsisting between them and the 
planets moving in the zodiac, which familiarly gives activity and an 
intellectual impulse to their minds. Again, the natives of those countries 
which lie towards the east excel in courage, acting boldly and openly 
under all circumstances; for in all their characteristics they are 
principally conformed to the Sun’s nature, which is oriental, diurnal, 
masculine and dexter—(and it is plainly apparent that the dexter parts 
of all animals are much stronger than others)—hence results the greater 
courage of the inhabitants of the East. And as the Moon, on her first 
appearance after conjunction, is always seen in the west, the western 
parts are therefore lunar, and consequently feminine and sinister ; 
whence it follows that the inhabitants of the west are milder, more 
effeminate and reserved. : 

Thus, in all countries, certain respective peculiarities exist in regard — 
to manners, customs and laws; and in each it is found that some 
portion of the inhabitants differs partially and individually from the 
usual habits and condition of their race. These variations arise similarly 
to the variations perceptible in the condition of the atmosphere ; as, 
in all countries, the general state of whose atmosphere may be either hot, 
or cold, or temperate, certain districts are found to possess a particular 
temperature of their own, and to be more or less hot, or cold, by being 
more or less elevated than the general face of the country. So, likewise, 
certain people become navigators owing to their proximity to the sea, 
while others are equestrian, because their country is a plain ; and others, 
again, become domiciliated by the fertility of their soil. 

And thus, in each particular climate, certain peculiar qualities are to” 
be found, arising from the natural familiarity which it holds with the 
stars and the twelve signs. And although these qualities do not pervade 
it, in such a manner as to be necessarily exhibited by every individual 
native, yet they are so far generally distributed as to be of much utility 
in investigating particular events; and it is highly important to take 
at least a brief notice of them. | 


CHAP. III. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 43 


CHAPTER III 


THE FAMILIARITY OF THE REGIONS OF THE EARTH WITH THE TRIPLICITIES 
AND THE PLANETS 


Ir has been already stated that there are four triplicities distinguishable 
in the zodiac. The first, composed of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius, is the 
north-west triplicity ; and Jupiter has chief dominion over it on behalf 
of its northern proportion ; but Mars also rules with him in reference 
to the west. The second, consisting of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, 
is the south-east ; and in this triplicity Venus bears chief rule, in con- 
sequence of the southern proportion ; but Saturn also governs with her 
in consideration of the east. The third, composed of Gemini, Libra, 
and Aquarius, is north-east ; and Saturn is here the principal lord, in 
consequence of the eastern proportion ; Jupiter, however, governs with 
him in reference to the north. The fourth triplicity is constituted of 
Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, and is south-west; it owns Mars as its 
principal ruler, in consideration of its western proportion; and, on 
behalf of the south, it is also governed by Venus. 

The four triplicities being thus established, the whole inhabited earth 
is accordingly divided into four parts, agreeing with the number of the 
triplicities. It is divided latitudinally by the line of the Mediterranean 
Sea, from the Straits of Hercules to the Issican Gulf, continued 
onwards through the mountainous ridge extending towards the east ; 
and by this latitudinal division its southern and northern parts are 
defined. Its longitudinal division is made by the line of the Arabian 
Gulf, the AXgean Sea, Pontus, and the lake Mzotis; and by this line 
are separated its eastern and western parts. 

Of the four quadrants of the earth, thus agreeing in number with the 
four triplicities, one is situated in the north-west of the entire earth, 
and contains Celto-galatia; or, as it is commonly called, Europe. 
Opposed to this quadrant lies that of the south-east, towards Eastern 
“Aithiopia ; it is called the southern part of Asia Magna. Another 
quadrant of the entire earth is in the north-east, about Scythia, and is 
called the northern part of Asia Magna. ΤῸ this is opposed the 
quadrant of the south-west, which lies about Western Athiopia, and is 
known by the general name of Libya. 

Each of these quadrants contains certain parts, which, in comparison 
with its other parts, lie more contiguous to the middle of the earth ; 
and these parts, in respect of the quadrant to which they belong, have 
a situation opposite to the rest of that quadrant, in the same manner as 
that quadrant itself is situated in regard to the rest of the earth. For 
instance, in the quadrant of Europe, which is situated on the north-west 
of the whole earth, those parts of it which lie towards the middle of the 
earth, and near the angles of the other quadrants, are manifestly 


44 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book II. 


situated in the south-east of that quadrant. The like rule obtains in 
regard to the other quadrants. And hence it is evident that each 
quadrant is in familiarity with two oppositely-placed triplicities, its 
whole extent being adapted to the one triplicity which governs it as an 
entire quadrant ; but its particular parts, situated about the middle of 
the earth, and lying, as regards the rest of the quadrant, in a direction 
contrary to that assigned to the whole quadrant altogether, being 
adapted to the other triplicity which rules the particular quadrant lying 
opposite toit. ‘The planets exercising dominion in both these triplicities 
also hold familiarity with these particular parts; but, with the other 
more remote parts of any quadrant, only those planets hold familiarity 
which rule in the single triplicity to which the whole quadrant is allotted. 
With the said particular parts about the middle of the earth, Mercury 
also, as well as the other planets in dominion, bears familiarity, in con- 
sideration of his meditative condition and common nature. 

Under this arrangement, it follows that the north-western parts of 
the first quadrant, or that of Europe, are in familiarity with the north- 
west triplicity, composed of Aries, Leo, and Sagittarius; and they are 
accordingly governed by the lords of that triplicity, Jupiter and Mars, 
vespertine. ‘These parts, as distinguished by their appropriation to 
entire nations, are Britain, Galatia, Germany, Barsania,1 Italy, Apulia, 
Sicily, Gaul, Tuscany, Celtica, and Spain. And, since the triplicity 
itself and the planets connected with it in dominion are adapted to 
command, the natives of these countries are consequently impatient 
of restraint, lovers of freedom, warlike, industrious, imperious, cleanly, 
and high-minded. But, owing to the vespertine configuration of Jupiter 
and Mars, as well as the masculine condition of the anterior parts of the 
triplicity, and the feminine condition of its latter parts,? the said 
nations regard women with scorn and indifference.* They are, however, 
still careful of the community, brave and faithful, affectionate in their 
families, and perform good and kind actions. 

Among the countries before named, Britain, Galatia, Germany, and 
Barsania have a greater share of familiarity with Aries and Mars; and 
their inhabitants are accordingly wilder, bolder, and more ferocious. 
Italy, Apulia, Sicily, and Gaul are in familiarity with Leo and the Sun ; 


1 Or, perhaps, Bastarnia, a part of the ancient European Sarmatia. 

2 This should probably be understood to mean in a mundane point of view, 
agreeably to Chaps. VI and XV, Book I. For when Aries is on the ascendant, 
it is, of course, oriental and masculine; and Sagittarius must consequently 
then be in the eighth house, occidental, and therefore feminine. 

3 The customs of nations have, in some degree, altered since Ptolemy made 
this severe charge against us and our brethren in the north and west of Europe. 
The following passage also occurs in this part of the original text :—spos δὲ 
τας TVVOVTLAS τῶν αρσενικὼν ανακινουμέενοι και ἕγλουντες, και PTE ala Kpov 
μητε avavdpov τουτο νομίζοντες. δια τοῦτο οὐδὲ exAvovTat, οτι οὐδὲ ὡς 
πάσχοντες ‘akewrat ere τουτω, ἀλλα φυλαττουσι τας ψυχας ανδρειους" 


CHAP. III. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 45 


and the natives of these countries are more imperious, yet kind and 
benevolent, and careful of the commonwealth. ‘Tuscany, Celtica, and 
Spain, are connected with Sagittarius and Jupiter ; and their inhabitants 
are lovers of freedom, simplicity, and elegance. 

The south-eastern parts of this quadrant, which are situated towards 
the middle of the earth, viz. Thrace, Macedonia, Illyria, Hellas, Achaia, 
and Crete, as well as the Cyclad Isles and the shores of Asia Minor and of 
Cyprus, assume, in addition, a connection with the south-east triplicity, 
which is composed of ‘Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn, and ruled by Venus 
and Saturn ; and, in consequence of the vicinity of these regions to the 
middle of the earth, Mercury likewise has a proportionate dominion 
over them. Hence their inhabitants, being subjected to the rulers of 
both triplicities, enjoy a favourable temperament of mind and of body. 
From Mars they imbibe their fitness for command, their courage, and 
impatience of restraint ; from Jupiter their love of freedom, their self- 
rule, their skill in guiding public affairs, and in legislation: through the 
influence of Venus they are also lovers of the arts and sciences, as well 
as of music and poetry, of public shows, and all the refinements of life ; 
and from Mercury they deduce their hospitality, their fondness for 
society and communion, their love of equity and of literature, and 
their power of eloquence. They are also in the highest degree 
conversant with sacred mysteries, owing to the vespertine figuration 
of Venus. 

It is further to be observed of these last-named countries, that the 
inhabitants of the Cyclad Isles, and of the shores of Asia Minor and of 
Cyprus, are more particularly under the influence of ‘Taurus and Venus, 
and are therefore voluptuous, fond of elegance, and over-studious in 
their attention to the body. The people of Hellas, Achaia, and Crete, 
have a stronger familiarity with Virgo and Mercury, and are therefore 
learned and scientific, preferring the cultivation of the mind to the 
care of the body. The people of Macedonia, Thrace, and Illyria, 
are chiefly influenced by Capricorn and Saturn; whence they are 
greedy of wealth, inferior in civilization, and have no ordinances of 
civil polity. 

The second quadrant consists of the southern division of Asia Magna. 
Such of its parts as are contained in India, Arriana, Gedrosia, Parthia, 
Media, Persia, Babylonia, Mesopotamia, and Assyria, are situated in the 
south-east of the whole earth, and have due familiarity with the south- 
east triplicity (composed of Taurus, Virgo, and Capricorn), and con- 
sequently with Venus, Mercury, and Saturn, in matutine figuration. 
The nature of the inhabitants of these countries is obedient to the 
dominion of these ruling influences; they worship Venus under the 
name of Isis ; and they also pay devotion to Saturn, invoking him by the 
name of Mithranhelios. Many of them likewise foretell future events ; 
and they consecrate to the gods some of their bodily members, to which 
superstition they are induced by the nature of the figuration of the 


46 -PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book τι. 


planets before mentioned.! They are, moreover, hot in constitution, 
amorous and lustful, fond of acting, singing, and dancing, gaudy in their 
dresses and ornaments; owing to the influence of Venus. Saturn, 
however, inclines them to simplicity of conduct ; and, in consequence 
of the matutine figuration, they address their women publicly.2 ‘There 
are also many among them who beget children by their own mothers. 
The matutine figurations also influence their mode of worship, which is 
performed by prostration of the breast ; because the heart is the nobler 
part of the body, and, in its vivifying faculties, acts like the Sun. And, 
although the influence of Venus makes the people, generally speaking, 
finical and effeminate in their personal adornment and apparel, yet the 
connection which Saturn holds with them, by means of the east, still 
renders them great in mind, eminent in council, courageous and warlike. 

It is to be remarked, that Parthia, Media, and Persia, have a more 
particular familiarity with Taurus and Venus; whence it follows that 
the dwellers in those countries wear splendid garments, and clothe the 
whole person entirely, except the breast ; they are also fond of elegance 
and refinement. ‘The countries about Babylon, Mesopotamia, and 
Assyria, are connected with Virgo and Mercury; their inhabitants 
are consequently studious of the sciences, and, among other attain- 
ments, excel in making observations on the five planets. India, Arriana, 
and Gedrosia, are connected with Capricorn and Saturn ; the natives of 
these regions are, therefore, ill-formed in person, of dirty habits, and 
barbarous manners. 

The remaining parts of this second quadrant, viz. Idumza, Ceelesyria, 
Judza, Phoenicia, Chaldza, Orchynia, and Arabia Felix, occupy a 
situation in the vicinity of the middle of the earth, and in the north-west 
of the quadrant to which they actually belong: hence they are in 
familiarity with the north-west triplicity (which consists of Aries, Leo, 
and Sagittarius), and they have for their rulers, Jupiter and Mars, 
together with Mercury. By means of the figuration of these planets, 
the natives of the said countries are skilful in trade and all mercantile 
affairs, heedless of danger, yet treacherous, servile, and thoroughly fickle. 

The inhabitants of Ccelesyria, [dumza, and Judza, are principally in- 
fluenced by Aries and Mars, and are generally audacious, atheistical,* 


1 The Greek is as follows: καί ta propia αὐτων τα γεννητικα ανατιθεασι 
τοις θεοις" διοτι oO σχηματισμος τῶν εἰρημένων ASEPWV φυσει σπερματικος 
εσιν' Follies, similar in their kind to these, are still practised by the 
Faquirs of Hindostan, and by other religious sects in Asia. 

_ PAVEPWS TOLOVMEVOL TAS προς TAS γυναικας συνουσιας" 

3 The author gives a singular reason for this incest: μισουσι δὲ τας 
(συνουσιας)ὺ προς Tovs apoevas, δια ToVvTo καὶ οἱ πλειςοι αὑὐτων EK των 
PYTEPOV τεκνοποιουσι" 

4 The epithet is remarkable, not only as being, in the opinion of a Gentile, 
merited by the Jews, among other nations, but also at a period scarcely exceeding 
a century after their most heinous crime had been committed, expressly under 


CHAP. 111. PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 47 


and treacherous. The Pheenicians, Chaldeans, and Orchynians, have 
familiarity with Leo and the Sun, and are therefore more simple and 
humane in disposition; they are also studious of astrology, and pay 
greater reverence than all other nations to the Sun. The people of 
Arabia Felix are connected with Sagittarius and Jupiter: the country 
is fertile, and abundantly productive of spices, and its inhabitants are 
well-proportioned in person, free in all their habits of life, and liberal 
in all their contracts and dealings. 

The third quadrant occupies the northern division of Asia Magna. 
Those several parts of it which lie to the north-east of the whole earth, 
and comprise Hyrcania, Armenia, Mantiana, Bactriana, Casperia, 
Serica, Sauromatica, Oxiana, and Sogdiana, are in familiarity with 
the north-east triplicity, composed of Gemini, Libra, and Aquarius, and 
have for their rulers Saturn and Jupiter, in matutine positions ; hence 
the inhabitants worship Jupiter and the Sun.1 They are abundantly 
rich in all things : they possess much gold, and are dainty and luxurious 
in their diet. They are also learned in theology, skilled in magic, just 
in all their dealings, free and noble-minded, holding dishonesty and 
wickedness in abhorrence, strongly imbued with the softer affections of 
nature; and, in a worthy cause, they will even readily embrace death 
to preserve their friends. ‘They are, furthermore, chaste in marriage, 
elegant and splendid in their dress, charitable and beneficent, and of en- 
lightened intellect. All these qualities are principally produced by the 
matutine positions of Saturn and Jupiter, who influence the region. 

Among these nations, however, Hyrcania, Armenia, and Mantiana, 
have a greater familiarity with Gemini and Mercury; and the in- 
habitants are consequently more acute in apprehension, but less tenacious 
of their probity. The countries about Bactriana, Casperia, and Serica, 
are connected with Libra and Venus ; and the natives are endowed with 
much wealth and many luxuries, and take delight in poetry and songs. 
The nations about Sauromatica, Oxiana and Sogdiana, are influenced by 
Aquarius and Saturn; and are therefore less polished in manners, and 
more austere and uncouth. 

The other parts of this quadrant, lying near the middle of the entire 
earth, consist of Bithynia, Phrygia, Colchis, Laxica, Syria, Commagene, 
Cappadocia, Lydia, Lycia, Cilicia, and Pamphylia. ‘These, being 
situated in the south-west of their quadrant, have familiarity accordingly 
with the south-west triplicity, composed of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces, 


the cloak of religion. It seems, however, that the Jews were charged with 
atheism by other writers also, and on account of their neglect of the false gods 
of the heathens; viz. “ falsorium deorum neglectus: quam candem causam 
etiam Judzis maledicendi Tacitus habuit, et Plinius Major, cui Judai dicuntur 
gens contumelia: numinum insignis.” See Clark’s Notes on Grotius de Verit. 
Relig. Christ. Lib. 2, §2. 

1 Other editions say “ Saturn.” 


48 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


and are ruled by Mars and Venus, together with Mercury. In these 
countries Venus is principally worshipped ; she is invoked as the Mother 
of the Gods, and by various local and indigenous appellations ; Mars 
likewise receives adoration here, under the name of Adonis, as well as 
by other titles ;1 and some of the religious services to these deities are 
performed by loud lamentations. The people are servile in mind, 
diligent in labour, yet fraudulent, knavish, and thievish; they enter 
into foreign armies for the sake of hire, and make prisoners and slaves of 
their own countrymen: besides which, they are continually subject to 
intestine broils. These traits arise from the matutine figurations of 
Mars and Venus. It is further to be observed, that, from the circum- 
stance of Mars receiving his exaltation in Capricorn (one of the signs of 
the triplicity ruled by Venus), and Venus hers in Pisces (a sign belonging 
to the triplicity of Mars), it thence follows that the women have strong 
attachments and kindly affections to their husbands, are vigilant and 
careful in domestic affairs, and highly industrious: they also act as 
servants, and labour for the men, with all due obedience, in every thing. 

Bithynia, Phrygia, and Colchis, must however be excepted from 
sharing in this general propriety of the female character ; for, as these 
nations are chiefly connected with Cancer and the Moon, their male 
population is, generally speaking, slavish in its habits, timid and super- 
stitious, while the greater part of the women, owing to the matutine 
and masculine position of the Moon, are of masculine manners, ambitious 
of command, and warlike. 'These females, like the Amazons, shun the 
addresses of men, and delight in the use of arms, and in manly occupa- 
tions: they also amputate the right breasts of their female children for 
the sake of adapting them to military service, and in order that, when 
in combat and exposing that part of their body, they may appear to be 
of the male sex. Again, Syria, Commagene, and Cappadocia, are 
principally influenced by Scorpio and Mars; and their inhabitants are 
accordingly bold, wicked, treacherous, and laborious. Lydia, Cilicia, 
and Pamphylia, have a greater familiarity with Pisces and Jupiter ; when 
their inhabitants are wealthy, of mercantile habits, living in freedom 
and in community, faithful to their engagements, and honest in their 
dealings. 

The remaining quadrant is the vast tract known by the general name 
of Libya. Its several parts, distinguished by the particular names of 
Numidia, Carthage, Africa.2 Phazania, Nasamonitis, Garamantica, 


1 It is usually understood that the male deity, coupled by the Phrygians 
with Cybele, “the mother of the Gods,” was called by them Atys; and that 
Adonis was the name used by the Phcenicians in addressing the associate of 
Venus. It has been said that these divinities were identical with the Isis and 
Osiris of the Aigyptians. 

2 The name of Africa was, in Ptolemy’s time, limited to those parts of the 
coast on the Mediterranean which contained the ancient Utica, and in which 
Tunis now stands. Josephus says the name is derived from Afer (one of the 


CHAP. III] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 49 


Mauritania, Getulia, and Metagonitis, are situated in the south-west of 
the entire earth, and have due familiarity with the south-west triplicity, 
composed of Cancer, Scorpio, and Pisces; their rulers therefore are 
Mars and Venus, in vespertine position. From this figuration of the 
planets it results that the dwellers in these regions are doubly governed 
by a man and a woman, who are both children of the same mother ; 
the man rules the males, and the woman the females. They are ex- 
tremely hot in constitution, and desirous of women; their marriages 
are usually made by violence, and in many districts the local princes first 
enjoy the brides of their subjects : in some places, however, the women 
are common to all. ‘The influence of Venus causes the whole people to 
delight in personal ornaments, and in being arrayed in female attire : 
nevertheless, that of Mars renders them courageous, crafty, addicted to 
magic, and fearless of dangers. 

Again, however, of the above-named countries, Numidia, Carthage, 
and Africa, are more particularly in familiarity with Cancer and the 
Moon: their inhabitants, consequently, live in community, attend to 
mercantile pursuits, and enjoy abundantly all the blessings of nature. 
The natives of Metagonitis, Mauritania, and Getulia, are influenced by 
Scorpio and Mars, and are consequently ferocious and pugnacious in the 
highest degree; eaters of human flesh, utterly indifferent to danger, 
and so regardless and prodigal of blood, as to slay each other without 
hesitation on the slightest cause. The people in Phazania, Nasamonitis, 
and Garamantica, are connected with Pisces and Jupiter, and are accord- 
ingly frank and simple in manners, fond of employment, well disposed, 
fond of the decencies of life, and, for the most part, free and unre- 
strained in their actions: they worship Jupiter by the name of Ammon. 

The other parts of this quadrant, which lies near the middle of the 
entire earth, are Cyrenaica, Marmarica, AXgypt, Thebais, Oasis, 
Troglodytica, Arabia, Azania, and Middle AXthiopia. ‘These countries, 
being situated in the north-east of their quadrant, have due familiarity 
with the north-east triplicity (consisting of Gemini, Libra, and Aquar- 
ius), and are governed by Saturn and Jupiter, and also by Mercury. 
Their inhabitants, therefore, participate in the influence of all the five 
planets in vespertine figuration, and consequently cherish due love and 
reverence for the gods, and dedicate themselves to their service. They 
are addicted to sepulchral ceremonies ; and, owing to the said vespertine 
position, they bury their dead in the earth,! and remove them from the 


posterity of Abraham by Cethurah), who is stated to have led an army into 
Libya, and to have established himself in the country. This Afer is, of course, 
the same with Epher, mentioned in the fourth verse of the 25th chapter of 
Genesis, as a son of Midian, one of the sons of Abraham by his concubine 
Keturah. 

1 It does not appear why this practice should have been remarked as a 
national peculiarity, unless in distinction from the custom of burning the dead 

Cc * 


50 ᾿ς PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Βοοκ τι. 


public eye. ‘They use various laws and customs, and worship divers 
gods. In a state of subjection, they are submissive, cowardly, abject, 
and most patient ; but when they command, they are brave, generous, 
and high-minded. Polygamy is frequent among them, and practised by 
the women as well as the men: they are most licentious in sexual 
intercourse, and allow incestuous commerce between brothers and 
sisters. Both men and women are extraordinarily prolific, and corre- 
spond in this respect with the fecundity of their soil. Many of the men 
are, however, effeminate and debased in mind; in consequence of the 
figuration of the malefics, together with the vespertine position of 
Venus ; and some of them mutilate their persons.1 

Among these last named countries, Cyrenaica, Marmarica, and 
particularly Lower Agypt, are chiefly influenced by Gemini and 
Mercury: the natives are therefore highly intellectual and sensible, 
and gifted with capacity for every undertaking; above all, for the 
attainment of wisdom, and an insight into divine mysteries. They are 
also magicians, performing secret rites and ceremonies, and are in every 
respect calculated for the prosecution of all scientific inquiry. The 
inhabitants of Thebais, Oasis, and ‘Troglodytica, are connected with 
Libra and Venus; they are of warmer constitution, and more hasty 
disposition, and enjoy life in all its plentitude and abundance. The 
natives of Arabia, Azania, and Middle Athiopia, have familiarity with 
Aquarius and Saturn; they consequently feed on flesh and fish indis- 


among the Greeks and Romans. Interment is recorded as having been usual 
among the Jews, and it is known to have been common among many ancient 
barbarous nations, 

A conjecture may perhaps be allowed, that the author, when he wrote this 
passage, had in his mind the magnificent subterranean palaces, constructed for 
the dead, in parts of the region in question ; some of which have been recently 
made known to the modern world by the sagacity and enterprise of the 
celebrated Belzoni. 

1 Tuves δὲ καὶ καταφρονουσι των γεννητικων pedAwv.—The “ contempt ” 
here expressed by καταφρονουσι has been taken by all translators (except 
Whalley) to signify “ mutilation.” 

2 History warrants the high enconium here given to the natives of these 
countries. Algypt was the acknowledged mother of the arts and sciences, and 
at one time the great depot of all the learning of the world: her school of 
astronomy (a science which our author may be supposed to have placed in the 
first rank), founded at Alexandria by Ptol. Philadelphus, maintained its superior 
reputation for a thousand years. Cyrenaica gave birth to many illustrious 
philosophers, and, among them, to Eratosthenes, who is said to have invented 
the armillary sphere. This great man measured the obliquity of the ecliptic, 
and, though he erroneously reckoned it at only 204 degrees, it should be recol- 
lected that he lived 200 years before the Christian era. He also measured a 
degree of the meridian, and determined the extent of the earth, by means 
similar to those adopted by the moderns. | 


oF 


PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 


CHAP. III. | 


vydydureg jerdoryygy eTpPHAl ἘΜΑΠ] 
ὉΤΟΤ1) eIUeZYy ἘΤΠΟΡΘΟΥΤΛΑΙ 
ἘΤΡΑΤ eiquiy θοῦ τ, 

“yey YON “SIM yinos 259 AA YON 
vorjURUeIey vueIpsos ῬΙΒΟΙΡΘ 
STJTUOUIESE NT BUPIX() euelLIIy 
viuezeyd voT}eUIOINeS vIpU] 


βολᾳ YINOG 


| | | 
———— qui. | 


"189, πος 


91019) 
eIeIpy 
stqPH 


"189M YON 


eidssy 
eruopAqeg 
vrureiodosayy 


*yseq YINog 


ee ee = | .ὡΠρΡρΡᾶΡΠΠΠΠΠΠΠΠἂ΄ὃ΄ 


"yseq Yanog 


“58 YON “yseq] ἵππος 
"yseq YON ἼΒΒΉ {πος 


89 Λλὴ ἵππος 


PCh)ti Ze) 


“SIM YON 


ATTAILOAdSAA NOIG HOVA OL 


“yey qynos 


vroopeddes | vorApojsory, 2 
: : java 241 fo 
XI[aq viqeiy | sueseurutod SISEO) opprus pe pe f sugunory 
eridg 518 4 917| : , 


“yseq YON 
utedg eI[N}o5) 
leh ere) ἘΠΙΒΊΤΙΠΈΤΛΙ 
Auvosn J, SIWUOSeIIIAT 


"ISAM YINOG |'satugunor 241 [ὁ 1uvspvnG) 


----. 


με κῶς "41472 21 fo appiu 
vrrodsey 4 4 IPP: 


21 moLf a10MmasL SatsqUno 
vUvIIIOVg air ἔν ae 


“WIAA YON "ISI AA πος “yey YON “SITAZUNOT) 201 fo JUDLPUNG) 


"1S9Q\ YON ᾿Δμϑη 044 J, 


᾽159ΛΛ {πος 


ὉΤάιοος 


*yseq YON 


vuAIO styojod | 3d43q7 1amo'T IOUIPY ΙΒ vepn[ -giava 941 fo 
vepleyy eisAlyg VOTIVULIV IAL sniddy PLUINPT | a orm 9 ἐξά 
ἘΤΟΤΙΘΟΙ 4 ἘΠΙΛΊΏΙΤΩ voreuois>) sopepodd ἘΤΙ (3915 BE ee See eee 
ΒΕ YING ‘Iseq YON 2A\ YING | “4sa\4 YON "yseq πος ᾿ς 2250.) aga fo 2uvspund 
[ney vrlursieg 
{ποις vol ἘΠ ΙΣΡΙΛΙ vIsIog Aueuriasy "qj4va 241 fo appius 
eyndy aSeyqies elUsUIy PIP ἘΠῚ] ) | 201 moLf aqouas sarsqunory 
Ayeyy ἘΤΡΤΌΠΙΝ ἘΠΙΒΟΙΛῊ eryqeg ureqig 
"IS9A\ ΟΝ | ᾿1589ΛῪλ GINO "1st" YON "yseq Yanog | *1Saqq YWON |'Sazszunor 341 {0 quvspond 


"1S9\\ YON “4191, 14 J, 


“Solty 


“seq yINog 


‘sniney, Ὁ 


“seq YON 


“TUTULOL) 


"SUSI 


ONIONOTIA 51 ΝΩΟ FHL TIV ONIMOHS ATV, 


52 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


criminately, and live in a state of dispersion like wild beasts ; they never 
unite in society, but lead a wandering and savage life. 

The familiarities exercised by the Planets, and by the Signs of the 
Zodiac, together with the manners, customs, and qualities, particular 
as well as general, which they produce, have now been concisely de- 
scribed ; but in order to facilitate the knowledge and use of them, the 
subjoined table is inserted, to show, at one view, what countries are in 


connection with each sign, respectively, according to the mode above 
detailed. 


CHAPTER IV 


THE FAMILIARITY OF THE REGIONS OF THE EARTH WITH THE 
FIXED STARS 


In addition to the rules which have been already given, respecting the 
familiarity of the regions of the earth with the signs and planets, it 
must be observed, that all fixed stars which may be posited on any line, 
drawn from one zodiacal pole to the other, through such parts of the 
zodiac as may be connected with any particular country, are also in 
familiarity with that particular country. 

And, with regard to metropolitan cities, it is necessary to state, that 
those points or degrees of the zodiac, over which the Sun and Moon were 
in transit, at the time when the construction of any such city was first 
undertaken and commenced, are to be considered as sympathizing with 
that city in an especial manner ; and that, among the angles, the ascend- 
ant is principally in accordance with it. In certain cases, however, 
where the date of foundation of a metropolis cannot be ascertained, the 
mid-heaven in the nativity of the reigning king, or other actual chief 
magistrate, is to be substituted, and considered as that part of the zodiac 
with which it chiefly sympathizes.1 ἢ 


CHAPTER V 
MODE OF PARTICULAR PREDICTION IN ECLIPSES 


Arter having gone through the necessary preliminary topics, it is now 
proper to speak of the manner in which predictions are to be formed and 
considered; beginning with those which relate to general events, 
affecting either certain cities, or districts, or entire countries. 

The strongest and principal cause of all these events exists in the 


1 Whalley remarks on this passage, that the gradual progress of the fixed 
stars “ from one sign to another, is in an especial manner to be regarded in 
considering the mutations, manners, customs, laws, government, and fortune 
of a kingdom.” 


CHAP. VI.] PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 53 


ecliptical conjunctions of the Sun and Moon, and in the several transits 
made by the planets during those conjunctions. 

One part of the observations, required in forming predictions in 
cases of this nature, relates to the locality of the event, and points out 
the cities or countries liable to be influenced by particular eclipses, or 
by occasional continued stations of certain planets, which at times 
remain for a certain period in one situation. ‘These planets are Saturn, 
Jupiter, and Mars ; and they furnish portentous indications, when they 
are stationary. 

Another branch relates to time, and gives pre-information of the 
period at which the event will occur, and how long it will continue to 
operate. 

The third branch is generic; and points out the classes, or kinds, 
which the event will affect. 

The last part is specific ; and foreshows the actual quality and charac- 
ter of the coming event. 


CHAPTER VI 


THE REGIONS OR COUNTRIES TO BE CONSIDERED AS LIABLE TO BE 
COMPREHENDED IN THE EVENT 


Tue first of the several branches of consideration just enumerated 
relates to locality, and is to be exercised in the following manner :— 

In all eclipses of the Sun and Moon, and especially in such as are fully 
visible, the place in the zodiac, where the eclipse happens, is to be noted ; 
and it must be seen what countries are in familiarity with that place, 
according to the rules laid down regarding the quadrants and the tri- 
plicities ; and in like manner it must be observed what cities are under 
the influence of the sign in which the eclipse happens ; either by means 
of the ascendant, and the situations of the luminaries at the time of 
their foundation, or by means of the mid-heaven of their kings or 
governors, actually ruling at the time of the eclipse; although such 
time may be subsequent to the building of the said cities. Whatever 
countries or cities shall be thus found in familiarity with the ecliptical 
place, will all be comprehended in the event; which will, however, 
principally attach to all those parts which may be connected with the 
identical sign of the eclipse, and in which it was visible while above the 
earth.? 


1 As shown in the Table at page 51. 

2 It does not appear that the text here warrants the conclusion which 
Whalley has drawn from it, viz. “that wherever eclipses are not visible, they 
have no influence, and therefore subterranean eclipses cannot have any.” 
Ptolemy declares, that ail countries in familiarity with the ecliptical place will 
be comprehended in the event ; and, with regard to the visibility or invisibility 
of the eclipse, he says merely that its effects will be principally felt in such of 
the said countries as might have obtained a view of the eclipse. 


54 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


CHAPTER VII 
THE TIME AND PERIOD OF THE EVENT 


Tue second point requiring attention relates to time, and indicates the 
date when the event will take place, and the period during which its 
effect will continue: these are to be ascertained in the following manner. 

It must however be premised, that as an eclipse, occurring at any 
particular season, cannot happen in all climates at the same temporal 
or solar hour,! so neither will the magnitude of the obscuration, nor the 
time of its continuance, be equal in all parts of the world. First, there- 
fore (as is done in a nativity), the angles are to be arranged, in every 
country connected with the eclipse, according to the hour at which the 
eclipse, takes place and the elevation of the pole in that country. 
The time, during which the obscuration of the eclipse may continue 
in each country, is then to be noted in equatorial hours.2 And, after 
these particulars have been carefully observed, it is to be understood 
that the effect will endure as many years as the obscuration lasted 
hours, provided the eclipse was solar; but if lunar, a like number of 
months is to be reckoned instead of years. 

The commencement of the effect, and the period of its general 
intensity, or strength, are to be inferred from the situation of the place 
of the eclipse with respect to the angles. For, if the ecliptical place 
be near the eastern horizon, the effect will begin to be manifested in the 
course of the first four months after the date of the eclipse; and its 
general height, or intensity, will take place in, or about, the first third 
part of the whole extent of its duration. If the ecliptical place happen 
to be in or near the mid-heaven, the effect will begin to appear in the 
second four months, and its general intensity will occur about the second 
third part ; and, if the place should fall near the western horizon, the 
effect will begin in the third four months, and take its general intensity in 
the last third part of its whole duration.$ 


1 Temporal or solar hours are duodecimal parts of the Sun’s diurnal or 
nocturnal arc, and are numbered by day from sunrise to sunset ; by night, 
from sunset to sunrise. 

2 Equatorial hours are the twenty-four hours of the earth’s revolution on 
its axis. Each of them is equal in duration to the passage of 15 degrees of the 
Equator ; and they are numbered from noon to noon. A particular explanation 
of the astronomical use, both of temporal and equatorial hours, is to be found 
in the 9th Chapter of the second Book of the Almagest ; an extract from which 
is given in the Appendix. 

3 The three periods of four months each, stated in this paragraph, are 
applicable to solar eclipses only; for lunar eclipses, these periods may be 
reckoned at ten days each ; that number of days bearing the same proportion 
to a month, as four months to a year. On this point, Whalley, with his usual 


CHAP. VIII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 55 


Partial intensities, or relaxations of the effect, are, however, to be 
inferred from any combinations which may happen during the inter- 
mediate period,! either in the actual places where the primary cause 
was presented, or in other places configurated therewith. They are 
also to be conjectured by the various courses, or transits, of such planets 
as co-operate in producing the effect, by being configurated with the 
sign in which the primary cause was situated ; and, with this view, the 
matutine, vespertine, or stationary position, or midnight culmination of 
those planets must be observed ; for the effect will be strengthened and 
augmented by their matutine or stationary position ; but weakened and 
diminished by their being vespertine, or situated under the sunbeams, 
or by their midnight culmination. 


CHAPTER VIII 
THE GENUS, CLASS, OR KIND, LIABLE TO BE AFFECTED 


Tue third division of these observations relates to the mode of distin- 
guishing the genus, or species, of animals or things about to sustain the 
expected effect. This distinction is made by means of the conformation 
and peculiar properties of those signs in which the place of the eclipse, 
and the places of such fixed stars and planets, as are in dominion accord- 
ing to the actual sign of the eclipse, and that of the angle before it, may 
be found. And a planet, or fixed star, is to be considered as holding 
dominion when circumstanced as follows. 

If there be found one planet having more numerous claims than any 
other to the place of the eclipse, as well as to that of the angle, being also 
in the immediate vicinity of those places, and visibly applying to, or 
receding from them, and having likewise more rights over other places 
connected with them by configuration ; the said planet being, at the 
same time, lord by house, triplicity, exaltation, and terms; in such a 
case, only that single planet is entitled to dominion. But, if the lord 
of the eclipse and the lord of the angle be not identical, then those two 
planets which have most connections with each place are to be noted ; 
and, of these two, the lord of the eclipse is to be preferred to the chief 
dominion, “ although the other is to be considered as bearing rule con- 
jointly.”2 And if more than two should be found, having equal pre- 


inaccuracy, has asserted, that “ in eclipses of the Moon, two days, or thereabouts, 
are equal to the four months ” here reckoned in eclipses of the Sun. He adds, 
however, what perhaps may be true, that “lunar eclipses are by no means so 
powerful as those of the Sun, although more so than any other lunation.” 

1 That is to say, from any combinations of the Sun and Moon which may 
take place after the date of the eclipse, but before the close of its effect. 

2 ‘The edition of Allatius does not contain the words here marked by inverted 
commas ; but they are found in other editions of the text, and seem necessary 
to complete the sense of the passage. 


56 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Hi. 


tensions to each place, that particular one among them which may be 
nearest to an angle, or most concerned with the places in question, by the 
nature of its condition, is to be selected for dominion.? 

But, among the fixed stars, the chief bright one (which, during 
the time of the eclipse, may hold connection, in any of the nine modes of 
apparent configuration detailed in the First Syntaxis? with the angles 
then actually in passage), is to be admitted to dominion ; as also that 
one which, at the ecliptical hour, may be in an eminent situation, either 
having risen, or having culminated with the angle following the place 
of the eclipse. 

Having considered, according to the foregoing rules, what stars co- 
operate in regulating the coming event, the conformation and figure 
of the signs, in which the eclipse takes place and the said ruling stars 
may be posited, are also to be observed ; and, from the properties and 
characteristics of those signs, the genus or species, to be comprehended 
in the event, is chiefly to be inferred. 

For instance, should the zodiacal constellations, and those of the 
ruling fixed stars out of the zodiac, be of human shape, the effect will 
fall upon the human race. If the signs be not of human shape, but yet 
terrestrial, or quadrupedal, the event would be indicated to happen to 
animals of similar form: the signs shaped like reptiles signify that 
serpents and creatures of that description will be affected ; those bearing 
the figure of ferocious beasts denote that the event will affect savage 
and destructive animals; and those figured like tame beasts show 
that it will operate on animals serviceable to mankind, and of domestic 
character ; as intimated by the shape and figure of the signs, whether 
resembling horses, oxen, sheep, or any other useful animals. In 
addition to this, the terrestrial signs situated in the north, about the 
Arctic circle, indicate sudden earthquakes; and those in the south, 
sudden deluges of rain. And, should the ruling places be situated in 
signs shaped like winged animals, as in that of Aquila, or in others of 
similar form, the event will take effect on birds ; and will chiefly attach 
to those which afford food to man. If the said places should be in signs 


1 “When planets, in election for Lords of the eclipse, are found of equal 
strength and dignity, those which are direct are to be preferred before those 
which are retrograde; and the oriental before the occidental.”—W halley’s 
“ Annotations.” 

4 That is to say, in the Almagest, Book VIII, Chap. IV ; which chapter is 
given, entire, in the Appendix. 

3 “Tn electing fixed stars, Cardan directs to observe the angle which the 
eclipse follows, and that which it precedes: as, if the eclipse be between the 
seventh house ” (or occidental angle) “and the mid-heaven, the stars which 
are in the seventh shall be preferred ; and next, those in the mid-heaven ; but, 
if between the mid-heaven and the ascendant, those in the mid-heaven shall 


have the preference ; and next, those in the ascendant.”—Whalley’s ‘““Annota- 
tions.” 


CHAP. VIII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 57 


formed like creatures which swim, and in marine signs, such as Delphinus, 
the effect will be felt by marine animals, and in the navigation of fleets ; 
if in river signs, such as Aquarius and Pisces, it will attach to animals 
living in rivers and in fresh waters: and, ifin Argo, both sea and fresh- 
water animals will be affected by it.+ 

Again, should the ruling places be situated in tropical or in equinoctial 
signs, in either case alike they presignify changes in the state of the 
atmosphere, at the respective season to which each sign is appropriated. 
For example, with regard to the season of spring and the productions of 
the earth, if the said places should be in the sign of the vernal equinox, 
they will produce an effect on the buds of the vine and fig, and of such 
other trees as sprout forth at that season. Should they be in the sign 
of the summer tropic, the event will affect the gathering and depositing 
of fruits; and, with respect to Aigypt in particular, it will impede the 
rising of the Nile. If they should be in the sign of the autumnal equinox, 
they foreshow that it will operate on grain and on various sorts of herbs ; 
if in the sign of the winter tropic, on potherbs, esculent vegetables, and 
such birds and fishes as arrive in that season. 

The equinoctial signs further indicate the circumstances liable to 
happen in ecclesiastical concerns, and in religious matters: the tropical 
signs give warning of changes in the atmosphere and in political affairs ; 
the fixed signs, of changes in institutions and in buildings; and the 
bicorporeal signs show that the future event will fall alike on princes and 
their subjects. 

Again, the ruling places situated in the east, during the time of the 
eclipse, signify that fruits and seeds, incipient institutions, and the age 
of youth, will be affected; those, which may be in the mid-heaven 
above the earth announce that the coming event will relate to ecclesias- 
tical affairs, to kings and princes, and to the middle age; those in the 
west, that it will influence the laws, old age, and persons about to die. 

The proportion liable to be affected, of that genus or kind on which 
the event will fall, is to be ascertained by the magnitude of the obscura- 
tion caused by the eclipse, and by the positions held by the operative 
stars in regard to the ecliptical place; as, in vespertine position to a 
solar eclipse, or in matutine position to a lunar eclipse, the said stars will 
most usually much diminish the effect ; in opposition they render it 
moderate; but in matutine position to a solar eclipse, or in vespertine 
to a lunar, they greatly augment and extend it.? 


1 It is perhaps unnecessary to remark, that, in speaking of ruling places, as 
liable to be situated in Aquila, Delphinus or Argo, Ptolemy alludes only to the 
places of the fixed stars in dominion : since the ecliptical place and the planets 
must be confined to the zodiacal signs. 

2 According to Whalley, Cardan, in reference to the nine modes of con- 
figuration, applicable to the fixed stars, says, ‘“‘ When a fixed star is with any 
planet, or in any angle, consider whether it be by any of these ways; if not, 


58 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS — [BOOK I. 


CHAPTER IX 
THE QUALITY AND NATURE OF THE EFFECT 


Tue discrimination of the peculiar properties and character of the 
effect about to be produced, and of its good or evil nature, occupies the 
fourth and last division of this part of the subject. 

These properties must be gathered from the power of the stars which 
control the ruling places, and from the contemperament created by 
their relative admixture with each other and with the places which they 
control. For, although the Sun and Moon are the acknowledged 
sources of all the efficacy and dominion of the stars, and of their 
strength or weakness, and in a certain manner regulate and command 
them, still, it is by the theory of the contemperament, produced by the 
stars in dominion, that the effect is indicated. 

In order to understand the indications thus made, it is necessary to 
begin by attending to the following detail of the effective property of 
each planet—previously observing, however, that, when any circum- 
stance is said, for the sake of brevity, to come to pass by the general 
influence of the five planets, their temperament, and the power and 
assistance they may derive from natures similar to their own, the actual 
continuance of their own proper constitution, or the casual combination 
of any analogous influence, arising from fixed stars or places in the zodiac, 
are all, at the same time, to be kept in view. Consequently, whenever 
any general remark is herein made relative to the five planets, it will 
likewise be necessary to bear in mind both their temperament and 
quality ; as fully, indeed, as if the stars themselves had not been named, 
but only their effective quality and nature. And, it is further to be 
remembered, that, in every case of compound temperament, not only 
the combination of the planets with each other requires to be considered, 
but also that of such fixed stars and zodiacal places as share in the natures 
of the planets, by being respectively connected with them according to 
the familiarities already described. 

Hence, when Saturn may be sole governor, he will produce disasters 
concomitant with cold. And, in as far as the event may apply to the 
human race in particular, it will induce among men lingering diseases, 
consumptions, declines, rheumatisms, disorders from watery humours, 
and attacks of the quartan ἀρὰ ; as well as exile, poverty, and a general 
mass of evils, griefs, and alarms : deaths also will be frequent, but chiefly 
among persons advanced inage. That part of the brute creation which 


it is most weak ; if it be, consider whether it be with the Sun, and not to be 
seen ; then it is very weak. Or if it is to be seen, and is with the Sun occidental, 
it is indifferent. Or if it be seen, and is not with the Sun, it is stronger; or 
if it be seen, and is oriental, then it is strongest.” 


CHAP. IXx.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 59 


is most serviceable to man will likewise suffer, and be destroyed by 
disease ; and men who make use of the animals thus diseased will be 
infected by them, and perish with them. The atmosphere will become 
dreadfully chilly and frosty, unwholesome, turbid and gloomy, present- 
ing only clouds and pestilence. Copious and destructive storms of snow 
and hail will descend, generating and fostering insects and reptiles 
noxious to mankind. In rivers, and at sea, tempests will be frequent 
and general, causing disastrous voyages and many shipwrecks ; and even 
fish will be destroyed. The waters of the sea will retire for a time, and 
again return and produce inundations ; rivers will overflow their banks, 
and cause stagnant pools; and the fruits of the earth, especially such 
as are necessary to sustain life, will be lost and cut off by blight, 
locusts, floods, rains, hail, or some similar agency; and the loss will be 
so extensive as to threaten even famine. 

Jupiter, if he should be lord alone, will thoroughly improve and 
benefit all things. Among mankind, in particular, this planet promotes 
honour, happiness, content, and peace, by augmenting all the necessaries 
and comforts of life, and all mental and bodily advantages. It induces 
also favours, benefits, and gifts emanating from royalty, and adds greater 
lustre to kings themselves, increasing their dignity and magnanimity : 
all men, in short, will share in the prosperity created by its influence. 
With regard to the operation of the event on brutes, those which are 
domestic and adapted to man’s service will be multiplied and will thrive ; 
while others, which are useless and hostile to man, will be destroyed. 
The constitution of the atmosphere will be healthy and temperate, 
filled with gentle breezes and moisture, and favourable to fruits. 
Navigation will be safe and successful; rivers will rise to their just 
proportion; fruit and grain, and all other productions of the earth 
conducive to the welfare and happiness of mankind, will be presented 
in abundance. 

Mars, when governing alone, generally causes such mischief and 
destruction as are concomitant with dryness. And, among mankind, 
foreign wars will be excited, accompanied with intestine divisions, 
captivity, slaughter, insurrections of the people, and wrath of princes 
against their subjects; together with sudden and untimely death, 
the consequence of these disturbances. Feverish disorders, tertian 
agues, and hemorrhages will take place, and will be rapidly followed by 
painful death, carrying off chiefly youthful persons: and conflagration, 
murder, impiety, every infraction of the law, adultery, rape, robbery, 
-and all kinds of violence will be practised. ‘The atmosphere will be 
parched by hot, pestilential, and blasting winds, accompanied by 
drought, lightnings, and fires emitted from the sky. At sea, ships will 
be suddenly wrecked by the turbulence of the wind and strokes of 
lightning. Rivers will fail, springs will be dried up, and there will be a 
scarcity of water proper for food and sustenance. All the creatures 
and productions of the earth adapted to the use of man, whether beasts, 


60 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


grain, or fruits, will be damaged or destroyed by excessive heat, by 
storms of thunder and lightning, or by violent winds ; and whatever 
has been deposited in store will be destroyed or injured by fire, or by 
heat. 

Venus, alone in domination, generally produces the same effects as 
Jupiter, yet with greater suavity and more agreeably. Glory, honour, 
and joy will attend mankind ; happy marriages will be contracted, and 
the fortunate pairs will be blest with numerous children. Every under- 
taking will proceed prosperously, wealth will increase, and the conduct 
of human life will be altogether pure, simple and pious ; due reverence 
being paid to all holy and sacred institutions, and harmony subsisting 
between princes and their subjects. The weather also will be of a 
favourable temperature, cooled by moistening breezes; the air alto- 
gether pure and salubrious, frequently refreshed by fertilising showers. 
Voyages will be performed in safety, and be attended by success and 
profit. Rivers will be improved, and receive their adequate supply of 
᾿ waters ; and all things valuable and useful to mankind, whether animal 
or vegetable, will abundantly thrive and multiply. 

Mercury, if possessing dominion, is usually conjoined with one or 
other of the planets beforementioned, and is conformed and assimilated 
to their natures ; yet as, in itself, it presents a certain addition to their 
power, this planet increases the respective impulses of them all. And, 
in regard to the operation of the event on mankind, it will promote 
industry and skill in business; but, at the same time, thievish propen- 
sities, robberies, and plots of treachery: if configurated with the male- 
fics, it will produce calamities in navigation, and will also cause dry and 
parching diseases, quotidian fever, cough, consumption, and hemorrhage. 
All parts of the ceremonies and services of religion, the affairs of the 
executive government, as well as manners, customs, and laws, are dis- 
posed and regulated by this planet, conformably to its admixture and 
familiarity with each of the others. And in consequence of the dryness 
of its nature, arising from its proximity to the Sun, and the rapidity of 
its motion, it will generate in the atmosphere turbulent, sharp and 
varied winds, together with thunders, meteors, and lightnings, accom- 
panied by sudden chasms in the earth, and earthquakes: by these 
means it not unfrequently occasions the destruction of animals and 
plants assigned to the service of mankind. Besides the foregoing effects, 
it produces, when in vespertine position, a diminution of waters, and, 
when matutine, an augmentation. 

Each of the planets, when fully exercising its own separate and dis- 
tinct influence, will properly produce the peculiar effects above ascribed 
toit; but should it be combined with others, whether by configuration, 
by familiarity arising from the sign in which it may be pes 1 or by 


1 That is to say (technically speaking), by reception, or by being posited ὁ in 
a sign in which another planet has a certain dignity or prerogative. 


CHAP, IXx.] PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 61 


its position towards the Sun, the coming event will then happen 
agreeably to the admixture and compound temperament which arise 
from the whole communion actually subsisting among the influencing 
powers. It would, however, be a business of infinite labour and in- 
numerable combinations, quite beyond the limits of this treatise, to set 
forth fully every contemperament and all configurations, in every mode 
in which they can possibly exist; and the knowledge of them must 
therefore be acquired by particular discrimination in every instance, 
under the guidance of the precepts of science. Yet the following 
additional remark must not be here omitted. 

The nature of the familiarities, subsisting between the stars, lords of 
the coming event, and the countries or cities over which the event will 
extend, requires to be observed; for, should the stars be benefic, and 
their familiarity with the countries liable to sustain the effect be 
unimpeded by any opposing influence, they will then exercise the favour- 
able energies of their own nature in a greater degree. And, on the other 
hand, when any obstacle may intervene to obstruct their familiarity, or 
when they themselves may be overpowered by some opposing influence, 
the advantages of their operation will be diminished. Again, should the 
stars, lords of the coming event, not be benefic, but injurious, their 
effect will be less severe, provided they may either have familiarity with 
the countries on which the event will fall, or be restrained by some 
opposing influence. If, however, they should have no such familiarity, 
and not be subjected to restraint by any others, endowed with a nature 
contrary to their own and possessing a familiarity with the countries in 
question, the evils which they produce will then be more violent and 
intense. And all these general affections, of whatever kind, whether good 
or evil, will be principally felt by those persons in whose individual 
nativities there may be found the same disposition of the luminaries 
(which are the most essential significators), or the same angles, as those 
existing during the eclipse which operates the general affection. The 
same remark equally applies to other persons, in whose nativities the 
disposition of the luminaries and of the angles may be in opposition to 
that existing during the eclipse. With respect to these coincidences, 
the partile agreement, or opposition, of the ecliptical place of the lumin- 
aries to the place of either luminary in a nativity, produces an effect at 
least capable of being guarded against.} 


1 In conformity to the rule laid down in Chap. VI of this Book, those 
individuals whose nativities may thus resemble the position of the heavens at 
the time of an eclipse, and who are here stated to be chiefly liable to the effects 
of the eclipse, will be more affected by it, if it should be visible to them. 

To the precepts contained in this chapter, Placidus makes the following 
allusion in his remarks on the nativity of Cardinal Pancirole. ‘“ Any significator 
whatever, together with the other stars, whilst they are moved by a converse 
universal motion, change the aspect alternately, and consequently the mundane 
rays, as it likewise happens when they acquire parallels: the rays thus acquired 


62 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


CHAPTER X 
COLOURS IN ECLIPSES; COMETS, AND SIMILAR PHENOMENA 


In investigating general events, it is necessary further to observe the 
colours or hues displayed during an eclipse, either in the luminaries, or 
around them ; in the shape of rods or rays, or in other similar forms. 
For, if these colours or hues should be black, or greenish, they portend 
effects similar to those produced by Saturn’s nature ; if white, to those 
operated by Jupiter; if reddish, to those by Mars; if yellow, to those 
by Venus ; and if of various colours, to those by Mercury. 

And, if the entire bodies of the luminaries be thus coloured, or should 
the hues extend over all the parts immediately circumjacent to the 
luminaries, it is an indication that the effects will attach to most parts 
of the region, or countries, with which the eclipse and its ruling places 
may bein familiarity. If, however, the colouring should not spread over 
the whole surface of the luminaries, nor over all the parts around them, 
but be limited to some particular quarter, then only such a portion of 
the said countries, as may be indicated by the situation of the visible 
hues, will be comprehended in the event. 

It is also requisite to notice, with respect to general events, the risings 
or first appearances of those celestial phenomena called comets, whether 
presenting themselves at ecliptical times or at any other periods. ‘They 
are displayed in the shape of beams, trumpets, pipes, and in other 
similar figures, and operate effects like those of Mars and Mercury ; 
exciting wars, heated and turbulent dispositions in the atmosphere, 
and in the constitutions of men, with all their evil consequences. The 
parts of the zodiac! in which they may be posited when they first appear, 
and the direction and inclination of their trains, point out the regions 
or places liable to be affected by the events which they threaten ; and 
the form of the signs indicates the quality and nature of those events, 
as well as the genus, class, or kind, on which the effect will fall. The 


are of a long continuance, and denote a certain universal disposition of the 
things signified, either good or bad, according to the nature of the aspecting 
stars ; as it happened to this Cardinal, who some years before his death was 
always sickly : and this observation is wonderful in the changes of the times 
and weather ; for this principle Ptolemy adhered to in the Almagest, lib, VIII, 
cap. 43 and this doctrine he also mentions in the 2nd Book of Judgments, 
in the chapter on the Nature of Events.”—(Cooper’s Transalation, p. 272.) 

1 When a comet appears out of the zodiac, a line should be drawn from one 
zodiacal pole to the other, through the spot where it appears; and that spot 
is to be considered as being in familiarity with the same countries as those 
parts of the zodiac which may be on the same line.—V/ide Chap. IV of this Book, 
relative to the manner in which fixed stars out of the zodiac hold familiarity 
with certain regions and countries. 


cuap. x1.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 63 


time of their continuance shows the duration of their effect ; and their 
position, with regard to the Sun, the period when it will commence ; 
as, if they first appear matutine, they denote an early commencement ; 
but, if vespertine, that it will be late and tardy. 

The general and more comprehensive parts of the consideration 
regarding regions, countries, and cities, having now been explained, it 
becomes necessary to discuss certain particular points of the same 
consideration ; that is to say, the annual occurrences which take place at 
certain fixed seasons, and the chief of which is that called the New Moon 
of the Year. 


CHAPTER XI 
THE NEW MOON OF THE YEAR 


In every annual revolution made by the Sun, the first new Moon of the 
year is to be considered as the point of the commencement of his cir- 
cuit; this is evident not only from its denomination, but from its 
virtue also,4 

The case stands thus: In the ecliptic, which, as circle, has in fact 
no actual or definite beginning, the two equinoctial and the two tropical 
points, marked by the equator and the tropical circles, are reasonably 
assumed as beginnings. And to obviate any doubt as to which of these 
four points should preferably be considered as the primary beginning 
(since in the regular simple motion of a circle no part of it has any 
apparent precedence), the appropriate quality naturally belonging to 
each of these four points has been taken into consideration by the writers 
on this subject. And the point of the vernal equinox has been con- 
sequently designated by them as the beginning of the year; because, 
from that time, the duration of the day begins to exceed that of the 
night, and because the season then produced partakes highly of moisture, 
which is always a predominant quality in all incipient generation and 
growth. After the vernal equinox comes the summer solstice ; when 
the day attains its greatest length, and in Aigypt, ‘at the same period, 
the rise of the Nile takes place and the Dog Star appears. ‘Then follows 
the autumnal equinox, when all fruits are gathered 1 in, and the sowing 
of seeds recommences anew ; lastly, comes the winter solstice, when the 
day proceeds from its shortest duration towards its increase. 

Although the foregoing arrangement has been adopted by men of 


1 The Neomenia, or new Moon, was observed as a festival with much 
solemnity in earlier ages and by the most ancient nations. It was celebrated 
by the Israelites, as well as by Pagan; and it may perhaps be gathered from 
the 5th and 6th verses of the zoth Chapter of the 1st Book of Samuel, that it 
was kept once,in a year with greater ceremony than at other times: this was 
done, probably, at the ‘“‘ New Moon of the Year,” as Ptolemy calls it ; or, in 
other words, at the new Moon nearest to the vernal equinox. 


64. PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book 11. 


science to denote the commencement of the several seasons of the year, 
it yet seems to be more consonant to nature, and more consistent with 
the facts, that the combined positions of sy Sun, and the new, or full, 
Moon, which happen when the Sun is nearest to the points above- 
mentioned, should mark the four beginnings; and more especially 
if such combined positions should produce eclipses : thus, from the new 
or full Moon, taking place when the Sun is nearest to the first point of 
Aries, the spring should be dated ; from that when the Sun is nearest to 
the first point of Cancer, the summer; from that when he is nearest 
to the first point of Libra, the autumn; and from that when he is 
nearest to the first point of Capricorn, the winter. The Sun not only 
produces the general qualities and constitutions of the seasons, by means 
of which very illiterate persons are enabled, in a certain degree, to form 
predictions, but he also regulates the proper significations of the signs 
with regard to the excitation of the winds, as well as other general 
occurrences, more or less subjected to occasional variation. All these 
general effects are usually brought about by the new or full Moon which 
takes place at the aforesaid points, and by the configurations then exist- 
ing between the luminaries,and the planets: but there are certain 
particular consequences which result from the new and full Moon in 
every sign,! and from the transits of the planets; ‘‘ and which require 
monthly investigation.’’? 

It therefore becomes necessary to explain, in the first instance, the 
particular natures and attributes exercised by each sign in influencing 
the several constitutions of the weather, as it exists at various times of the 
year ; these natures and attributes shall now be immediately detailed. 
It will be recollected, that the particular properties of the planets and 
the fixed stars, as affecting the wind and the atmosphere, as well as the 
manner in which the entire signs hold familiarity with the winds and 
the seasons, have been already set forth. 


CHAPTER XII 


THE PARTICULAR NATURES OF THE SIGNS BY WHICH THE DIFFERENT 
CONSTITUTIONS OF THE ATMOSPHERE ARE PRODUCED? 


Tue sign of Aries has a general tendency, arising from the presence of the 
Equinox, to promote thunder and hail. Certain of its parts, however, 
operate in a greater or less degree, according to the nature of the stars 


1 That is to say, at the new and full Moon taking place during the Sun’s 
progress through each sign. 


2 The passage marked thus “ ” is not in the Greek, but is found in two. 


Latin translations. 
3 According to Wing, in his “‘ Instructions to the Ephemerides,” printed 
in 1652, the signs, as mentioned in this chapter by Ptolemy, are to be considered 


CHAP. XII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 65 


which compose the sign: for instance, the front parts excite rain and 
wind ; the middle are temperate; and those behind are heating and 
pestilential. ‘The northern parts, also, are heating and pernicious, but 
the southern cooling and frosty. 

The sign of Taurus, in its general character, partakes of both tem- 
peraments,! but is nevertheless chiefly warm. Its front parts, and 
especially those near the Pleiades, produce earthquakes, clouds and 
winds : the middle parts are moistening and cooling ; those behind, and 
near the Hyades, are fiery, and cause meteors and lightnings. ‘The 
northern parts are temperate ; the southern turbulent and variable. 

Gemini, in its general tendency, is temperate ; but its leading parts 
produce mischief by moisture ; its middle parts are entirely temperate ; 
its latter parts mixed and turbulent. The northern parts promote 
earthquakes and wind ; and the southern are dry and heating. 

Cancer is, in the whole, serene and warm, but its anterior part near 
the Presepe are oppressively hot and suffocating ; the middle parts are 
temperate, and the latter parts excite wind. And both its northern 
and southern parts are equally fiery and scorching. 

Leo has a general tendency operative of stifling heat. The anterior 
parts are oppressively and pestilentially hot ; yet the middle parts are 
temperate; and those behind are injurious by means of moisture. The 
northern parts produce variation and heat, and the southern moisture. 

Virgo, in its general tendency, excites moisture and thunder. The 
front parts, however, are chiefly warm and noxious; the middle tem- 
perate; and the latter parts watery. ‘The northern parts promote 
wind ; the southern are temperate. 

Libra has a general tendency to produce change and variation. Its 
front and middle parts are temperate; its hinder parts watery. The 
northern parts cause variable winds, and the southern are moistening and 
pestilential. 

Scorpio, in its general character, is fiery and productive of thunder. 
The front parts cause snow ; the middle are temperate ; the latter parts 
excite earthquakes. Its northern parts are heating; its southern, 
moistening. 

Sagittarius, generally, is effective of wind. ‘The front parts are 
moistening ; the middle temperate; and the hinder parts fiery. The 
northern parts promote wind, and the southern variation and moisture. 


in their quality as constellations, and not as spaces of the heavens. This opinion, 
however, seems to me to be erroneous; for Ptolemy has already devoted a 
chapter in the Ist Book to the detail of the influences of the several stars in the 
respective constellations of the zodiac ; and he moreover speaks, in the present 
chapter, of the operation of Aries, as owing to the presence of the Equinox. 
This he could not have done, had he spoken of the signs as constellations instead 
of spaces. 
1 The temperaments here alluded to are, probably, heat and cold. 


66 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


Capricorn’s general tendency is to operate moisture. But its anterior 
parts are pernicious by means of heat, its middle parts are temperate, 
and its latter parts promote rain. Both its northern and southern parts 
are injurious by means of moisture. 

Aquarius, in its general character, is cold and watery. The front 
parts are moistening; the middle temperate; and the latter parts 
productive of wind. The northern parts are heating; the southern 
cause snow. 

Pisces, in its general character, is cold and effective of wind. The 
front parts are temperate ; the middle moistening; the hinder parts 
highly heating. ‘The northern parts excite wind, and the southern are 
watery. 


CHAPTER XIII 


MODE OF CONSIDERATION FOR PARTICULAR CONSTITUTIONS OF THE 
ATMOSPHERE 


Tue first part of the consideration, requisite to form an estimate of the 
various constitutions liable to take effect in the atmosphere, applies to 
the general qualities pervading the several quarters of the year, and has 
therefore the most extended scope. In order to learn these qualities, it is 
necessary, in every quarter, to observe, as above directed, the new or full 
Moon which may happen before? the period of the Sun’s transit through 


1“ Before.” Although I have thus Englished the word, προ, I think it 
properly requires to he here rendered, by “at” or “ near io,” rather than 
“before.” Firstly, because my author (in speaking of the commencement 
of each quarter of the year, in the 11th Chapter, p. 93), has expressly stated 
that ‘ the spring is to be dated from the new or full Moon taking place when 
the Sun is nearest (eyy.sa) to the first point of Aries; the summer from that, 
when he is nearest the first point of Cancer,” &c., &c. ; and (in p. 94) he states 
that certain general effects are brought about by the new or full Moon occurring 
at (κατα) the aforesaid points.” Secondly, because, in a few lines further on, 
in speaking of the monthly consideration, p. 98, he again uses only eyyisa, in 
reference to the present passage, in which, however, he has used only προ. 
Thirdly, it is a proper inference that he meant to point out here the new or 
full Moon which may happen nearest to the tropical or equinoctial points, 
because he has previously and explicitly taught that the principal variation of all 
things depends upon those points. Lastly, Allatius has here rendered the 
word by no other than proximé, which is also the word given in the Perugio 
Latin of 1646. 

On the other hand, Whalley, in his note on the present chapter, says, that 
‘according to this Prince of Astrologers”? (meaning Ptolemy), “‘ we are to 
observe the new or full Moon preceding the ingress, only, for our judgment 
on the succeeding quarter, and not the lunation succeeding: and the reason 
I conceive to be, because the lunation, which immediately precedes the ingress, 
carries its influence to the very position of the ingress itself, but not so that 


CHAP. XIII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 67 


either tropical or equinoctial point, whichever it may be ; and to arrange 
the angles (as in the case of a nativity) according to the degree and hour 
at which the new or full Moon may be found to happen, in every latitude 
for which the consideration may be desired. Such planets and stars as 
may have dominion over the places where the said new or full Moon 
happens, and over the following angle, are then to be noted, in the same 
manner as that stated with regard to eclipses. And after these pre- 
liminary steps have been attended to, a general inference may be drawn 
as to the proper qualities of the whole quarter; and the intensity or 
relaxation of their operation is to be contemplated from the natures of 
the ruling planets and stars, distinguished by the faculties they possess, 
and by the mode in which they affect the atmosphere. 

The second part of the consideration relates to each month, and 
requires a similar observation of the new or full Moon first taking place 
on the Sun’s progress through each sign: and it must be remembered, 
that, if a new Moon should have happened at a period nearest to the 
Sun’s transit over the past tropical or equinoctial point, the new Moon 
alsoin each succeeding sign, until the commencement of the next quarter, 
are to be observed ; but, if a full Moon should have so happened, then 
similar observation is to be made of each subsequent full Moon. The 
angles, also, must be duly attended to, as well as the planets and stars 
ruling in both the places!; and especially the nearest phases, applica- 
tions, and separations of the planets, and their properties. The peculiar 
qualities of the two places, and the winds, liable to be excited by the 
planets themselves and by those parts of the signs in which they may 
be situated, are likewise to be considered ; and also that particular wind, 
which is indicated by the direction of the Moon’s ecliptical latitude. 
By the aid of these observations, and by weighing and comparing the 
existing vigour of each of the several properties and qualities, the general 
constitution of the atmosphere during each month may be predicted. 

The third part of this consideration appertains to significations 
applying more minutely, and points out their force or weakness. In 


which follows the ingress.” Wing, in his Introduction to the Ephemerides 
(London, 1652) also says, that “ for the knowledge of the weather, it is requisite 
to observe the conjuction or opposition of the luminaries next preceding the 
Sun’s ingress into the first point of Aries.” 

Now, if a new or full Moon happen immediately after the Sun’s transit or 
ingress, the previous full or new Moon must have happened a fortnight before 
the said transit or ingress ; and, after considering the other parts of Ptolemy’s 
doctrine, I do not conceive, that he intended to teach, in this chapter, that 
a previous lunation, when at so great a distance before the important ingress, 
would have a greater influence over the ensuing quarter of the year, than a 
subsequent lunation taking place so closely after the said ingress. 

1“ Both the places.” ‘These are the places of the new or full Moon, and 
of the following angle; as before mentioned with regard to the quarterly 
consideration. 


68 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK 11. 


this case, the partile configurations of the Sun and Moon, at the inter- 
mediate quarters, as well as at the new or full Moon, are to be attentively 
regarded ; since there is a certain variation in the constitution of the 
atmosphere, which usually commences about three days before, and 
sometimes, also, about three days after the Moon has equated her course 
to the Sun. The configurations effected between the Moon, at each 
quarterly equation, and the planets, whether by the trine, sextile, or 
other authorized distances, are also to be observed ; because the peculiar 
property of the change in the constitutions of the atmosphere depends 
much upon such configurations, and may be accordingly perceived by 
considering the nature of the influence which the said configurated 
planets and the signs exercise over the atmosphere and the winds. 

The particular quality of the weather, thus produced, will be more 
fully established on certain days ; especially when the brighter and more 
efficacious fixed stars may be near the Sun, either matutine or vespertine; 
as, when so posited, they most frequently convert the constitution of 
the atmosphere to an agreement with their own natures: and, when the 
Luminaries may transit any one of the angles, a similar effect is also 
produced. At all such positions the particular constitutions of the 
atmosphere are subject to variation, and thus become alternately more 
intense or more relaxed in their respective qualities. In this manner, by 
certain positions of the Moon, the flux and reflux of the sea are caused : 
and, when the Luminaries may be in angles, a change of the wind is 
produced, according to the direction of the Moon’s ecliptical latitude. 

Finally, in all these considerations, it must be remembered that the 
more general and first constituted cause takes precedence, and that 
the particular cause comes subsequently and secondarily: and, 
that the operation is in the highest degree confirmed and strengthened, 
when the stars, which regulate the general effects, may be also con- 
figurated towards the production of the particular effects. 


CHAPTER XIV 
THE SIGNIFICATION OF METEORS 


In order to facilitate prognostication in minor and more limited in- 
stances, it is important to make further observation of all remarkable 
appearances occasionally visible around or near the Sun, Moon, and 
stars. And, for the diurnal state of the atmosphere, the Sun’s rising 
should be remarked; for the nocturnal state, his setting; but the 
probable duration of any such state must be considered by reference 
to the Sun’s configuration with the Moon; for, in most cases, each 
aspect, made between them, indicates the continuance of a certain 
state until another aspect shall take place. 

Hence, the Sun, when rising or setting, if he shine clear and open, 


CHAP. XIV. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 69 


free from mists, gloom, and clouds, promises serene weather. But, if 
he have a wavering or fiery orb, or seem to emit or attract red rays, or 
if he be accompanied in any one part by the clouds called parhelia, or by 
other reddish clouds of extended figure, in the form of long rays, he 
then portends violent winds, chiefly liable to arise from those parts in 
which the said phenomena may have shown themselves. If he should 
be pale or lurid, and rise or set encumbered with clouds, or surrounded 
by halos, he indicates storms and winds coming from the quarter of his 
apparent situation: and, if he be also accompanied by parhelia, or by 
lurid or dark rays, similar effects are also threatened from the parts 
where those appearances may be situated. 

The Moon’s course is to be carefully observed, at the third day before 
or after her conjunction with the Sun, her opposition, and her inter- 
mediate quarters ; for, if she then shine thin and clear, with no other 
phenomena about her, she indicates serenity ; but, if she appear thin 
and red, and have her whole unilluminated part visible, and in a state 
of vibration, she portends winds from the quarter of her latitude and 
declination? and if she appear dark, or pale and thick, she threatens 
storms and showers. All halos formed around the Moon should also 
be observed ; for, if there appear one only, bright and clear, and decay- 
ing by degrees, it promises serene weather ; but, if two or three appear, 
tempests are indicated: and, if they seem reddish and broken, they 
threaten tempests, with violent and boisterous winds ; if dark and thick, 
they foreshow storms and snow; if black and broken, tempests with 
both winds and snow; and, whenever a greater number may appear, 
storms of greater fury are portended. 

The planets, also, and the brighter fixed stars, occasionally have halos, 
which indicate certain effects appropriate to their tinctures, and to the 
nature of the stars around which they may be situated. 

The apparent magnitudes of the fixed stars, and the colours of the 
luminous masses among them, are likewise to be remarked: for, when 
the stars appear brighter and larger than usual, they indicate an ex- 
citation of the wind from that quarter in which they may be situated. 
The nebulous mass of the Presepe in Cancer, and others similar to it, 
also require observation ; as, if in fine weather they appear gloomy and 


1 Similar precepts may be found finely illustrated in Virgil’s 1st Georgic, 
vide 1, 433 et infra: 
** Sol quoque et exoriens et cum se condit in undas 
Signa dabit :” 


2 Virgil has said almost the same thing in these beautiful lines : 
** At si virgineum suffuderit ore ruborem 
Ventus erit : vento semper rubet aurea Pheebe.”—Georg. I, 1. 430. 
See also the whole passage, beginning at 1. 424: 
“Si vero Solem ad rapidum Lunasque sequentes 
Ordine respicies,” &c. 


70 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book It. 


indistinct, or thick, they thereby threaten a fall of rain; but, if clear 
and in continual vibration, they announce rough gales of wind.! 

Appearances occasionally visible in the sky, resembling the trains of 
comets,? usually indicate wind and drought ; in a degree proportionate 
to their multitude and continuance. 

Appearances, resembling shooting or falling stars, when presented in 
one part only, threaten a movement of wind from that part ;? when in 
various and opposite parts, they portend the approach of all kinds of 
tempestuous weather, together with thunder and lightning. Clouds 
resembling fleeces of wool will also sometimes presage tempests ; and 
the occasional appearance of the rainbow denotes, in stormy weather, 
the approach of serenity ; in fine weather, storms. And, in a word, all 
remarkable phenomena, visible in the sky, universally portend that 
certain appropriate events will be produced, each harmonising with its 
proper cause, in the manner herein described. 


After the forgoing brief investigation of the more limited as well as 
more extensive significations, regarding general events, it becomes 
proper to proceed to the doctrine of genethliacal prognostication, or 
judgments of individual nativities. 


1 At this place, the following sentence, not found in the Greek, is inserted 
in a Latin translation : 


“Tf the northern of the two stars, situated one on each side of the Presepe, 
and called the Asini, should not appear, the north wind will blow: but, if the 
southern one be invisible, the south wind.”’ 

2 These coruscations are, perhaps, similar to those now known by the name 
of the Aurora Borealis. 

3 Virgil again : 

“¢ Sepe etiam stellas vento impendente videbis 


Precipites ccelo labi.”—&c. Georg. I, 1. 365. 


A great part of the Ist Georgic consists of astrological rules for predicting the 
weather, closely resembling the precepts here given by Ptolemy. Virgil is said 
to have adopted his doctrine from Aratus. 


Env ΟΕ Boox II 


BOOK THE THIRD 


CHAPTER I 


PROEM 


have been discussed in priority; because they are operated by 

certain principal and paramount causes, which are, at the same 
time, predominant over particular and minor events applicable only to 
the separate properties and natural peculiarities of individuals. ‘The 
foreknowledge of these particular events is called Genethlialogy, or the 
science of Nativities. 

It must be remembered that the causation, by which all effects, 
whether general or particular, are produced and foreknown, is essentially 
one and the same; for the motions of the planets, and of the Sun and 
Moon, present the operative causation of events which happen to any 
individual, as well as of those which happen generally ; and the fore- 
knowledge of both may be obtained by the several creatures and sub- 
stances, subjected to the influence of the heavenly bodies, and by due 
attention to the changes produced in those natures, by the configura- 
tions displayed in the Ambient by the planetary motion. 

Still, however, the causes of general events are greater and more 
complete than those of particular events; and, although it has been 
now stated, that one single identical power supplies both the causation 
and the foreknowledge of general as well as particular events, yet there 
does not belong to the two sorts of events a similar origin or beginning, 
at which observation of the celestial configurations must be made, for 
prognostication. In regard to general events, the dates of origin and 
commencement are many and various ; for all general events cannot be 
traced to one origin, neither is their origin always considered by means 
of the matter subjected to their operation, for it may be also established 
by circumstances occurring in the Ambient and presenting the causa- 
tion. It may, in fact, almost be said that they all originate in eminent 
eclipses of the Luminaries, and in remarkable transits made by the 
stars, at various times. 

Particular events, however, which concern men individually, may be 
traced to one origin, single as well as manifold. ‘Their origin is single, in 
respect to the primary composition of the nascent man; but it is also 
manifold, in respect to other circumstances subsequently indicated by 
dispositions in the Ambient, correlative to the primary origin. In all 


71 


I: the preceding pages, such events as effect the world generally 


72 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Boox m1. 


particular events, the origin, or birth, of the subjected matter itself, 
must, of course, be the primary origin ; and, in succession thereto, the 
various beginnings of other subsequent circumstances are to be assumed. 
Hence, therefore, at the origin of the subjected matter, all the proper- 
ties and peculiarities of its contemperament must be observed; and 
then the subsequent events, which will happen at certain periods, 
sooner or later, are to be considered by means of the division of time, or 
the scale of the ensuing years.? 


CHAPTER II 


THE CONCEPTION AND THE PARTURITION, OR BIRTH ; BY WHICH LATTER 
EVENT THE ANIMAL QUITS THE WOMB, AND ASSUMES ANOTHER STATE OF 
EXISTENCE 


Tue actual moment, in which human generation commences, is, in 
fact, by nature, the moment of the conception itself; but, in efficacy 
with regard to subsequent events, it is the parturition or birth. 

In every case, however, where the actual time of conception may be 
ascertained, either casually or by observation, it is useful to remark the 
effective influence of the configuration of the stars as it existed at that 
time ; and, from that influence, to infer the future personal peculiari- 
ties of mind and body. For the seed will, at the very first, and at once, 
receive its due quality, as then dispensed by the Ambient; and, al- 
though in subsequent periods its substance is varied by growth and 
conformation, it will still, by the laws of nature, congregate, during its 
growth, only such matter as may be proper to itself, and will become 
more and more imbued with the peculiar property of the first quality 
impressed on it at the time of conception. These precepts must always 
be attended to, when that time can be ascertained. 

But, if the time of conception cannot be precisely made out, that of 
the birth must be received at the original date of generation ; for it is 
virtually the most important, and is in no respect deficient, on com- 
parison with the primary origin by conception, except in one view 
only ; viz. that the origin by conception affords the inference of occur- 
ences which take effect previously to the birth, whereas the origin by 
birth can, of course, be available only for such as arise subsequently. 
And, although the birth should in strictness be called the secondary 
beginning, while the conception might be insisted on as the primary 
beginning, it is still found to be equal to the conception in its efficacy, 
and much more complete, although later in time. For the conception 
may, in fact, be said to be the generation of mere human seed, but the 
birth that of man himself; since the infant at its birth acquires 


1 The Division of Time is subsequently laid down by the author, in the last 
Chapter of the fourth Book. 


CHAP. 1.7 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 73 


numerous qualities which it would not possess while in the womb, 
and which are proper to human nature alone; “ such, for instance, as 
the particular action of the senses and the movement of the body and 
limbs.”’! Besides, even if the position of the Ambient, actually existing 
at the birth, cannot be considered to assist in forming and engendering 
the particular shape and qualities of the infant, it is nevertheless still 
auxiliary to the infant’s entrance into the world: because nature, after 
completing the formation in the womb, always effects the birth in 
immediate obedience to some certain position of the Ambient, corre- 
sponding and sympathising with the primary position which operated 
the incipient formation. It is therefore perfectly admissible, and con- 
sistent with reason, that the configuration of the stars, as it exists at the 
time of birth, although it cannot be said to possess any share of the 
creative cause, should still be considered to act in signification, as fully 
as the configuration at the time of conception; because it has, of 
necessity, a power corresponding to that configuration which actually 
possessed the creative cause. 

In speaking of the practicability of prognostication, in the commence- 
ment of this treatise, the intention of setting forth this part of the sub- 
ject, now under consideration, in a scientific manner, has been already 
notified. The ancient mode of prediction, founded on the commixture 
of all the stars, and abounding in infinite complication and diversity, will 
therefore be passed over ; and, in fact, any attempt to detail it, however 
accurately and minutely made, in conformity to the several precepts 
given in the traditions relating to it, would prove unserviceable and 
unintelligible: it is therefore entirely abandoned. And the doctrine, 
now presented, comprehending every species of event liable to happen, 
and explaining all the effective influences generally exercised by the 
stars, in their separate qualities, over every species of event, shall be 
delivered succinctly, and in agreement with the theory of nature. 

With this view, certain places in the Ambient, regulating the forma- 
tion of all inferences of the events liable to affect mankind, are appointed 
as a kind of mark to which the whole theory of those inferences is applied, 
and to which the operative powers of the stars, when holding familiarity 
with the said places, are in a general manner directed: in the same way 
as, in archery, the arrow is directed to the target. And any event, 
which depends on the compound temperament of many various natures 
and influences together, must be left to the discretion of the artist, who, 
like the skilful archer, must himself judge of the best mode of hitting the 
mark. 

To proceed methodically and in due order, it is proper to commence 
by investigating such general events as are open to consideration, and 
liable to have happened, or to happen, at the actual origin by birth ; 


1 The words, thus marked “ ”, are not in the Greek, but in two Latin 
translations, 


D 


74 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book III. 


since, from that origin, all things necessary to be investigated may be - 


gathered ; as before stated. Yet, if a previous inquiry, by means of 


the primary origin by conception, should nevertheless be desired and _ 
undertaken, such an inquiry may still in some degree assist prognostica- 


tion ; although only in regard to properties and qualities dispensed and 
imbibed at the time of conception. 


CHAPTER III 


THE DEGREE ASCENDING 


Tuere frequently arises some uncertainty as to the precise time of birth, © 


and some apprehensions lest it should not be accurately noted. In most 


cases, the actual minute of the hour, at which the birth happens, can 
only be ascertained by making a scientific observation, at the time, with — 
an horoscopical astrolabe1; for all other instruments, employed in 
ascertaining the hour, are almost fallacious, although used by many 
persons with much care and attention. The clepsydra,? for instance, — 
is subject to error, because the flow of the water will, from various — 
causes, proceed irregularly: and the sundial is often incorrectly placed, — 


and its gnomon often distorted from the true meridian line. ‘To obviate 


the difficulty arising from the inaccuracy of these instruments, it seems _ 


highly necessary to present some method by which the actually ascending 


degree of the zodiac may be easily ascertained, in a natural and consistent — 


manner. 


And in order to attain this essential point, it is necessary first to set 
down the ordinary degree which, by the Doctrine of Ascensions,® 18. 
found near the ascendant at the presumed hour. After this has been 
done, the new or full Moon, whichever it may be, that may take place 


next before the time of parturition, must be observed: and, if a new 


Moon, it will be necessary to mark exactly the degree of the conjunction — 
of the two luminaries ; but, if a full Moon, the degree of luminary only | 
which may be above the earth during the parturition. After this, it | 
must be observed what planets have dominion over the said degree: | 


and their dominion depends always on the five following prerogatives, 
viz. on triplicity, house, exaltation, terms, and phase or configuration® ; 


1 It is, perhaps, needless to remark that modern improvements in science 
have superseded the use of this and other ancient instruments here mentioned. 
2 Although the “ clepsydra,” or water-clock, was commonly used among 
the ancients for various purposes, it appears, from Martian (a Latin writer, 


who lived about a.p. 490), that there was also a clepsydra in special use as δὴ 


astrological engine. 


3“ The Doctrine of Ascensions,” in allusion to the method of calculating 


the actual position of the ecliptic. 


4“ Phase or configuration.” Or, holding some authorized aspect to the | 


degree in question. 


CHAP. Iv.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 75 


that is to say, a planet, eligible to dominion, must be connected with 
the degree in question either by one, or more, or all of these prerog- 
atives. 

If, therefore, there may be found any one planet properly qualified 
in all or most of these prerogatives, the exact degree, which it occupies 
in that sign in which it may be posited during the parturition, is to be 
remarked ; and it is then to be inferred that a degree of the same 
numerical denomination was actually ascending, at the precise time of 
birth, in that sign which appears, by the Doctrine of Ascensions, to be 
nearest to the ascendant.1 

But when two planets, or more, may be equally qualified in the manner 
prescribed, it must be seen which of them may transit, during the par- 
turition, a degree nearest in number to the ordinary degree shown by the 
Doctrine of Ascensions to be then ascending ; and that said degree, 
nearest in number, is to be considered as pointing out the numerical 
denomination of the degree actually ascending. And when the degrees of 
two planets, or more, may closely and equally approximate in numerical 
denomination to the ordinary degree found by the Doctrine of Ascen- 
sions, the degree of that planet which possesses further claims, by con- 
hection with the angles and by its own condition, is to regulate the 
number of the actually ascending degree. 

It must however be observed, that if the actual distance of the degree, 
in which the ruling planet may be posited, from the ordinary degree 
ascending, be found to exceed its distance from the ordinary degree of 
the mid-heaven; the numerical denomination, found in the way 
above-mentioned, is then to be considered as applicable to the actual 
degree in culmination ; and the other angles are to be arranged in con- 
formity therewith.? 


CHAPTER IV 
DISTRIBUTION OF THE DOCTRINE OF NATIVITIES 


Arter due attention to the preceding instructions, the doctrine of 
genethliacal prognostication should be separately and distinctly con- 
sidered, for the sake of order and perspicuity, in its first, second and 
successive divisions or heads of inquiry. It will thus be found to present 
a mode of investigation, at once practicable, competent and agreeable to 
nature. 

One division is applicable only to certain circumstances established 
previously to the birth; as, for instance, to those which concern the 


1 Or, on the ascendant. 

2 The precepts delivered in this Chapter have obtained the name of Ptolemy’s 
Animodar : the term is probably Arabic, if it be not a corruption of the Latin 
words animum, or animam, dare, “ giving animation or life ” ; yet this meaning 
seems scarcely close enough. 


76 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS _ [Book 111. 


parents; another to circumstances, which may be established both 
before and after the birth; as those respecting brothers and sisters ; 
another to circumstances actually occurring at the very time of birth, 
and immediately consequent thereupon: and this head of inquiry 
embraces various points, and is by no means simple: and the last division 
relates to events liable to take place after the birth, at various periods, 
earlier or later ; and it involves a still more diversified theory. 

Thus, the questions to be solved, in regard to the actual circumstances | 
of the birth itself, are, whether the production will be male or female ; 
twins, or even more ; whether it will be monstrous ; and whether it will | 
be reared. 

The questions of the periods subsequent to the birth relate first to. 
the duration of life (which is distinct from the question of rearing), 
then to the shape and figure of the body, to the bodily affections, and 
to injuries or defects in the members. After these, further inquiry is 
instituted as to the quality of the mind, and the mental affections ;_ 
then, as to fortune, in regard to rank and honours as well as wealth. 
In succession to these, the character of the employment or profession 18. 
sought out ; then, the questions relative to marriage and offspring, and 
to consentaneous friendship, are to be considered ; then, that concerning - 
travel ; and, lastly, that concerning the kind of death which awaits the 
native. The question of death, although depending, in fact, upon the 
same influence as the question of the duration of life, seems yet to find 
its proper situation in being placed last in the series. 

On each of the foregoing points of inquiry, the doctrine and precepts 
to be followed shall be thoroughly and succinctly detailed; but all 
idle conceits, promulgated by many persons without any foundation 
capable of sustaining the test of reason, shall be utterly avoided, in defer- 
ence to the only true agency, which is derived from primal Nature 
herself. It is only upon clearly effective influences that this treatise is 
established : and all matters, which are open to an authorized mode of 
inquiry by means of the theory of the stars, and their positions and _ 
aspects with regard to appropriate places, shall be fully discussed here 5 
but the divination by lots and numbers, unregulated by any systematic _ 
causation, must remain unnoticed. 

The brief remarks, immediately following, are applicable to all cases, | 
generally, and are now at once stated, to avoid the repetition of them 
under each particular division or head of inquiry. | 

Firstly, notice must be taken of that place in the zodiac which corre- 
sponds, according to the scheme of the nativity with the particular 
division of inquiry ; for example, the place of the mid-heaven is adapted 
to questions comprised under the head of employment or profession ; | 
and the Sun’s place to those relative to the concerns of the father. 

Secondly, after the proper place has thus been duly ascertained, the 
planets holding right of dominion there, by any of the five prerogatives. 
hereinbefore mentioned, are to be observed; and, if any one planet be 


cuar. v.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS ny 


found to be lord by all these prerogatives, that planet must be admitted 
as the ruler of the event liable to happen under that particular head of 
inquiry. If, however, two or three planets hold dominion, that one 
among them, which may have most claims to the place in question, must 
be selected as the ruler. 

Thirdly, the natures of the ruling planet and of the signs, in which 
itself and the place which it thus controls may severally be situated, are 
to be considered as indicating the quality of the event. 

Fourthly, the proportionate vigour and strength, or weakness, with 
which the dominion is exercised, as exhibited either by the actual 
cosmical position of the ruling planet, or by its position in the scheme 
of the nativity, will point out to what extent and with what force the 
event will operate. And a planet is found to be cosmically powerful 
when in one of its own places,! or when oriental, or swift in course ; and 
it is strong in the scheme of the nativity, when transiting an angle or 
succedent house; especially those of the ascendant, or of the mid- 
heaven. But it is cosmically weaker, when not in one of its own places ; 
or when occidental, or retarded in its course; and in respect to the 
scheme of the nativity, it is weak when cadent from the angles. 

Lastly ; the general time, about which the event will take place, is 
to be inferred from the ruling planet’s matutine or vespertine position, 
in regard to the Sun and the ascendant, and from the circumstance of its 
being situated in an angle, or a succedent house. As, if it be matutine, 
or in an angle, its influence operates earlier and more promptly ; but, 
if vespertine or in a succedent house, later and more tardily. And, in 
reference to this point, the quadrant which precedes the Sun, and that 
which precedes the ascendant, together with the quadrants opposite to 
these, are oriental and matutine ; and the other quadrants, following the 
former, are occidental and vespertine. 


\ 


CHAPTER V 
THE PARENTS 


ὌΝΡΕΚ each head of inquiry, the proposed investigation must be entered 
upon in the manner mentioned in the preceding chapter: and, to 
proceed in due order, the circumstances relating to the parents require 
to be first disposed of. 

In conformity with nature, the Sun and Saturn are allotted to the 
person of the father ; and the Moon and Venus to that of the mother: 
and the mode in which these luminaries and planets may be found 
posited, with reference to each other, as well as to other planets and 
stars, will intimate the situation of affairs affecting the parents. 

Thus, for example, the degree of their fortune and wealth will be 


1 In House, Triplicity, Exaltation, Term or Face. 


78 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Ill. 


indicated by the doryphory,! or attendants of the luminaries. If the 
luminaries be accompanied (either in the same signs in which themselves 
are placed, or in the signs next following), by the benefics, and by such 
stars or planets as are of the same tendency as themselves, a conspicuous 
and brilliant fortune is presaged : especially, should the Sun be attended 
by matutine stars, and the Moon by vespertine,? and these stars be also 
well established in the prerogatives before mentioned. Likewise, if 
Saturn or Venus be matutine, and in proper face,® or in an angle, it 
foreshows the prosperity of either parent respectively, according to the 
scheme.? If, however, the luminaries hold no connection with the 
planets, and be unattended by any doryphory, the adverse fortunes of the 
parents, their humble state and obscurity, and then denoted ; especially, 
if Saturn and Venus may not be favourably constituted. The parents 
are also subjected to a state of vicissitude, never rising above mediocrity, 
when the luminaries may have a doryphory of a condition or tendency 
foreign to their own: as, for instance, when Mars may ascend near in 
succession to the Sun, or Saturn to the Moon; or if the benefics be 
found constituted unfavourably, and not in conformity with their 
own natural condition and tendency. But should the part of fortune, 
as shown by the scheme of the nativity, be found in a favourable position, 
and in consonance with the doryphory of the Sun and Moon, the estate 
of the parents will then remain steady and secure. If, however, the 
position be discordant and adverse, or if the malefics compose the dory- 
phory, the parents’ estate will be unproductive and even burthensome. 

The probable duration of the lives of the parents is to be inferred by 
means of other configurations. And, in the case of the father, a long 
life is presaged, if Jupiter, or Venus, be in any mode whatever configur- 
ated with either the Sun, or Saturn ; or, also, if Saturn himself make an 
harmonious configuration with the Sun; (that is to say, either by the 
conjunction, the sextile, or the trine) ; provided such configuration be 
fully and strongly established and confirmed :* and, when not so estab- 
lished and confirmed, although it does not actually denote a short life, 
yet it will not then equally presage a long life. 


1 Aopudopia’ This word has been heretofore rendered “ satellitiwm ” and 


ἐς satellites,” but, as these terms do not seem sufficiently precise in their meaning, © 


and are already in use to signify the minor orbs which revolve round a principal 
planet, I have ventured to anglicize the Greek word ; the usual signification 
of which is a “ bodyguard.” 

2 Or, in other words, “ should the stars, which attend the Sun, be such as 
rise before him ; and those, which attend the Moon, such as rise after her.” 

3 As described in Chap. XXVI, Book I. 

4 Saturn being applicable to the father, and Venus to the mother. 

5 The Perugio Latin translation, of 1646, inserts here, “ and provided 
Saturn and the Sun are not impeded by being posited in unfortunate or 
unsuitable places.” 


CHAP. V. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 79 


If however the planets be not posited in the manner just described ; 
and if Mars be elevated above, or ascend in succession to the Sun, or 
to Saturn; or, even, should Saturn himself not be in consonance with 
the Sun, but configurated with it by the quartile or opposition, and if, 
when thus circumstanced, both he and the Sun should be posited in 
cadent houses, it is then indicated that the father is liable to infirmities ; 
but, if in angles or succedent houses, the father will live only a short 
life, and suffer from various bodily injuries and diseases. ‘The shortness 
of his life is particularly intimated by the position of the Sun and Saturn 
in the first two angles, viz. the ascendant and the mid-heaven, or in their 
succedent houses ; and his affliction by diseases and injuries, when they 
may be posited in the two other angles, the western and the lower 
heaven, or in the houses succedent thereto. And, if Mars be aspected to 
the Sun in the way before-mentioned, the father will die suddenly, or 
receive injury in his face or eyes; but, should Mars be so aspected to 
Saturn, he will be afflicted with contractions of the muscles or limbs, and 
with fevers and disorders proceeding from inflammation and wounds ; 
or even death may be the consequence. And even Saturn himself, if 
badly configurated with the Sun, will also inflict disease and death on 
the father, by inducing such particular disorders as are incidental from 
watery humour. 

The foregoing observations are applicable to the father, and those 
which follow must be attended to in the case of the mother. 

Should the Sun be configurated, in any mode whatever, with the 
Moon or Venus, or, should Venus herself be harmoniously configurated 
with the Moon, either by the sextile, the trine, or the conjunction, the 
mother will live long. 

If, however, Mars be succedent to the Moon and Venus, or in quartile 
or opposition to them, or, if Saturn be similarly aspected to the Moon 
only, and both of them be void of course or retrograde, or cadent, 


1“ Elevated.’ Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary gives the following 
definition of this astrological term. ‘‘ Elevated. A certain pre-eminence of one 
planet above another ; or, a concurrence of two to a certain act, wherein one 
being stronger, is carried above the weaker, and does alter and depress its 
nature and influence: But wherein this being elevated consists, there are several 
opinions ; some say when a planet is nearest the zenith, or meridian ; others 
will have it only that planet is highest ; or nearest to the Apogzon of his eccen- 
tric or epicycle. And Argol admits of all these, and several other advantages, 
and thence advises to collect the several testimonies, and that that planet, who 
has most, shall be said to be elevated above the other.”” According to Whalley, 
Cardan’s opinion was that “ that planet is most elevated which is more occidental 
and ponderous.” For myself, I conceive this opinion to be inaccurate, because, 
if Ptolemy meant to signify only the greater occidentality of the planet, he 
would (as in other instances) have used the word “ preceding” instead of 
“elevated above”; and I incline to think, that greater proximity to the zenith 
is the truer, as well as more simple, meaning of the term “ elevated.” 


80 _ PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK III. 


adverse accidents and disease will attend the mother ; should they, on 
the other hand, be swift in motion and placed in angles, they portend 
that her life will be short, or grievously afflicted. Their position in the 
oriental angles, or succedent houses, particularly denotes the shortness 
of her life ; and, in those which are occidental, her affliction. In the 
same manner, should Mars be thus aspected to the Moon (and should 
that luminary at the same time be oriental), the mother’s sudden death, 
or some injury in her face or eyes, will be produced: and, if the Moon 
be then occidental, death will be occasioned by miscarriage in parturi- 
tion, by inflammation, or by wounds. Such are the effects which ensue 
from these aspects made by Mars to the Moon; but, should he make 
them to Venus, death will then take place from fever, some latent 
disease, or sudden sickness. Saturn’s aspect! to the Moon, when she is 
oriental, inflicts on the mother disease and death from extreme colds, 
or fevers; but, should the Moon be occidental, the danger arises from 
affections of the womb, or from consumption. 

In the investigation of all these circumstances, it is highly essential 
that the properties of the signs, in which are situated the stars actuating 
the influence, should be also taken into consideration; and that, by 
day, the Sun and Venus should be principally observed ; and by night, 
Saturn and the Moon. 

If, however, after due attention has been paid to the foregoing 
points, a more specific inquiry still be demanded, it will then become 
necessary to assume the place allotted to the naternal or maternal 
condition, as the case may be, for an horoscope or ascendant, in order 
to pursue the investigation.2, And by this means, which in this respect 
will answer the purpose of a nativity, all other particulars concerning 
the parents may be viewed succinctly ; according to the general forms 
hereinafter given, as adapted for practice and applicable to all events. 

In these and in all other cases, the mode, in which the influences are 
commixed, must be carefully kept in view; and it must be observed 
whether any particular stars possess, in themselves alone, the operative 
cause, or whether others share dominion with them ; and it is then to 
be seen which among them all are more powerful, and which of them 
take the lead in establishing the event: so that due inference may be 


1 By the quartile or opposition, as before mentioned. 

2 On this passage, Whalley remarks that “‘ Ptolemy teacheth, from the 
child’s nativity, to erect schemes for the father and mother, and thence to 
give judgment, as if it were their proper nativities; the rule is this: If the 
nativity be diurnal, for the father, observe the degree the Sun is in, in the 
child’s nativity; and make that the degree ascending for the father; and 
conformable to that, order the cusps of all the other houses. If for the mother, 
use Venus. But if the nativity be nocturnal, for the father, take the place 
of Saturn ; and for the mother, that of the Moon.” Whalley adds, that what 
in this chapter hath relation to the parents, is what shall happen to them after 
the nativity, and not before.” 


CHAP. VI. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 81 


‘ 


drawn agreeably to their several natures. And should the several stars, 
which may happen to be combined in dominion, be also equal in power, 
the diversity of their several natures, and the admixture of qualities 
thence arising, must then be taken into consideration ; and, by fairly 
weighing this various admixture, the nature and quality of the future 
event may be apprehended. 

Stars, posited separately or at a distance from each other, distribute, 
at their appropriate times and periods, the events operated by each : 
thus the earlier events are brought about by stars which are more 
oriental than others, and the latter events by those which are more 
occidental. For it is indispensably requisite that the star, under the 
influence of which some particular event is expected to happen, should 
be originally+ connected with the place to which the inquiry, concern- 
ing that event, is allotted; and, if such connection should not have 
existed, no effect of any importance an possibly be produced; because 
a star does not exercise a vigorous influence, unless it was fully in 
communication at the beginning. But, however, the time, at which 
the effect will take place, is further regulated by the relative distance 
of the star, governing the effect, from the Sun and the angles of the 
world, as well as by its primary position of dominion. 


CHAPTER VI 
BROTHERS AND SISTERS 


Unper this head of inquiry, a general and cursory investigation, only, 
can be performed ; and an attempt to dive into minute particulars 
would be fruitless, and would prove to be merely a vain search after 
things not open to‘discovery.? 

The place, whence inferences are drawn respecting brothers and 
sisters, is to be considered as being applicable only to children of the 
same mother, and it is consequently, agreeably to nature, presumed to 
be the same as the maternal place; viz. the sign occupying the mid- 
heaven; or, by day, that which contains Venus, and, by night, the 
Moon. This sign and its succedent are considered as indicative of the 
mother and her children, and the same place is therefore properly 
allotted to brothers and sisters. 

Hence, provided this place be configurated with the benefics, there 


1 Or, at the actual time of nativity. 

2 In spite of this declaration of the author, it seems, by Whalley’s note on 
this chapter, that Cardan maintained that the particular circumstances, liable 
to affect the brothers and sisters, might be inferred by adopting, as an ascendant, 
the degree of the planet holding chief dominion over the place of brethren, 
and erecting a scheme thereby ; in a mode similar to that allowed by Ptolemy 
in the case of the parents. 


Ὁ * 


82 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


will be several brothers and sisters: the number of them depending ~ 
upon the number and positions of such benefic stars, whether in 
bicorporeal signs, or in signs of single form. 

If, however, the malefics should be in elevation over this place, or be 
hostilely situated in opposition thereto, the brothers and sisters will 
then be few in number ; and this fewness especially follows when the 
malefics may surround the Sun. Should the hostile configuration be 
presented from the other angles,+ and, particularly, if from the ascend- 
ant, Saturn will then represent the elder born ; and Mars, by inflicting 
death, will diminish the total number of brothers and sisters.? 

Again, should the stars, which promise brethren, be favourably 
circumstanced as to their cosmical position, the brethren will be 
eminent and illustrious; but humble and obscure, if the cosmical 
position be of an adverse nature. If, also, the malefic stars should be in 
elevation over those which give brethren, the life of the brethren will 
then be only of short duration. ; 

Stars, constituted masculinely, represent brothers ; those femininely, 
sisters. ‘The more oriental stars likewise represent the elder born; and — 
those which are more occidental, the younger. 

Moreover, should the stars, which give brethren, be harmoniously 
configurated with that one which has dominion of the sign allotted to 
brethren, the brethren will be mutually friendly and affectionate ; and, 
if an harmonious configuration be also extended, by the same planets, 
to the part of fortune, the brethren will live together in communion. 
But, if the stars, which give brethren, should, on the contrary, be in 
situations unconnected with each other, or be in opposition, the brethren 
will then live at variance, mutually practising enmity and fraud. | 


CHAPTER VII 
MALE OR FEMALE 


Arter the indications which regard brothers and sisters have been 
investigated by the foregoing rules, consonant with nature and reason, 
the actual native, or the person to whom the scheme of nativity 
is specially appropriated, demands attention; and the first and 
most obvious inquiry is whether the said native will be male or 
female. ᾿ 

The consideration of this question rests not on a single basis, nor 


1 That is to say, from the angles in quartile (and therefore hostile also) to 
the mid-heaven. δὰ 
2 The text does not show whether it be necessary that Saturn and Mars iy 
should both be in the ascendant, in order to produce the effect described ; nor " 
whether the same effect EY not follow, if one of them should be in τὰς 
ascendant, and the other in the occidental angle, or even in some other position, 


i 


CHAP. VIII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 83 


can it be pursued in one sole direction only: it depends, on the con- 
trary, upon the several situations of the two luminaries and the ascend- 
ant, and upon such planets as possess any prerogatives in the places of 
those situations; and all these circumstances should be specially 
observed at the time of conception, and, in a general manner also, at 
that of birth. 

Observation of the said three places, and of the mode in which the 
planets ruling them may be constituted, is wholly indispensable: it 
must be seen whether all, or most of them, may be constituted mascu- 
linely or femininely ; and prediction must, of course, be regulated in 
conformity with their disposition, so observed; as tending to produce 
a male or female birth. 

The masculine or feminine nature of the stars is to be distinguished 
in the manner already pointed out in the commencement of this 
treatise. For instance, by the nature of the signs in which they are 
situated, by their relative position to each other, and also by their 
position towards the earth ; as when in the east, they are masculinely 
disposed, and, when in the west, femininely. Their relative position to 
the Sun also affords guidance in distinguishing them ; since, if they 
should be matutine, they are considered to signify the male gender ; 
and if vespertine, the female. Thus, from the sex chiefly prevalent, 
as observed by these rules, that of the native may be rationally inferred. 


CHAPTER VIII 
TWINS 


Wiru respect to the probability of the birth of twins, or a greater 
number at once, the same places must be observed, as those mentioned 
in the preceding chapter ; that is to say, the places of both luminaries 
and the ascendant. 

When two, or all three, of the said places may be situated in bicor- 
poreal signs, births of this kind will occur, in consequence of the com- 
bination which then arises ; especially, provided all the planets, which 
control those places, should also be similarly circumstanced: or 
although only some of them be posited in bicorporeal signs, while the 
rest may be placed by two or more together. Because even more than 
twins will be born, in a case wherein all the ruling places may be in 
bicorporeal signs, most of the planets being, at the same time, posited 
in the same way, and configurated with them. The number of children, 
however, to be produced at the birth, is to be inferred from the planet 
which exercises the right of determining the number?: and the sex or 


1 Vide Chapter VI, Book I. 
2 The planet here alluded to, seems to be that which may be connected 
with most of the ruling places. 


84 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book III. 


sexes are to be predicted by means of the planets in configuration with 
the Sun, Moon, and ascendant. 

And, should the position of the heavens be arranged so that the 
angle of the mid-heaven, and not that of the ascendant, may be con- 
nected with the luminaries, there will, in that case, be produced, 
almost always, twins ; and sometimes even more. 

To speak, however, more particularly, three males will be born, as in 
the nativity of the Anactores,1 when Saturn, Jupiter, and Mars may be 
configurated with the places before appointed, in bicorporeal signs ; 
and three females, as in the nativity of the Graces, when Venus and the 
Moon, with Mercury femininely constituted, may be configurated in 
likemanner. When Saturn, Jupiter, and Venus may be configurated, two 
males and one female will be born; as in the nativity of the Dioscuri?; 
and, when Venus, the Moon, and Mars may be so configurated, two 
females and one male; as in the nativity of Ceres, Core, and Liber. 

In cases of this kind, however, it most usually happens that the con- 
ception has not been complete, and that the children are born with 
some remarkable imperfections or deformities. And, in some instances, 
owing to a certain concurrence of events, these numerous productions 
are quite extraordinary and amazing. 


11 have looked in many other books for this word “ Anactores” (plural 
of avaxrwp), as designating three particular individuals born at the same birth ; 
for which signification it is here used by Ptolemy ; but my search has been in ~ 
vain. Cicero has, however, written a passage, in which a word, very nearly 
resembling it, occurs, and which would seem to relate to the very persons 
alluded to by Ptolemy : viz. “The godship of the Dioscuri was established in 
various modes among the Greeks, and applied to various persons. One set 
consisted of three persons, who were styled at Athens the Anactes, and were 
the sons of Jupiter, the most ancient king, and Proserpine ; their several names 
were Tritopatreus, Eubuleus and Dionysius.” De Nat. Deor., lib. 3, cap. 21. 

2 This is the second set of the Dioscuri, as stated by Cicero: they were 
the children of the third, or Cretan Jupiter (the son of Saturn) and Leda ; 
their names were Castor, Pollux, and Helena. Helena, however, is not mentioned 
by Cicero. 

3 Core is a name of Proserpine; Liber, of Bacchus. And, although the 
mention here made of Ceres, Proserpine and Bacchus, as being the offspring 
of one and the same birth, does not accord with the usual notion of the genealogy 
of these divinities, it seems that Ptolemy did not so represent them without 
some reason. For, in cap. 24, lib. 2, De Nat. Deor., Cicero speaks of Liber as 
having been deified conjointly with Ceres and Libera (another name of Pro- 
serpine) ; and adds, that “it may be understood, from the rites and mysteries 
of the worship, how the deification took place.” It appears also, by Davies’s 
notes on Cicero, that Livy and Tacitus both speak of the copartnership in 
divinity exercised by Liber, Libera and Ceres. There is not, however, any 
occasion at present to dive deeper into the question of the generation of these 
deities ; for our author has advertised to them only to point out that so many 
males or females will be produced at one birth, under certain configurations 
of the stars. 


CHAP. IX.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 85 


CHAPTER IX 
MONSTROUS OR DEFECTIVE BIRTHS 


Tue same places, as those pointed out in the two chapters last preceding, 
are again to be considered, in inquiring into the probability of a mon- 
strous or defective birth. For it will be found that, at a birth of this 
description, the luminaries are either cadent from the ascendant, or 
else not in any manner configurated with it; while, at the same time, 
the angles! are occupied by the malefics. 

It therefore becomes necessary, when such a position of the heavens 
may occur at the time of birth, to observe forthwith the preceding new 
or full Moon? and its ruler; as well as the rulers of the luminaries at 
the said time of birth. For, if all the places, in which the rulers of the 
luminaries, and in which the Moon herself and Mercury may be situated, 
at the birth, or, if most of those places should be totally inconjunct and 
unconnected with the places of the said preceding new or full Moon and 
its ruler, the birth will then be monstrous. And if it should be further 
found, in addition to this absence of connection, that the luminaries may 
be also posited in quadrupedal or bestial signs, and the two malefics in 
angles, the birth will in that case not behuman. And should the lumin- 
aries, when so circumstanced, be not at all supported by any benefic 
planet, but only by malefics, the creature born will be wholly indocile, 
wild, and of evil nature: if, however, they should receive support from 
Jupiter or Venus, the offspring will then be like that of dogs or cats, or 
other creatures held in religious veneration and used in worship? : but, 
if Mercury support the luminaries, it will resemble that of fowls, oxen, or 
swine, or, of other animals adapted to the service of mankind. 

When the luminaries may be in signs of human shape, while other 
circumstances in the scheme of the nativity may exist as before de- 
scribed, the creature born will then be human, or will partake of 
human nature, although it will still be defective in some peculiar 
quality. And, in order to ascertain the nature of that defect, the shape 
and form of the signs found on the angles occupied by the malefics, as 
well as of those wherein the luminaries are situated, must be taken into 
consideration: and, if in this instance also, no benefic planet should 
lend support to any one of the prescribed places, the offspring produced 
will be utterly void of reason, and indeed indefinable.* If, however, it 
should happen, that Jupiter or Venus give support, the defect will be 


1 Whalley says here, “ chiefly the ascendant and mid-heaven.” 

2 Whichever might have been nearer in time. 

* It is perhaps superfluous to mention that the two kinds of animals here 
named (as well as many others) were venerated by the Agyptians. 

4 The Greek says “ enigmatical.” 


86 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book II. 


veiled by a specious outward appearance, similar to that of herma- 
phrodites, and of those persons called Harpocratiaci,! or others of like 
imperfections. And should Mercury also give support, in addition to 
that of Jupiter or Venus, the offspring will then become an interpreter 
of oracles and divinations; but, if Mercury support alone, it will be 
deaf and dumb,? although clever and ingenious in its intellect. 


CHAPTER X 
CHILDREN NOT REARED 


THE question which now remains to be considered, in order to complete 
the investigation of circumstances taking place simultaneously with the 
nativity, or immediately consequent thereon, is, whether the child, 
then born, will or will not be reared. 

This inquiry is to be handled distinctly from that regarding the 
duration of life, although there is an apparent connection between 
them. The questions themselves are, indeed, similar; for it is much 
the same thing to inquire whether the child will be nurtured, or how 
long it will live ; and the only distinction, between these two questions, 
arises from the different modes in which they are treated. For in- 
stance, the inquiry into the duration of life is to be pursued only in 
cases wherein there is allotted to the native some space of time, not less 
in duration than a solar period; that is tosay, ayear. Therefore, since 
time is also measured by smaller portions, such as months, days, and 
hours, and since the question, whether the native will or will not be 
reared, belongs to cases wherein some exuberance of evil influence 
threatens speedy destruction, and where life is not likely to endure 
throughout a whole year, the inquiry into the duration of life must 
consequently involve a more multifarious consideration, than that 
which relates to rearing ; which may be at once disposed of, in a more 
general and summary manner. 

Thus, if either of the two luminaries be in an angle, and one of the 
malefics be either in conjunction with that luminary, or else distant in 
longitude from each luminary, in an exactly equal space ; so as to form 
the point of junction of two equal sides of a triangle, of which sides the 
two luminaries form the extremities, while, at the same time, no 
benefic star may partake in the configuration, and while the rulers of the 


1 One Latin translation has rendered this word ‘““stammerers ἢ; and, as” 
Harpocrates was the god of silence, Ptolemy has probably used the epithet 
to signify defect of speech. | 

2 “Dumb.” The Greek is odovtwy esepypevov, “deprived of teeth,” and 
Allatius has so translated it: but other translations render these words by 
dumb, which, considering the nature of Mercury, seems their preferable 
signification. 


CHAP. X. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 87 


luminaries may be also posited in places belonging to, or controlled by, 
the malefics ; the child, then born, will not be susceptible of nurture, 
but will immediately perish. 

Should the configuration, made between the malefic planet and the 
luminaries, not exist precisely in the mode just mentioned ; that is to 
say, should the said planet not be equally distant from both luminaries, 
so as to form the point of junction of two equal sides of a traingle ; 
yet should it then happen that the rays of two malefics may nearly 
approach the places of the two luminaries, casting an injurious influence 
either on both, or only one of them, and if both the said malefics be 
together succedent, or in opposition, to the luminaries, or if one of 
them be succedent, and the other in opposition, or even if only one 
may particularly afflict one of the luminaries, then, in any such case, no 
duration of life will be allotted to the child: for the supremacy of the 
power of the malefics extinguishes the influence favourable to human 
nature, and tending to prolong existence. 

Mars is exceedingly pernicious when succedent to the Sun, and 
Saturn when succedent to the Moon. But a converse effect takes place 
when either of these planets may be in opposition to the Sun or Moon, 
or in elevation above them ; for the Sun will then be afflicted by Saturn, 
and the Moon by Mars; and especially so, provided the said planets 
should have local prerogatives in the signs containing the luminaries, or 
_ in the sign on the ascendant. And, should a double opposition exist, by 
the circumstance of the luminaries being placed in two opposite angles, 
and by the two malefics being each so posited as to be equally distant 
from each luminary, the child will be born almost, if not quite, dead. 
Nevertheless, if the luminaries should be separating from, or be other- 
wise configurated with benefic planets, whose rays may be projected to 
parts preceding the said luminaries, the child will then live as many days, 
or hours, as there are degrees, numbered between the prorogator! and 
the nearest malefic. 

If malefics should cast their rays to parts preceding the luminaries, 
and benefics to parts following them, the child will be abandoned 
at its birth; but will afterwards meet with adoption, and will live. 
Yet, if the malefics should be in elevation above those benefics 
which are thus configurated, the child, so adopted, will lead a life 
of misery and servitude: if, on the contrary, the benefics should be 
in elevation, then whoever may adopt the deserted child will supply 
the place of its parents. And, provided a benefic planet should either 
ascend with, or near in succession to the Moon, or be applying to her, 


1 A prorogator is either a luminary, planet, or a certain degree of the zodiac, 
which determines the duration of life, or the time of the accomplishment of 
any event: it is hereafter fully treated of in the 13th Chapter of this Book ; 
which shows that, in the instance now mentioned, it would be a luminary, 
either in the ascendant, or in the mid-heaven. 


88 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [ΒΟΟΚ III. 


and one of the malefics be occidental, the child’s own parents will, in 
that case, take it again under their protection. 

Rules similar to the foregoing are to be observed, when more than 
one child is born; for, if any one of those planets, which may be con- 
figurated towards the production of two, or even more children, should 
be under the west, the children will be born half dead, or deformed, and 
imperfect in body. And, if the planet so situated should also be beneath 
the malefics, the children will not be susceptible of nurture, or their life 
will be of the shortest span. 


CHAPTER XI 
THE DURATION OF LIFE 


Or all events whatsoever, which take place after birth, the most essential 
is the continuance of life: and as it is, of course, useless to consider, 
sn cases wherein the life of a child does not extend to the period of one 
year, what other events contingent on its birth might otherwise have 
subsequently happened, the inquiry into the duration of life conse- 
quently takes precedence of all other questions, as to the events sub- 
sequent to the birth. 

The discussion of this inquiry is by no means simple, nor easy of 
execution ; it is conducted in a diversified process, by means of the 
governance of the ruling places. And the method now about to be laid 
down seems, of all others, the most consonant with reason, and with 
nature: because the influence of the prorogatory places, as well as of 
the rulers of those places, and the disposal of the anzretic? places or 
stars, perform the whole operation of regulating the duration of life. 
Fach of these influences is to be distinguished in the mode pointed out 
in the chapters immediately ensuing. 


CHAPTER XII 
THE PROROGATORY PLACES 


Firstiy, those places, only, are to be deemed prorogatory, to which the 
future assumption of the dominion of prorogation exclusively belongs. 
These several places are the sign on the angle of the ascendant, from the 
fifth degree above the horizon, to the twenty-fifth degree below it's 
the thirty degrees in dexter sextile thereto, constituting the eleventh 
house, called the Good Demon; also the thirty degrees in dexter 
quartile, forming the mid-heaven above the earth; those in dexter 


1 The epithet aneretic is a term of art, adopted from the Greek, signifying 
fatal, or destructive. 


CHAP. XIII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 89 


trine making the ninth house, called God ; and lastly, those in opposi- 
tion, belonging to the angle of the west. 

Secondly, among these places, the degrees which constitute the mid- 
heaven are entitled to preference, as being of a more potent and para- 
mount influence: the degrees in the ascendant are next in virtue; 
then the degrees in the eleventh house succedent to the mid-heaven ; 
then those in the angle of the west; and, lastly, those in the ninth 
house, which precedes the mid-heaven. 

No degrees under the earth are, in any manner, eligible to the 
dominion now in question ; except such only as enter into light actually 
above the succedent, or, in other words, with the ascendant. And any 
sign, although it may be above the earth, is still incompetent to 
partake in this dominion, if it be inconjunct with the ascendant : 
hence the sign which precedes the ascendant, and constitutes the 
twelfth house (called that of the Evil Demon), is incompetent ; and 
not only for the above reason, but also because it is cadent, and 
because the beams cast by the stars posited therein, towards the earth, 
are impaired by the thick and dark exhalations arising from the earth’s 
vapours, which produce an unnatural colour and magnitude in the 
appearance of stars so posited, confusing, and in some measure 
annihilating, their beams. 

Thus far with regard to the places of prorogation. 


CHAPTER XIII 
THE NUMBER OF PROROGATORS, AND ALSO THE PART OF FORTUNE 


AFTER due attention has been given to the instructions in the preceding 
chapter, the Sun, the Moon, the Ascendant, and the part of Fortune, 
are to be considered as the four principally liable to be elected to the 
office of prorogator ; and their positions, together with those of such 
planets as rule in the places of their positions, are to be observed. 

The part of Fortune is ascertained by computing the number of 
degrees between the Sun and the Moon; and it is placed at an equal 
number of degrees distant from the ascendant, in the order of the signs. 
It is in all cases, both by night and day, to be so computed and set 
down, that the Moon may hold with it the same relation as that which 
the Sun may hold with the ascendant ; and it thus becomes, as it were, 
a lunar horoscope or ascendant. 


1 The Latin translation, printed at Perugio in 1646, has here the following 
passage in addition: ‘‘ But it must be seen which luminary may follow the 
other in the succession of the signs; for if the Moon should so follow the Sun, 
the part of Fortune is also to be numbered from the horoscope or ascendant, 
according to the succession of the signs. But if the Moon precede the Sun, the 


go PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book II. 


Among the candidates for prorogation, as beforementioned, by day 
the Sun is to be preferred, provided he be situated in a prorogatory 
_ place; and, if not, the Moon; but if the Moon, also, should not be so 
situated, then that planet is to be elected which may have most claims 
to dominion, in reference to the Sun, the antecedent new Moon, and 
the ascendant ; that is to say, when such planet may be found to have 
dominion over any one of the places where these are situated, by at 
least three prorogatives, if not more; the whole number being five. 
If, however, no planet should be found so circumstanced, the Ascendant 
is then to be taken. 


part of Fortune must be numbered from the ascendant, contrary to the succession 
of the signs.” 

There is a long dissertation on the part of Fortune, in Cooper’s Placidus, 
from pp. 308 to 318; and, among the directions there given for computing 
its situation, the following seem the most accurate and simple: viz. “ In the 
diurnal geniture, the Sun’s true distance from the east is to be added to the 
Moon’s right ascension, and in the nocturnal, subtracted; for the number 
thence arising will be the place and right ascension of the part of Fortune: 
and it always has the same declination with the Moon, both in number and 
name, wherever it is found. Again, let the Sun’s oblique ascension, taken in 
the ascendant, be subtracted always from the oblique ascendant of the ascendant, 
as well in the day as in the night, and the remaining difference be added to the 
Moon’s right ascension; the sum will be the right ascension of the part of 
Fortune, which will have the Moon’s declination.” It is shown also by this 
dissertation, that the situation of the part of Fortune must be necessarily 
confined to the lunar parallels ; that it can but rarely be in the ecliptic; and 
that its latitude is ever varying. Cooper also adds, from Cardan’s Commentaries 
on the Tetrabiblos, that “if the Moon is going from the conjunction to the 
opposition of the Sun, then the Moon follows the Sun, and the part of Fortune 
is always under the Earth, from the ascendant ; but if the Moon has passed 
the opposition, she goes before the Sun, and the part of Fortune is before the 
ascendant, and always above the earth.” ‘This remark of Cardan’s is, in effect, 
exactly equivalent to what is stated in the additional passage inserted in the 
Perugio Latin translation, and given above. 

In the Primum Mobile of Placidus (Cooper’s translation, p. 45), the follow- 
ing remark and example are given: “The part of Fortune is placed according 
to the Moon’s distance from the Sun; and you must observe what rays the 
Moon has to the Sun, for the latter ought to have the same, and with the same 
excess or deficiency, as the part of Fortune to the horoscope. As the Moon 
is to the Sun, so is the part of Fortune to the horoscope ; and as the Sun is to 
the horoscope, so is the Moon to the part of Fortune. So, in the nativity of 
Charles V, the Moon applies to the ultimate sextile of the Sun, but with a 
deficiency of 7° 45’: I subtract the 7° 45’ from 5° 34’ of Scorpio, the 
ultimate sextile to the horoscope, and the part of Fortune is placed in 28° 9’ 
of Libra. N.B.—In this nativity, according to Placidus, the Sun is in the 
second house, in 14° 30’ of Pisces: the Moon in the ascendant, in 6° 45’ of 
Capricorn ; the ascendant is 5° 34’ of Capricorn; and the part Fortune is in 
the ninth house, in 28° 9 of Libra. 


CHAP. XIV. ] PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS gI 


By night, the Moon is to be elected as prorogator, provided, in like 
manner, she should be in some prorogatory place; and if she be not, 
the Sun: if he also be not in any prorogatory place, then that planet 
which may have most rights of dominion in reference to the Moon,! and 
the antecedent full Moon and the part of Fortune. But, if there be no 
_ planet claiming dominion in the mode prescribed, the Ascendant must 
be taken, in case a new Moon had last preceded the birth ; but, if a full 
Moon, the part of Fortune. 

If the two luminaries, and also some ruling planet of appropriate 
condition, should be each posited in a prorogatory place, then, pro- 
vided one luminary may be found to occupy some place more important 
and influential than the others, that luminary must be chosen; but 
should the ruling planet occupy the stronger place, and have proro- 
gatives of dominion suitable to the conditions of both luminaries, the 
planet must then be preferred to either of them.? 


CHAPTER XIV 
NUMBER OF THE MODES OF PROROGATION 


Wuen the prorogator has been determined as above directed, it is also 
necessary to take into consideration the two modes of prorogation ; one 
into succeeding signs, under the projection of rays, as it is called; and, 
when the prorogator may be in an oriental place, that is to say, in any 
place between the mid-heaven and the ascendant, this mode only is to 
be used. The other mode extends into signs preceding the prorogator, 
according to what is called horary proportion’; and, in cases when the 
prorogator may be situated in any place receding from the mid-heaven, 
or, in other words, between the mid-heaven and the angle of the west, 
both modes of prorogation are to be adopted. 

It is next to be observed, that certain degrees are aneretic; though, 
in the prorogation made into signs preceding, the only degree which is 
strictly anzretic is that of the western horizon; and it becomes so 


1 According to her position in the scheme of the nativity. 

2 Placidus, in remarking on the nativity of John di Colonna, after stating 
his opinion that it is an error to suppose that a malign influence to the horoscope, 
when the horoscope has not the primary signification of life is anzretic, says, 
that “the order and method which Ptolemy lays down for the election of a 
prorogator are quite absurd, unless life be at the disposal of a sole prime 
significater only.” He proves by other arguments also, and by instances of 
the fact, that “‘ one only signifies life, elected according to Ptolemy’s method.” 
(Cooper’s translation, p. 184.) 

3 “Horary proportion.” So the Perugio Latin of 1646; the Greek word, 
however, is ὡριμαιαν, which seems to be compounded of wpa and ἐμαω ; and, 
if so, the literal signification would be “ extraction of hours.” 


92 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [BOOK III. 


because it obscures the lord of life; while other degrees, of stars 
meeting with or testifying to the prorogator, both take away from and 
add to the aggregate amount of the prorogation, which would other- 
wise continue until the descension or setting of the prorogator. Of 
these last-mentioned degrees, however, there are none properly 
aneretic ; since they are not borne to the prorogatory place, but, on 
the contrary, that place is carried to their positions. In this manner the 
benefics increase the prorogation, but the malefics diminish it; and 
Mercury assists the influence of either party with which he may be 
configurated. ‘The amount of the increase or diminution is indicated 
by the degree, in which each star, so operating, is exactly situated ; for 
the number of years will depend upon, and correspond with, the horary 
times? proper to each degree ; and if the birth be by day, care must be 
taken to calculate the diurnal horary times ; if by night, the nocturnal. 
These directions are to be understood as applicable to instances wherein 
the degrees in question may be in the ascendant ; if farther advanced, 
a deduction proportionate to the distance is to be made, unless they 
should be on the occidental horizon, in which case there can be no 
remainder. 

But, in the prorogation made into succeeding signs, the places of the 
malefics, Saturn and Mars, are aneretic, whether meeting the proro- 
gator bodily, or by emission of rays in quartile, from either side, or in 
opposition: they are also sometimes anzretic, by a sextile ray, if in a 
sign of equal power, obeying or beholding the sign of the prorogator. 
And even the mere degree, in signs following, in quartile with the 


1 By the apparent motion of the planetary system. On this passage, Placidus 
has the following observations: ‘“‘ In directing the significator to the west, 
you must consider what stars or mundane rays are intercepted between the 
significator and the west ; if fortunate, add their arc to the significator’s arc 
of direction to the west; if unfortunate, subtract it from the same, and it 
will give the arc of direction, augmented or diminished according to Ptolemy. 
How largely and differently authors have spoken of this direction of the signifi- 
cator to the west, putting various constructions on the words of Ptolemy, is 
known to every one. See Cardan in his Commentaries, Maginus in Prim. Mob. 
and the Use of Legal Astrology in Physic, c. viii, where he delivers the sentiments 
of Naibod. Argol censures wholly this doctrine of Ptolemy’s, of directing the 
moderator of life to the west, as vain and useless; but I say it is worthy of 
remark, and altogether comformable to truth; because then the rays and 
intermediate stars of the malign only lessen the arc of direction to the west, 
and do not destroy life, when, by a right direction, the moderator or life does 
not remain at the same time with the malignant planet : for, should this happen, 
they kill, without any manner of doubt.” (Cooper’s translation, pp. 106 
and 108.) 

2 “Horary times.” ‘These are the number of equatorial degrees which any 
degree of the zodiac may appear, in a certain latitude on the earth, to transit 
in an equatorial hour. 


CHAP. XIV. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS , 33 


prorogatory place, as also the degree in sextile, if badly afflicted, which 
is sometimes the case in signs of long ascension, and, still further, the 
degree in trine, if in signs of short ascension, are all aneretic: so also is 
the Sun’s place, should the Moon be prorogatory. But, although the 
meetings, which occur in the course of prorogation thus made, have, 
respectively, some of them an anzretic, and other a preservative, power, 
in consequence of their occurring by means of an actual transmission to 
the prorogatory place!; yet their anzretic tendency is not always 
effectual, but only in cases where the places, so brought to the proro- 
gatory place, may be badly afflicted. For should those places be 
situated within the terms of a benefic, the operation of their anzretic 
degree becomes impeded ; and it will likewise be impeded, if either 
of the benefics should cast a ray in quartile, trine, or opposition,” to the 
said anzretic degree itself, or to some other degree near in succession, 
and not farther distant from it than twelve degrees, if the benefic be 
Jupiter ; nor than eight, if Venus: the like impediment will also sub- 
sist, if both the prorogator and its opponent? should be bodies,* and 
not have the same latitude. 

Therefore, whenever there may be found two or more conflicting 
configurations, auxiliary on the one hand, and hostile on the other, due 
observation must be made to ascertain which party surpasses the other, 
in power as well as in number. The pre-eminence in number will be, of 
course, obvious, from the greater number® on one side than on the 
other; but, for pre-eminence in power, it must be seen whether the 
stars, auxiliary or hostile as the case may be, are, on the one side, in 
places appropriate to themselves, while they are not so on the other ; 
and especially whether those on the one side may be oriental, and those 
on the other occidental. It is also to be observed, in all cases, that not 
any one of such stars, whether hostile or auxiliary, is to be left out of 
the present calculation, on account of its casual position under the 


1 By the apparent motion of the planetary system. 

2 In reference to this passage, Placidus, in speaking of the death of Octavian 
Vestrius of Rome, has these words : “ the Moon is found in a parallel declination 
of Mars, and Saturn with the opposition of Mars ; the sextile of Jupiter to the 
Sun could give no assistance, because Jupiter is cadent, and the ray sextile is 
very weak, especially when it is the principal ray: for which reason, Ptolemy, 
in the chapter of Life, when he mentions the planets that are able to save in 
the courses of the infortunes, does not name the sextile, but the quartile, trine, 
and opposition ; because the sextile ray is feeble, particularly when it is less 
than 60°: neither could Venus assist, as she was cadent from the house, and 
in a sign inimical to the Sun,” &c. (Cooper’s Translation, p. 286.) 

8. Literally, and perhaps more properly, “its meeter.” 

4 That is to say, orbs, in contradistinction to prorogations made by aspects 
or degrees merely. 

5 Of the stars and places brought into configuration. 


94. PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK III. 


sunbeams. This rule must be particularly attended to, because, even 
though the Moon be not prorogatory, the solar place itself becomes 
anzretic, if shackled by the simultaneous presence of a malefic, and 
not restored to freedom of operation by any benefic. 

The number of years, depending on the distances between the pro- 
rogatory and anezretic places, cannot be always gathered simply and at 
once from the ascensional times? of each respective degree; but only 
in cases when the ascendant itself, or some other specific degree or body, 
actually ascending in the oriental horizon, may possess the prorogation. 
For, if it be desired to calculate agreeably to nature, every process of 
calculation that can be adopted must be directed to the attainment of 
one object; that is to say, to ascertain after how many equatorial 
times® the place of the succeeding body, or degree, will arrive at the 
position preoccupied at the birth by the preceding body, or degree: 
and, as equatorial time transits equally both the horizon and the 
meridian, the places in question must be considered, in respect of 
their proportionate distances from both these ; each equatorial degree® 
being taken to signify one solar year. 

In conformity with the foregoing remarks, when it may happen that 
the prorogatory and preceding place may be actually on the oriental 
horizon, it will be proper to reckon, at once, the ascensional times 
which may intervene until the meeting of the degrees ; because, after 
the same number of equatorial times, the anereta will arrive at the 
prorogatory place ; that is to say, at the oriental horizon. Should the 
prorogatory place be found on the meridian, the whole number of 
degrees by right ascension, in which the whole intercepted arc will 
transit the meridian, must then be taken. And if the prorogatory place 
be on the occidental horizon, the number of descensions, in which every 
degree of the distance will be carried down (or, in other words, the 
number of ascensions, in which their opposite degrees will ascend), is in 
that case to be reckoned.® 


1 Whalley’s translation of this passage is in direct contradiction to the 
sense: and even that of Allatius, as well as other Latin ones, are (if strictly 
correct) confused in their meaning. 

2 “Ascensional times.” "These are, in other words, the number of degrees 
of the equator, equivalent to a certain number of zodiacal degrees, ascending 
in any particular latitude. They are also otherwise called the oblique ascension 
of such zodiacal degrees. 

8 “Equatorial times” here signify degrees of the equator, by which all time 
is measured, 

4 That is to say, of the preceding and of the succeeding body of degree. 

5 Which may be intercepted in the arc between them. 

6 This number is that of the oblique descensional times of the intercepted 
arc, or of the oblique ascensional times of the arc opposite to it. The whole 
of the instructions in this paragraph are fully exemplified in the following 
chapter. 


CHAP. XIV. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 95 


When, however, a prorogatory and preceding place may not be 
situated on any one of the three aforesaid points, but in some inter- 
mediate station, it must be observed that other times! will then bring 
the succeeding place to the preceding one ; and mot the times of ascen- 
sion or descension, or transit of the mid-heaven, as above spoken of. 
For any places whatever, which have one particular position, on the 
same degree, in regard to the horizon and meridian, are alike and identi- 
cal. This is the case, for instance, with all places lying on any one of 
those semicircles which are drawn through the arcs of the meridian 
and horizon ; and each of these semicircles (all of which have position 
at the same equal distance from each other) marks one temporal hour? ; 
and, as the time occupied in proceeding through the places? above 
described, and arriving at the same position of the horizon and 
᾿ meridian, is rendered unequal to and different from the time of 
transits in the zodiac; so, also, the transits of other spaces are made, 
agreeably to their position, in time again distinct from this. 

There is, however, a method by which the proportion of time, 
occupied in the progress of a succeeding place to a prorogatory and 
preceding place, in whatever position, whether oriental, meridianal, or 
occidental, or any other, may be easily calculated. It is as follows :— 

When it has been ascertained what degree of the zodiac is on the 


1 Or, times to be reckoned in another manner. 

2 On this passage, there has been founded (to use Whalley’s words) “ what 
we call Mundane Parallels, or parallels in the world. And, as zodiacal parallels 
are equal distances from the tropical or equinoctial circles, so mundane parallels 
are a like equal distance from the horizontal or meridianal points or circles. 
And as zodiacal parallels are measured by the zodiacal circle, so those mundane 
parallels are measured by the diurnal or nocturnal arcs: and just so long as 
the Sun or any other planet is, in proceeding from the cusp of the twelfth 
House to the cusp of the tenth, the same Sun or other planet will be in pro- 
ceeding from the cusp of the tenth to the cusp of the eighth House. And the 
distance between Sun-rising and setting, is the diurnal arc which the meridian 
cuts in two equal parts. In directions, these mundane parallels have a twofold 
consideration: first, simple ; secondly, according to the rapt motion of the 
earth, or the primum mobile: all which have been largely explained by the 
learned Monk, Placidus,” &c. That Author has certainly stated, in one of his 
Theses, that “ those seats, or parts of the circle, are to be received, in which the 
stars, having a different declination, effect equal temporal hours” (p. 22, 
Cooper’s Translation), and he has fully exemplified this principle in other parts 
of his “ Primum Mobile”; but Ptolemy here speaks only of ome of the 
semicircles between the horizon and meridian, without reference to any other 
semicircle, corresponding in distance from the horizon and mid-heaven ; and 
all that he has said on the subject amounts only to this, that the prorogation 
is completed when the succeeding place arrives at the same semicircle on which 
the preceding place had been posited. 

3 The ascendant, mid-heaven, and western horizon; as mentioned in the 
preceding paragraph. 


96 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK III. 


mid-heaven, as also which are the preceding and succeeding degrees, the 
period of whose meeting is to be calculated, the position of the preced- 
ing degree, and its distance in temporal hours ftom the meridian, are 
next to be noted ; because any part of the zodiac, on becoming distant 
from the meridian in the same temporal hours, must fall on the same 
individual semicircle. For ascertaining this distance, the number of 
ascensions, in a right sphere, found in the intermediate space between 
the said preceding degree and the mid-heaven, either above or under 
the earth, is to be divided by the number of the diurnal or nocturnal 
horary times of the said preceding degree: for instance, if that degree 
be above the earth, by its diurnal horary times ; and, by its nocturnal, 
if it be under the earth. It is then to be discovered in what number 
of equatorial times the succeeding degree will be distant from the same 
meridian, by as many similar temporal hours as those by which the 
preceding degree is distant from it. And, to effect this, the hours in 
question must be noted, and it must first be observed, by the right ~ 
ascensions again, how many equatorial times the succeeding degree, 
at its original position, is distant from the degree on the mid- 
heaven; and then it must be seen how many equatorial times it 
will be distant, on coming to the preceding degree’s distance in 
temporal hours from the said mid-heaven: this will be found, by 
multiplying those hours by the succeeding degree’s horary times ; 
diurnal, if the future position be above the earth, and nocturnal if 
under; andthe difference in amount, of these two distances, in 
equatorial times, will present the number of years inquired for. 


CHAPTER XV 
EXEMPLIFICATION 


In order to exemplify the foregoing instructions, let the first point of 
Aries be supposed as the preceding place, and the first point in Gemini 
the succeeding; and let the latitude of the country, to which the 
operation relates, be such as will cause the longest day to consist of 
fourteen hours? ; and where the horary magnitude of the beginning of 
Gemini will be about seventeen equatorial times. 

Let the first point of Aries be first placed on the ascendant, so that 
the beginning of Capricorn may be on the mid-heaven above the earth, 


1 Vide Note 4, p. 95. 

2 This, in the Northern Hemisphere, would be the latitude of Alexandria 
(where Ptolemy flourished), or, in his own words, that of the 3rd Climate, 
passing through Lower Egypt, numbered 30° 22’.—Vide extracts from the 
Tables of the Almagest, inserted in the Appendix. 

® This is the magnitude of the diurnal temporal hour of the first point 
of Gemini in the latitude prescribed. 


CHAP. XV. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 97 


and the first point of Gemini be distant from the said mid-heaven 140 
equatorial times. Now, since the first point of Aries is distant six 
temporal hours from the mid-heaven above the earth, the times of that 
distance will be found, by multiplying the said six hours by the seventeen 
equatorial times of the horary magnitude of the first point of Gemini, 
to be 102.2. The whole sum of the distance to the mid-heaven above the 
earth, is 148 times; and as 148 times exceed 102 by 46, the succeeding 
place will consequently devolve into the preceding place after 46 times 
(being the amount of the times of ascension of Aries and Taurus’) ; since, 
in this instance, the prorogatory place is established in the ascendant. 

In like manner, let the first point of Aries be next placed on the mid- 
heaven, culminating; so that the first point of Gemini, in its first 
position, may be distant from the said mid-heaven 58 equatorial 
times. Now, as it is required to bring the first point of Gemini, in its 
second position, to the mid-heaven, the whole distance is to be reckoned, 
viz. 58 times, in which Aries and Taurus pass the mid-heaven ; because, 
again, the prorogatory place was culminating.® 

In the same way, let the first point of Aries be descending® ; so that 
the beginning of Cancer may occupy the mid-heaven, and the first 
point of Gemini precede the mid-heaven at the distance of 32 equatorial 
times.” Therefore, as the first point of Aries is on the west, and again 
distant six temporal hours from the meridian, let these six hours be 
multiplied by the seventeen times ; which will produce 102, making 
the sum of the distance® of the first point of Gemini, at its future 
descension, from the meridian.? But, as the first point of Gemini, at 
its first position, was already distant from the meridian 32 times ; 
which number 102 exceed by 70; it will consequently arrive at its 


1 By right ascension, as shown by the Extract, inserted in the Appendix, 
from the Tables of Ascensions in the Almagest. The exact distance, however, 
according to that Table, is 147° 44’. 

2 Or rather, according to the Table, 102° 39’. 

8 That is to say, of the oblique ascension, which is here required to be 
reckoned ; because the prorogatory and preceding place is in the ascendant. 
Vide p. 95, and Note 2 in p. 94. And the first point of Gemini, on arriving 
at the ascendant, will be distant from the mid-heaven 102° 39’ by right 
ascension; the 13th degree of Aquarius being then in culmination in the 
prescribed latitude. The oblique ascensions in the latitude 30° 22’ Ν, are 
also shown in the extract referred to in the preceding note: and it thereby 
appears, that Aries and Taurus ascend in 45° 5’, instead of 46°. 

# Or, rather, 57° 44’—by right ascension.—V ide extract above referred to. 

5 Vide p. 95. 

6 Or on the cusp of the 7th House. 

7 Or, rather, 32° 16’—by right ascension again.—Vzde extract as before. 

8 By right ascension. The amount according to the Table is, however, 
102° 39’, as before stated. 

® On which the 1oth degree of Virgo will then be posited. 


98 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book III. 


descension after 70 times, the amount of the excess; in which space 
Aries and ‘Taurus will have descended, and their opposite signs Libra 
and Scorpio arisen. 

Again, let the first point of Aries have another position, not in any 
angle,? but, for instance, at the distance of three temporal hours past 
the meridian ; so that the 18th degree of Taurus may be on the mid- 
heaven, and the first point of Gemini be approaching the mid-heaven, 
at the distance of thirteen equatorial times. ‘The seventeen times 
must, therefore, be again multiplied by the three hours, and the first 
point of Gemini, at its second position, will be found to be past the 
meridian, at the distance of 51 times. The distance of 13 times of the 
first position and 51 times of the second position are then both to be 
taken ; and they will produce 64 times. In the former instances the 
prorogatory place performed in the same succession; viz. occupying 
46 times in coming to the ascendant, §8 in coming to the mid-heaven, 
and 70 in coming to the west; so that the present number of times, 
depending on the intermediate position between the mid-heaven and 
the west, and being 64, also differs from each of the other numbers, in 
proportion to the three hours’ difference of position. For, in the other 
cases which proceeded by quadrants,* according to the angles, the 
times progressively differed by twelve, but, in the present case of a 
minor distance of three hours, they differ by six.® 

There is, however, another method which may be used, and which 
is still more simple; for instance, should the preceding degree be on the 
ascendant, the following intermediate times of ascension,® between it 
and the succeeding degree, may be reckoned ; should it be on the mid- 
heaven, the times of ascension must be reckoned on a right sphere; and, 
if it be on the west, descending, the intermediate times of descension? 
are to be reckoned. But, should the preceding degree be between any 
two of these angles, as, for instance, at the distance of Aries, just spoken 
of, the proper times for each angle must first be considered. And, since 
the first point of Aries was assigned a position between the two angles 
of the mid-heaven and the west, the proper times of the distances from 


1 By oblique descension and ascension: Vide p. 95.—The Table shows the 
amount to be 70° 23’, 

2 In reference to p. 95, and Note 1 in the same page. 

3 The 18th degree of Cancer being then in culmination. 

* Or semi-diurnal arcs, each equal to six temporal hours. 

5 The amount of the progressive difference of the times of prorogation, as 
here mentioned, is of course only applicable to the parallel of declination of the 
first point of Gemini, in the latitude before quoted. It must necessarily vary 
in all other parallels of declination, and also in all other latitudes. 


6 Oblique ascension. 


? The times of oblique descension of any arc of the zodiac are equal to the 
times of oblique ascension of its opposite arc; as before explained. 


CHAP. XV. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 99 


these angles to the first point of Gemini! would be found to be 58 from 
the mid-heaven, and 70 from the west. The distances, in temporal 
hours, of the preceding degree from each of these angles, are then to be 
ascertained ; and whatever proportion these same temporal hours, 
contained in such distances between the said preceding degree and each 
angle, may bear to the temporal hours of the whole quadrant, the same 
proportion, out of the excess of the times of distance of one angle over 
those of the other, is either to be added to, or deducted from, the actual 
number of times of the respective angles. For instance, in the example 
before set forth, 70 times exceed 58 times by 12; and the preceding 
place was distant from the angles three equal temporal hours, which are 
the half of six, the number belonging to the whole quadrant. Now, 
three being the half of six, and 12 being the amount of the excess, the 
half of 12 is therefore to be taken, giving 6 to be either added to the 58 
times, or substracted from the 70: thus, in either way, produciug 64, 
the required number of times. 

If, however, the preceding place should be distant from either angle 
two temporal hours, which are the third part of 6, then, in that case, 
the third part of 12, the amount of the excess, must be taken, viz. 4: 
and, if the said two hours be the distance, as calculated from the mid- 
heaven, the said 4 times are to be added to the 58 times ; but, if it be 
the distance from the occidental angle, the 4 times are to be sub- 
tracted from the 70. 

In conformity with these rules now laid down, the amount of the 
times must necessarily be obtained.? 


1 That is to say, at the time of the Ist point of Aries transiting the cusp 
of each angle respectively. 

2 The calculation of time may be greatly facilitated by the use of a zodiacal 
planisphere, said to have been invented about thirty years ago by Mr. Ranger, 
who died without making his invention public. The invention consists of a set 
of instruments perfectly adapted, as far as relates to the zodiac, for astronomical, 
as well as astrological, purposes ; and the completeness with which it solves, in 
the most intelligible and expeditious manner, all the astronomical problems 
of the zodiac, deserves attention. Whether a similar plansiphere was known 
in the days of Placidus, I am not aware ; but it is worthy of remark that the 
following words occur in his “ Primum Mobile,” and seem almost to have 
been predicted of Mr. Ranger’s planisphere :—‘‘ If any one would provide 
himself with a Ptolemic planisphere, with the horary circles, crepuscules, the 
zodiac’s latitude, and all other things requisite, it would be of very great 
service towards foreseeing the aspects.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 87.) In the 
Appendix will be found a plate, containing diagrams drawn by the instruments 
in question, which, though not completely filled up, will show how easily, and, 
at the same time, how accurately, the measure of time in directions may be 
ascertained. The said diagrams have been adapted to the “‘ exemplification ” 
here given by Ptolemy; one of them being laid down for the latitude of 
Alexandria, and the other for the latitude of southern Britain (51° 30’ N.), with 
similar positions of the preceding and succeeding places adverted to in the text. 


100 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [ΒΟΟΚ Il. 


The aneretic and critical influences of all meetings or descensions of 
prorogators! remain to be determined ; beginning, in due order, with 
such as are accomplished in the shortest time. And whatever else may 
happen, by means of any affliction or assistance offered (in the manner 
heretofore prescribed) during the actual transit of the meeting, is also 
to be decided on, as well as whatever may occur through other circum- 
stances, arising out of the ingresses taking place at the time: because, 
should the places of both the significators be afflicted, and should the ᾿ 
transit of the stars, at the then existing ingress, operate injuriously on 
the chief ruling places, it is then altogether probable that death will 
ensue ;? and, even though one of the places* may be disposed favour- 
ably to human nature, the crisis will still be important and perilous ; 
but, if both the places be so disposed favourably, some debility only, or 
transient malady, or hurt, will then happen. It is, however, necessary 
in these cases, to consider also what familiarity, or analogy, the peculiar 
properties of the places, thus meeting, may bear to the circumstances of 
the nativity. 

In order to obviate the doubts which frequently arise, as to the 
particular star or place to which the anzretic dominion ought to be 
assigned, all the meetings should be duly contemplated and considered, . 
each by each; and thus, after considering those chiefly corresponding 
with the events already past, and with the future events about to 
follow, or with the whole altogether, it will be practicable to found an 
observation on the equality or inequality of their influence. 


CHAPTER XVI 
THE FORM AND TEMPERAMENT OF THE BODY 


Tue matters affecting and regulating the duration of life have now been 
disposed of ; and it becomes proper to enter into further particulars, 
commencing, in due order, with the figure and conformation of the 
body ; because Nature forms and moulds the body before she inspires 
it with a soul. In fact, the body, in its materiality, is endowed with 
suitable constitutional properties begotten with it, and almost apparent 
from its very birth; but the soul afterwards, and by degrees, develops 


1 These meetings and descensions are technically termed “ directions.” 

2 On these words Placidus has the following remark: ‘“ ‘The revolutions 
may possess some virtue, but only according to the constitution of the stars 
to the places of the prorogators of the nativity, and their places of direction, 
but no farther; as Ptolemy was of opinion, and briefly expresses himself in 
his Chapter of Life. ‘Those who are afflicted, both in the places and con- 


clusions of the years, by the revolution of the stars infecting the principal 


places, have reason to expect certain death.’ ”” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 127.) 
8. Of the significators before mentioned. 


CHAP. XVI. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS IOI 


the appropriate qualities which it derives from the primary cause, and 
which become known much later than external attributes, and in process 
of time only. 

In regard to the body, therefore, it is in all cases requisite to observe 
the oriental horizon, and to ascertain what planets may preside or have 
dominion over it, and also to pay particular attention to the Moon. 
For, from both these places,! and from their rulers, as well as from the 
natural formation and contemperament appertaining to every species 
of the human race, and also from the figure ascribed to those fixed 
stars which may be co-ascending, the conformation of the body is to 
be inferred. The planets possessing dominion have the chief influence, 
and the proper qualities of their places co-operate with them. And, in 
order to simplify these instructions, and as the planets are first to be 
treated of, each planet is individually to be considered as follows, viz. : 

Saturn, when oriental, acts on the personal figure by producing a 
yellowish complexion and a good constitution ; with black and curled 
hair, a broad and stout chest, eyes of ordinary quality, and a propor- 
tionate size of body, the temperament of which is compounded 
principally of moisture and cold. Should he be occidental, he makes 
the personal figure black or dark, thin and small, with scanty hair on the 
head; the body without hair, but well shaped; the eyes black or 
dark; and the bodily temperament consisting chiefly of dryness and 
cold. 

Jupiter ruling, when oriental, makes the person white or fair, with a 
clear complexion, moderate growth of hair, and large eyes, and of good 
and dignified stature; the temperament being chiefly of heat and 
moisture. When occidental, he still causes a fair complexion, but not 
of equal clearness ; and he produces long straight hair, with baldness 
on the forehead or on the crown of the head ; and he then also gives a 
middle stature to the body, with a temperament of more moisture. 

Mars, ascending, gives a fair ruddiness to the person, with large size, 
a healthy constitution, blue or grey eyes, a sturdy figure, and a moderate 
growth of hair, with a temperament principally of heat and dryness. 
When occidental, he makes the complexion simply ruddy, and the 
personal figure of moderate stature, with small eyes ; the body without 
hair, and the hair of the head light or red, and straight; the bodily 
temperament being chiefly dry. 

Venus operates in a manner similar to that of Jupiter, but, at the 
same time, more becomingly and more gracefully ; producing qualities 
of a nature more applicable to women and female beauty, such as soft- 
ness, juiciness, and greater delicacy. She also peculiarly makes the eyes 
beautiful, and renders them of an azure tint. 

Mercury, when oriental, makes the personal figure of a yellowish 
complexion, and of stature proportionate and well-shaped, with small 


1 That of the ascendant, and that of the Moon. 


102 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK ΠῚ. 


eyes and a moderate growth of hair; and the bodily temperament is 
chiefly hot. If occidental, he gives a complexion white or fair, but not 
altogether clear; straight, dark hair, a thin and slight figure, some 
squint or defect in the eyes, and a long visage? faintly red; the tem- 
perament being chiefly dry. 

The Sun and Moon, when configurated with any one of the planets, 
also co-operate: the Sun adds a greater nobleness to the figure, and 
increases the healthiness of the constitution ; and the Moon, especially 
when holding or delaying her separation, generally contributes better 
proportion and greater delicacy of figure, and greater moisture of 
temperament; but, at the same time, her influence in this latter 
particular is adapted to the proper ratio of her illumination ; as referred 
to in the modes of temperament mentioned in the beginning of this 
treatise. 

Again, should the planets be matutine, and fully conspicuous,‘ they 
will cause the body to be large; if in their first station, they will make 
it strong and vigorous ; if they should precede or be in advance, it will 
be disproportionate ; if in their second station, it will be weaker, and, 
if vespertine, altogether mean and subservient to evil treatment and 
oppression. At the same time, the places of the planets,® as has been 
already said, co-operate especially in producing the shape of the personal 
figure, and contribute also towards the temperament. 

And further, it is the general tendency of the quadrant comprised 
between the vernal equinox and the summer tropic to produce good 
complexions, advantageous stature, fine constitutions, and fine eyes ; 
with a temperament abounding in heat and moisture. The quadrant 
from the summer tropic to the autumnal equinox tends to produce 
an ordinary complexion, proportionate stature, a healthy constitution, 
large eyes, a stout person, with curled hair, and a temperament abound- 
ing in heat and dryness. ‘The quadrant from the autumnal equinox 
to the winter tropic causes yellowish complexions, slender, thin, and 
sickly persons, with a moderate growth of hair, fine eyes, and a tempera- 
ment abundantly dry and cold. The other quadrant, from the winter 
tropic to the vernal equinox, gives a dark complexion, proper stature, 
straight hair on the head and none on the body, a goodly figure, and a 
temperament abounding in cold and moisture. 


1 The original word is (in the accusative plural) avyonovs, which Allatius 
has rendered, by “pedibus caprinis,” goat-footed, as if it were compounded 
of αἱξ capra and πους pes; but the preferable derivation seems to be from 
avé and wy vultus ; meaning “goat-faced.” 

2 From any one of the said planets. 

8 Vide Chap. VIII, Book I. 

4 The Greek is zovovpevor paces; literally “ making apparition” ; but 
the subsequent context seems to require the meaning I have adopted. 

5 The parts of the signs in which the planets are posited. 


CHAP. XVII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 103 


To speak, however, more particularly, all constellations of human 
form, both those within and those without the zodiac, act in favour of 
giving a handsome shape to the body, and due proportion to the figure ; 
while those not of human form vary its due proportions, and incline 
it towards their own shape; assimilating it, in some measure, to their 
own peculiarities, either by enlarging or diminishing its size, by giving 
it additional strength or weakness, or by otherwise improving or dis- 
figuring it. Thus, for example, Leo, Virgo, and Sagittarius enlarge 
the person ; and Pisces, Cancer, and Capricorn tend to make it diminu- 
tive; and thus, again, the upper and anterior parts of Aries, ‘Taurus, 
and Leo increase its strength and their lower and posterior parts 
render it weaker: while, on the other hand, Sagittarius, Scorpio, and 
Gemini act conversely; for their anterior parts produce greater de- 
bility, and their posterior parts greater vigour. In like manner, Virgo, 
Libra, and Sagittarius contribute to render the person handsome and 
well-proportioned ; and Scorpio, Pisces, and Taurus incline it to be 
misshapen and disfigured. 

The other constellations? also operate on similar principles ; and all 
these influences it is necessary to bear in mind, in order that the peculiar 
properties, observed in their joint temperament, may be so compounded 
as to authorize an inference therefrom, concerning the form and tem- 
perament of the body. 


CHAPTER XVII 
THE HURTS, INJURIES, AND DISEASES OF THE BODY 


ΝΈΧΤ in succession to the foregoing chapter, the circumstances relating 
to bodily hurts, injuries, and diseases, claim to be discussed ; and they 
require to be considered in the following mode. 

For the investigation of these circumstances, the two angles on the 
horizon, both the ascendant and the western, must in all cases be re- 
marked ; but more especially the western angle and its preceding 
house,* which is inconjunct with the ascendant. After these angles 
have been noted, it must be observed in what manner the malefic 
planets may be configurated with them: for, if both the malefics, or 
even if one of them, should be stationed bodily on any of the successive 
degrees composing the said angles, or be configurated with such degrees 
in quartile or in opposition, some bodily disorders or injuries will attach 
to the native or person then born: and this will especially happen 
if, also, both the luminaries, either together or in opposition, or even if 
one of them, should be angularly posited in the manner described. 


1 For the operative qualities of the other constellations, vide Chapters X 
and XI, Book I. 
* The sixth house. 


104 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book 111. 


Because, in such a case, not only a malefic which may have ascended in 
succession to the luminaries, but also any one which may have pre- 
ascended, if placed in an angle, has power to inflict certain diseases and 
injuries, such as may be indicated by the places of the horizon and of 
the signs, as well as by the natures of the planets themselves ; whether 
malefics, or others evilly afflicted and configurated with them. 

Such parts of the signs, as contain the afflicted part of the horizon, 
will show in what part of the body the misfortune will exist, whether 
it be a hurt, or disease, or both: and the natures of the planets, in 
operating the misfortune, also regulate its particular form or species. 
For, among the chief parts of the human body, Saturn rules the right 
ear, the spleen, the bladder, the phlegm, and the bones; Jupiter 
governs the hand, the lungs, the arteries, and the seed ; Mars, the left 
ear, the kidneys, the veins, and the privities ; the Sun rules the eyes, the 
brain, the heart, the sinews or nerves, and all the right side; Venus, 
the nostrils, the liver, and the flesh ; Mercury, the speech, the under- 
standing, the bile, the tongue, and the fundament; and the Moon 
governs the palate, the throat, the stomach, the belly, the womb, and 
all the left parts. 

It generally happens that some casual hurt, or injurious affection of 
the body, is the utmost that takes effect when the malefics may be 
oriental, and that considerable diseases occur only when the malefics 
may be occidental. And a hurt is distinct from a disease, inasmuch as 
the pain, which it induces at the time, is not afterwards continued ; 
while a disease is, on the other hand, imposed on the sufferer either 
constantly or at repeated intervals. ‘These remarks are applicable to all 
cases ; but, in order to inquire particularly into the nature of the hurt 
or disease, a further attention must be paid to the figures, or schemes, 
with which the effects, about to be produced, will for the most part 
correspond in character. 

For instance, blindness of one eye will ensue, when the Moon may 
be in the before-mentioned angles, either operating her conjunction, 
or being at the full: it will also happen should she be configurated with 
the Sun in any other proportional aspect, and be at the same time con- 
nected with any one of the nebulous collections in the zodiac ; such as 
the cloudy spot of Cancer, the Pleiades of Taurus, the arrow-head of 
Sagittarius, the sting of Scorpio, the parts about the mane of Leo, or 
the urn of Aquarius. Moreover, both eyes will be injured should the 
Moon be in an angle, and in her decrease, and Mars or Saturn, being 
matutine, ascend in succession to her; or, again, if the Sun be in an 
angle, and these planets pre-ascend before him, and be configurated with 
both luminaries, whether the luminaries be in one and the same sign, or 
in opposition ; provided also the said planets, although oriental of the 
Sun, be occidental of the Moon. Under these circumstances, therefore, — 
Mars will cause blindness by a stroke or blow, or by the sword or by 
burning ; and, if he be configurated with Mercury, it will be effected 


CHAP. XVII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 105 


either in a place of exercise or sport, or by the assault of robbers. 
Saturn, however, under the same circumstances, produces blindness by 
cataract, or cold, by a white film, or by other similar disorders. 

Venus, if in one of the angles before-mentioned, and especially if she 
be in that of the west, and Saturn be in conjunction or in configuration 
with her, or be changing place with her,! while Mars, at the same time, 
is in elevation above her, or in opposition to her, will produce impotence 
in the native, if a male; and, if a female, will render her liable to 
abortion, or to produce children stillborn, or not capable of being 
extracted except in mangled parts. Such misfortunes especially 
happen under Cancer, Virgo, and Capricorn ; even though the Moon 
may be in the ascendant, in conjunction with Mars. And if, under 
the same circumstances, Venus be also configurated with Mercury, as 
well as Saturn, Mars again being in elevation above her, or in opposition 
to her, the native will be either an eunuch or hermaphrodite, or devoid 
of the natural channels and vents. And, when these positions occur, 
should the Sun also partake in the configuration, the luminaries and 
Venus being all masculinely constituted, the Moon in her decrease, and 
the malefics brought up in the degrees next successively ascending, the 
males will be born maimed or crippled, or injured in their private 
members (particularly under Aries, Leo, Scorpio, Capricorn, and 
Aquarius); and the females will remain childless and unprolific. 
And ‘it also occasionally happens that the natives, under such a con- 
figuration, are likewise injured in the face or eyes. 

If Saturn and Mercury, in conjunction with the Sun, be in the 
before-mentioned angles, the native will have some defect in the tongue, 
and stammer or speak with difficulty: especially if Mercury be occi- 
dental, and both he and Saturn configurated with the Moon. Should 
Mars, however, be found together with them, he will for the most part 
remove the defect in the tongue, after the Moon shall have completed 
her approach to him. 

Further, should the malefics be in angles, and the luminaries, either 
together or in opposition, be brought up to them ; or, if the malefics be 
brought up to the luminaries, especially when the Moon may be in her 
nodes, or in her bend,? or in obnoxious signs, such as Aries, Taurus, 
Cancer, Scorpio, and Capricorn, the body will then be afflicted with 
excrescences, distortions, lameness or paralysis. 

If the malefics be in conjunction with the luminaries, the calamity 
will take effect from the very moment of birth: but should they be 
in the mid-heaven, in elevation above the luminaries, or in opposition 
to each other, it will then arise out of some great and dangerous 


1 This seems to imply, if Saturn be in one of Venus’s places of dignity, and 
Venus in one of Saturn’s. Such a counterposition is technically termed 
“‘ mutual reception.” 


2 In her extreme latitude, whether north or south. 
E 


106 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book Int 


accident ; such as a fall from some height or precipice, an attack of 
robbers, or of quadrupeds. And thus, if Mars hold dominion, he will 
produce the misfortune by means of fire or wounds, through quarrels, 
or by robbers ; and if Saturn, it will be caused by a fall, by shipwreck, 
or by convulsive fits or spasms. 

The minor bodily disorders mostly occur on the Moon’s being 
posited in a tropical or equinoctial sign ; and, if in that of the vernal 
equinox, these disorders usually arise from the white leprosy ; in that 
of the summer tropic, from tetters; in that of the autumnal equinox, 
from leprosy ; and in that of the winter tropic, from the eruption of 
pimples, and similar inconveniences. 

Considerable diseases, however, take effect when the malefics may be 
configurated in the same situations as those before prescribed, yet 
differing in one respect ; that is to say, being occidental of the Sun and 
oriental of the Moon. In such cases, Saturn will generally produce cold 
in the bowels, excessive phlegm, rheumatism, emaciation, sickliness, 
jaundice, dysentry, cough, obstruction, colic, or scurvy; and, in 
women, besides these diseases, he produces complaints of the womb. 
Mars will cause expectoration of blood, atrabilarious attacks, pulmonary 
complaints, sores, and diseases in the private parts (which will be 
rendered still more painful by surgical burning or incision), such as 
fistula, hemorrhoids, or knots in the fundament, and also inflamed and 
putrifying ulcers. In women, to these calamities, he adds abortion, 
excision of the fcetus or its mortification. 

And, even though these planets should not be properly configurated 
towards the particular parts of the body, their qualities will still operate. 
Mercury also will act with them, and contribute to the increase of the 
evil: thus, if he be in familiarity with Saturn, he will much augment 
the coldness, and promote the continuance of rheumatism, and the 
disturbance of the fluids; especially in the chest, throat, and stomach. 
If in familiarity with Mars, he will tend to produce greater dryness, 
and will increase ulcers, abscesses, loss of hair, scarified sores, erysipelas, 
tetters, blackness of bile, insanity, epilepsy,1 and similar disorders. 

Some of the properties, peculiar to disease, arise out of the various 
character of the signs which may contain the above-mentioned con- 
figurations in the two angles. Thus Cancer, Capricorn, and Pisces, 
and, in short, all signs ascribed to terrestrial animals and fishes, appro- 
priately cause diseases of putridity, tetters, excoriation, scrofula, fistula, 
leprosy, and the like ; while Sagittarius and Gemini produce disease by 
falling fits and epilepsy. And if the planets happen to be posited in 
the latter degrees of the signs containing them, the extremities of the 


* Τῆς tepas vorov; literally, “the holy disease,” which authors have 
explained to mean epilepsy. Perhaps the disease was anciently called holy, 
because the patient, when possessed by the fit, seemed to be under the influence 
of some supernatural agency. 


CHAP. XVIII. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 107 
body will then be chiefly affected by the disease or hurt ; which will 


arise from humours or accidents, producing leprosy, gout, or other 
infirmities, in the hands and feet. 

Under the circumstances above detailed, the disease or hurt will be 
incurable, provided there shall be not one of the benefics in con- 
figuration with the malefics which effect the evil, nor with the lumin- 
aries posited in angles; and even though the benefics may be so con- 
figurated, the misfortune will still be incapable of remedy, if the 
malefics be well fortified, and in elevation above them. 

Should the benefics, however, hold principal situations, and be in 
elevation above the obnoxious malefics, the disease or hurt will then be 
moderate, and have neither deformity nor disgrace attached to it ; 
and it will sometimes be altogether prevented and set aside, if the 
benefics be oriental. Jupiter, for instance, by means of human aid, 
such as wealth or rank can command, will conceal and soothe hurts and 
diseases; and, if Mercury be joined with him, the assistance will be 
further improved by the addition of skilful physicians and good 
medicine. Venus, likewise, through the mediation of deities and oracles, 
will cause hurts to appear in a manner neither ungraceful nor un- 
becoming, and will ameliorate diseases by medicines granted by the 
gods. 

Lastly, should Saturn be present in the configuration, the afflicted 
persons will move abroad to show their maladies, and to complain ; and 
if Mercury also be present, they will do so for the sake of deriving 
support and profit from the exhibition. 


CHAPTER XVIII 
THE QUALITY OF THE MIND 


Tue consideration of circumstances applicable to the body is practised 
under the foregoing rules. 

Of the spiritual qualities, however, all those which are national and 
intellectual are contemplated by the situation of Mercury; while all 
others, which regard the mere sensitive faculties, and are independent 
of reason, are considered rather by other luminaries of a less subtle 
constitution and more ponderous body ; for instance, by the Moon and 
such stars as she may be configurated with, as well by separation, as by 
application. 

Now the mind is liable to impulse in a multiplicity of directions, 
and the investigation of them cannot be summarily nor hastily per- 
formed, but must be conducted by means of many various observa- 
tions: for the different qualities of the signs, containing Mercury and 


1 That is to say, in the commencement of her separation from the aspect 
or conjunction of such stars. 


108 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book 111, 


the Moon, or such stars as hold any influence over those two, are well 
competent to contribute towards the properties of the mind; so 
likewise are the configurations made with the Sun and the angles, by 
stars bearing any relation to the point in question ; besides, also, the 
peculiar nature exercised by each star in operating upon the mental 
movements. 

Thus, the tropical signs generally dispose the mind to enter much into 
political matters, rendering it eager to engage in public and turbulent 
affairs, fond of distinction, and busy in theology ; at the same time, 
ingenious, acute, inquisitive, inventive, speculative, and studious of 
astronomy and divination. 

Bicorporeal signs render the mind variable, versatile, not easy to be 
understood, volatile, and unsteady; inclined to duplicity, amorous, 
wily, fond of music, careless, full of expedients, and regretful.} 

Fixed signs make the mind just, uncompromising, constant, firm of 
purpose, prudent, patient, industrious, strict, chaste, mindful of in- 
juries, steady in pursuing its object, contentious, desirous of honour, 
seditious, avaricious, and pertinacious. 

Oriental positions, and those in the ascendant, especially if made 
by planets in their proper faces,? make men liberal, frank, self-confident, 
brave, ingenious, unreserved, yet acute. Oriental stations, and posi- 
tions on the mid-heaven, or culminations, make men reflective, con- 
stant, of good memory, firm, prudent, magnanimous, successful in 
pursuing their desires, inflexible, powerful in intellect, strict, not easily 
imposed upon, judicious, active, hostile to crime, and skilful in science. 

Precedent and occidental positions make men unsteady, irreverent, 
imbecile, impatient of labour, easily impressed, humble, doubting, 
wavering, boastful, and cowardly, slothful, lazy, and hard to rouse. 
Occidental stations, and positions on the lower heaven (as well as 
Mercury and Venus, when making vespertine descension by day, and 
rising in the night), will render the mind ingenious and sagacious, but 
not capable of great recollection, nor very industrious; yet inquisitive 
in occult matters, such as magic and sacred mysteries; also studious 
of mechanics, and mechanical instruments: addicted to the observa- 
tion of meteors, to philosophy, to augury by means of birds, and to the 
judgment of dreams. 

Further, should the planets having dominion be in places of their 
own, and in conditions suitable to their own qualities, the mental 
properties will be rendered exquisite, unimpeded, and successful: and 
especially if these planets rule at the same time over both places ; that 
is to say, be by some mode configurated with Mercury, and holds 

1 The Greek is μεταμελητίκους, which means “ penitent,” or “ prone to 
repentance,” or “to subsequent regret.” It is difficult to convey its precise — 
meaning in the text. 


2 Vide Chapter XXVI, Ro * I. 


CHAP. XVIII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 109 


separation from, or application to the Moon. Should the said 
planets, however, not be thus constituted, but be posited in places not 
particularly appropriate to themselves, they will yet, even then, infuse 
into the composition of the mental energy the properties of their own 
nature; but obscurely and imperfectly, and not with such force and 
strong evidence as in the other case. 

The peculiar qualities of planets in dominion, or in elevation, are 
powerfully impressed upon the mental energy: for instance, persons, 
who, in consequence of the familiarity of the malefics, become wicked 
and dishonest, have their impulse to commit evil, free and unrestrained, - 
when the said familiarity is not governed by any contrary influence. 
But, should a contrary condition impede and govern that familiarity, 
the impulse will be frustrated, and the culprits will be easily overtaken, 
and undergo punishment. In like manner, persons endowed with 
goodness and virtue, by the familiarity between the benefics and the 
before-mentioned places,1 and when no contrary influence in elevation 
may interpose, will exert themselves with cheerfulness and alacrity in 
performing good actions, will be subject to no injustice, but enjoy the 
advantages of their honesty and virtue. If, however, this familiarity 
should be superseded by some contrary condition, the very mildness and 
humanity of these persons will operate to their disadvantage, exposing 
them to contempt and accusation, and rendering them liable to be 
wronged by the multitude. 

The foregoing observations, relative to the moral habit, apply 
generally ; and the particular properties, created in the mental energies 
by the actual nature of the planets, according to the respective dominion 
of each, remain to be treated of. 

The planet Saturn, therefore, when alone possessing dominion of the 
mind, and governing Mercury and the Moon, and if posited in glory, 
both cosmically and with respect to the angles,? will make men careful 
of their bodies,* strong and profound in opinion, austere, singular in 
their modes of thinking, laborious, imperious, hostile to crime, avarici- 
ous, parsimonious, accumulators of wealth, violent, and envious: but, 
if he be not in glory, cosmically, and as regards the angles, he will 
debase the mind, making it penurious, pusillanimous, ill-disposed, 
indiscriminating, malignant, timorous, slanderous, fond of solitude, 
repining, incapable of shame, bigoted, fond of labour, void of natural 
affection, treacherous in friendship and in family connections, in- 
capable of enjoyment, and regardless of the body.4 Connected with 
Jupiter in the mode before-mentioned, being also situated in glory, 


1 That of Mercury, and that of the Moon. 

2 This seems to imply, if well Placed 1 in elevation ; as, in the mid-heaven, 
for instance, or in a conspicuous situation ; and in possession of dignities. 

8 Or, persons: the Greek is $Uoruparovs: 

‘ Or, persons Σ μισοσωματους. 


110 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


Saturn will render the mind virtuous, respectful, well-intentioned, 
ready to assist, judicious, frugal, magnanimous, obliging, solicitous of 
good, affectionate in all domestic ties, mild, prudent, patient, and 
philosophical: but, if thus connected and posited ingloriously, he 
makes men outrageous, incapable of learning, timorous, highly super- 
stitious, yet regardless of religion, suspicious, averse to children, in- 
capable of friendship, cunning, misjudging, faithless, foolishly wicked, 
irascible, hypocritical, idle and useless, without ambition, yet regretful, 
morose, highly reserved, over-cautious, and dull. Conciliated with 
Marts, and posited in glory, Saturn renders men reckless, over-diligent, 
free in speech, turbulent, boastful, austere in their dealings, pitiless, 
contemptuous, fierce, warlike, bold, fond of tumults, insidious, deceit- 
ful, and implacable; promoters of faction, tyrannical, rapacious, 
hostile to the commonwealth, delighting in strife, vindictive, profound 
in guilt, strenuous, impatient, insolent, mischievous, overbearing, evil, 
unjust, obstinate, inhuman, inflexible, immutable in opinion, busy, 
able in office, active, submitting to no opposition, and on the whole 
successful in their undertakings; but, if thus connected, and not 
placed in glory, he will make men plunderers, robbers, adulterers, 
submissive to evil, seeking gain by their turpitude, infidels in religion, 
void of the common affections, mischievous, treacherous, thievish, 
perjurers, and sanguinary ; eaters of unlawful food, familiar with guilt, 
assassins, sorcerers, sacrilegious, impious, violators of the tomb, and, 
in short, thoroughly depraved. Conciliated with Venus, and being 
again in glory, Saturn makes men averse to women, and renders them 
fond of governing, prone to solitude, highly reserved, regardless of 
rank, indifferent to beauty, envious, austere, unsociable, singular in 
opinion, addicted to divination and to religious services and mysteries ; 
solicitous of the priesthood, fanatical, and subservient to religion ; 
solemn, reverential, sedate, studious of wisdom, faithful in friendship, 
continent, reflective, circumspect, and scrupulous in regard to female 
virtue: but, if he be thus conciliated, and not posited in glory, he 
makes men licentious and libidinous, practisers of lewdness, careless, 
and impure in sexual intercourse; obscene, treacherous to women, 
especially to those of their own families ; wanton, quarrelsome, sordid, 
hating elegance; slanderous, drunken, superstitious, adulterous, and 
impious ; blasphemers of the gods, and scoffers at holy rites ; calumni- 
ators, sorcerers, hesitating at nothing. If conciliated with Mercury, 
and if in a glorious position, Saturn makes men inquisitive, loquacious, 
studious of law and of medicine, mystical, confederate in secrecy, 
fabricators of miracles, impostors, improvident, cunning, familiar with 
business, quick in perception, petulant, accurate, vigilant, meditative, 
fond of employment, and tractable: but, if connected with Mercury, 
and not posited gloriously, he causes men to be frivolous, vindictive, 
laborious, alienated from their families, fond of tormenting, and void 
of enjoyment; night-wanderers, insidious, treacherous, pitiless, and 


CHAP. XVIII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS ILI 


thievish ; magicians, sorcerers, forgers of writings, cheats, unsuccessful 
in their undertakings, and quickly reduced to adversity. Such are the 
effects of Saturn. 

When Jupiter alone has dominion of the mind, and is gloriously 
situated, he renders it generous, gracious, pious, reverent, joyous, 
courteous, lofty, liberal, just, magnanimous, noble, self-acting, com- 
passionate, fond of learning, beneficent, benevolent, and calculated for 
government : and, if posited ingloriously, he will endow the mind with 
qualities apparently similar to these, but not of such virtue and lustre : 
as, instead, of generosity, he will then cause profusion; instead of 
piety, bigotry ; for modesty, timidity ; for nobleness, arrogance ; for 
courteousness, folly ; for elegance, voluptuousness ; for magnanimity, 
carelessness ; and for liberality, indifference. Conciliated with Mars, 
and being in glory, Jupiter will make men rough, warlike, skilful in 
military affairs, dictatorial, refractory, impetuous, daring, free in 
speech, able in action, fond of disputation, contentious, imperious, 
generous, ambitious, irascible, judicious, and fortunate: but, if thus 
connected, and not placed in glory, he makes men mischievous, reckless, 
cruel, pitiless, seditious, quarrelsome, perverse, calumnious, arrogant, 
avaricious, tapacious, inconstant, vain and empty, unsteady, pre- 
cipitate, faithless, injudicious, inconsiderate, senseless, and officious ; 
inculpators, prodigals, triflers, altogether without conduct, and giving 
way to every impulse. When conciliated with Venus, and in a glorious 
position, Jupiter will render the mind pure, joyous, delighting in 
elegance, in the arts and sciences, and in poetry and music; valuable 
in friendship, sincere, beneficent, compassionate, inoffensive, religious, 
fond of sports and exercises, prudent, amiable, and affectionate, 
gracious, noble, brilliant, candid, liberal, discreet, temperate, modest, 
pious, just, fond of glory, and in all respects honourable and worthy ; 
but, if posited ingloriously, when so connected, he makes men luxurious, 
soft, effeminate, fond of dancing, indulgent in expenses, incapable of 
managing women, yet amorous and lascivious; mean, slanderous, 
adulterous, fond of dress, dissolute, dull, wasteful, without energy, 
enervated, fond of personal adornment, womanish in mind, yet 
observant of holy rites and ceremonies, faithful, harmless, pleasant, 
affable, cheerful, and liberal to misfortune. If connected with Mercury, 
and posited in glory, Jupiter will render men fit for much business, 
fond of learning, and of geometry and the mathematics ; poetical, 
public orators, acute, temperate, well-disposed, skilful in counsel, 
politic, beneficent, able in government, pious, religious, valuable in 
all useful professions, benevolent, affectionate in their families, ready 
in acquiring knowledge, philosophical, and dignified: but when so 
connected, and placed ingloriously, he will produce contrary effects, 
rendering men frivolous, empty, contemptible, credulous of falsehood, 
senseless, fanatical, trifling, petulant, affectors of wisdom, stupid, 
arrogant, pretenders in art, magicians, and vacillating: Yet he will 


112 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK II. 


also produce men skilled in various learning, and of strong memory, 
capable of imparting instruction, and pure in their enjoyments. 

Mars alone having dominion of the mind, and placed with glory, 
makes men noble, imperious, irascible, warlike, versatile, powerful in 
intellect, daring, bold, refractory, careless, obstinate, acute, self- 
confident, contemptuous, tyrannical, strenuous, stern and able in 
government: but, posited ingloriously, he makes men cruel, mis- 
chievous, sanguinary, tumultuous, extravagant in expense, boisterous, 
ruffian-like, precipitate, drunken, rapacious, pitiless, familiar with 
crime, restless, outrageous, hostile to their families, and infidels in 
religion. Should he be conciliated with Venus, and posited in glory, 
he renders the mind cheerful, docile, friendly, complacent, joyous, 
playful, frank, delighting in songs and dancing, amorous, fond of the 
arts, and of dramatic personation, voluptuous, brave, libidinous in 
desire, sensible, cautious, and discreet ; disposed to free sexual inter- 
course,? quick in anger, extravagant in expense, and jealous: but, if 
he have an inglorious position when thus conciliated, he makes men 
overbearing, lascivious, sordid, opprobious, adulterous, mischievous, 
liars, fabricators of deceit, cheats of their own families as well as others, 
eager in desire, and at the same time soon satiated, debauchers of wives 
and virgins, daring, impetuous, ungovernable, treacherous, faithless, 
‘dangerous, fickle and weak in mind; and occasionally also wasteful, 
fond of dress, audacious, and shameless. Connected with Mercury, 
and placed in glory, Mars renders men skilful in command, cautious, 
strenuous, active, obstinate, yet versatile, inventive, sophistical, 
laborious, busy in all things, eloquent, imposing, deceitful, inconstant, 
overknowing, maliciously artful, quick witted, seductive, hypocritical, 
treacherous, habituated to evil, inquisitive, fond of strife, and success- 
ful; fair dealers with persons of habits similar to their own, and, in 
short, altogether mischievous to their enemies, though beneficial to 
their friends: but, if Mars be posited ingloriously, and thus connected, 
he makes men prodigal, yet avaricious, cruel, daring, bold, regretful and 
vacillating ; liars, thieves, infidels in religion, perjurers, and impostors ; 
seditious, incendiaries, frequenters of theatres, covered with infamy, 
robbers, housebreakers, sanguinary, forgers of writings, familiar with 
crime, jugglers, magicians, sorcerers, and assassins. 

When Venus rules alone in a position of glory, she renders the mind 
benignant, good, voluptuous, copious in wit, pure, gay, fond of dancing, 
jealous, abhorring wickedness, delighting in the arts, pious, modest, 
well-disposed, happy in dreams, affectionate, beneficent, compassionate, 
refined in taste, easily reconciled, tractable, and entirely amiable: but, 
if contrarily posited, she renders the mind dull, amorous, effeminate, 
timorous, indiscriminating, sordid, faulty, obscure, and ignominious. 
Conciliated with Mercury, and posited with glory, Venus makes men ~ 


1 TIpos μιξιν θηλειων και appevwv διακειμενους, 


CHAP. XVIII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 113 


lovers of the arts, philosophical, of scientific mind and good genius, 
poetical, delighting in learning and elegance, polite, voluptuous, 
luxurious in their habits of life, joyous, friendly, pious, prudent, fitted 
for various arts, intelligent, not misled by error, quick in learning, self- 
teaching, emulous of worth, followers of virtue, copious and agreeable 
in speech, serene and sincere in manner, delighting in exercise, honest, 
judicious, high-minded, and continent in desire as regards women! ; 
but, when so conciliated and posited adversely, she will make men 
oppressive, fit for various arts, evil-tongued, unsteady, malevolent, 
fraudulent, turbulent, liars, calumniators, faithless, crafty, insidious, 
practised in evil, uncourteous, debauchers of women, corrupters of 
youth,? fond of personal adornment, dissolute, infamous, notoriously 
offensive and publicly complained of, yet striving after all things. 

Mercury, alone, having dominion of the mind, and being in a glorious 
position, renders it prudent, clever, sensible, capable of great learning, 
inventive, expert, logical, studious of nature, speculative, of good 
genius, emulous, benevolent, skilful in argument, accurate in con- 
jecture, adapted to sciences and mysteries, and tractable: but, when 
placed contrarily, he makes men busy in all things, precipitate, forget- 
ful, impetuous, frivolous, variable, regretful, foolish, inconsiderate, 
void of truth, careless, inconstant, insatiable, avaricious, unjust ; and 
altogether of slippery intellect, and predisposed to error. 

To these influences and their effects, as above detailed, the Moon also 
contributes: for, should she be in the bends of her southern or northern 
boundary,® she will render the properties of the mind more various, 
more versatile in art, and more susceptible of change: if she be in her 
nodes, she will make them more acute, more practical, and more active. 
Also, when in the ascendant, and during the increase of her illumination, 
she augments their ingenuity, perspicuity, firmness and expansion ; 
but, when found in her decrease, or in occultation, she renders them 
more heavy, more obtuse, more variable of purpose, more timid, and 
more obscure. 

The Sun likewise co-operates, when conciliated with the lord of the 
mental temperament ; contributing, if he be in a glorious position, to 
increase probity, industry, honour, and all laudable qualities ; but, if 
adversely situated, he increases debasement, depravity, obscurity, 
cruelty, obstinacy, moroseness, and all other evil qualities. 


1 TIpos appevas δε κεκιννημενους καὶ ζηλοτυπους, 
2 Ἰ]αιδων διαφθορεας. 
3 That is to say, in her extreme latitude, whether south or north. 


114 PTOLEMY’S ΤΕΤΆΛΒΙΒΙΟΒ [ΒΟΟΚ 1Π|. 


CHAPTER XIX 
THE DISEASES OF THE MIND 


In connection with the foregoing discussion on the properties of the 
mind, the circumstances relating to eminent mental disorders, such as 
madness, epilepsy, and others of the like formidable nature, duly claim 
attention. | 

Now, with reference to these, it is always essential to consider the ~ 
planet Mercury and the Moon, and to observe in what mode they may © 
be disposed towards each other, and towards the angles, and also to- 
wards the malefics: for, if the Moon and Mercury be unconnected 
with each other, or with the oriental horizon, and provided such planets 
as may be adversely and noxiously configurated should be in elevation 
above them, or overrule them, or be in opposition to them, the mental 
properties will then consequently become impregnated with various | 
disorders: the characters of which may be clearly known by the quali- 
ties of the stars thus controlling the places.” 

It is true that there are many disorders of a moderate nature, capable 
of being distinguished by what has been already stated, in the preceding 
chapter, regarding the mental qualities: for it is by the increase and 
growth of certain of those qualities, that an injurious excess is pro- 
duced ; and every irregularity of the moral habit, whether by deficiency 
or superabundance, may be fitly termed a moral disorder; But, at the 
same time, there are other disorders of so vast and manifold a dispro- 
portion, that they quite, as it were, overpower the natural course of the 
intellect and passions of the mind. And of these greater disorders it 
is now proposed to treat. 

For example, epilepsy generally attaches to all persons born when 
Mercury and the Moon may be unconnected either with each other, or 
with the oriental horizon, while Saturn and Mars may be in angles and 
superintend the scheme ; that is to say, provided Saturn be so posited 
by day, and Mars by night: otherwise, when the converse may happen 
in these schemes, viz. when Saturn may have dominion by night, but 
Mars by day (especially if in Cancer, Virgo or Pisces), the persons born 
will become insane. And they will become demoniac, and afflicted 
with moisture of the brain, if the Moon, being in face to the Sun, 
should be governed by Saturn when operating her conjunction, but by 
Mars when effecting her opposition; and particularly when it may 
happen in Sagittarius and in Pisces. 


+ Epilepsy is defined to be “a conclusive motion of the whole body, or some 
parts of its parts, accompanied with a loss of sense.” ‘The knowledge of this — 
latter effect probably induced the author to rank it among diseases of the mind. 

2 Of Mercury, the Moon, and the ascendant. 


CHAP. XIX. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 115 


If the malefics, only, should have ruled the scheme, in the manner 
described, the said disorders of the mind will become irremediable, 
although at the same time not eminent, but doubtful, and not openly 
displayed ; but, should the benefics, Jupiter and Venus, be conciliated, 
and be posited in eastern parts and in angles, while the malefics may be 
in western parts, the disorders, although highly conspicuous, will then 
be susceptible to cure. For instance, under Jupiter’s influence, they 
will be healed by means of medical or surgical aid, and by diet and medi- 
cine; under Venus, by the guidance of oracles and by divine inter- 
position. 

Should the benefics, however, be occidental, and the malefics be 
found in eastern parts and in angles, the disorders will then become 
not only incurable, but most conspicuous: the epileptic persons will 
then be subjected to constant fits, and to danger of death ; the insane 
will become outrageous and unmanageable, breaking away from their 
families, raving and wandering in nakedness: the demoniacs and those 
afflicted with moisture of the brain will become furious, uttering 
mysterious sayings, and wounding themselves. 

The several places of position in the scheme also afford co-operation : 
for instance, those of the Sun and Mars contribute to insanity ; those 
of Jupiter and Mercury, to epilepsy ; those of Venus, to the fury of 
enthusiasm ; and those of Saturn and the Moon, to demoniac affections 
and moisture of the brain. 

It is by such configurations, as those just described, that any morbid 
deviation, occurring in the active or reasoning faculties of the mind, is 
produced ; but a deviation of the passive, or merely sensitive faculties, 
is discernible chiefly in the excess and deficiency (as the case may be) of 
the masculine and feminine genders; that is to say, in the super- 
abundance, or deficiency, of the power of either gender, to produce a 
conformation agreeable to its own proper nature: and a knowledge of 
this latter deviation is to be acquired by means of the following rules. 

When the Sun, instead of Mercury, may be with the Moon, and if 
Mars, together with Venus, be then in familiarity with them, in that 
case, provided the luminaries only be found in masculine signs, men 
will excel in their nature, or, in other words, will possess in full plenitude 
the properties becoming their sex ; while the properties of women, who 
are thus constituted more masculinely and more actively, will deviate 
from the usual limits of nature. But, if both Mars and Venus, or if 
only one of them, be likewise masculinely situated, men will be freely 
and promptly inclined to natural intercourse and connexion; and 
women will be, in like manner, licentious and intemperate in inter- 
course beyond nature. Their desires will be practised in privacy, and 
not openly, should only Venus be situated masculinely ; but shame- 
lessly and publicly, if Mars also masculinely placed, together with 
Venus. 

But, if the luminaries only be in feminine signs, women will then 


116 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK III, _ 


possess their natural functions in greater plenitude, and men will 
deviate from the limits of nature towards effeminacy and wantonness. 
And, if Venus be femininely posited, women will be lustful and 
licentious, and men wanton and soft; seeking connexion contrary to 
nature; yet in privacy and not openly: but, if Mars be posited 
femininely, they will then put their desires in practice shamelessly and 
publicly. 

The oriental and diurnal positions of Mars and Venus also contribute 
to more masculine and more reputable qualities ; and their occidental 
and vespertine? positions to qualities more feminine, and more sordid. 

Lastly, if Saturn be in familiarity with them, he will likewise co- 
operate, by tending to produce greater impurity and obscenity, and 
greater evil altogether ; but Jupiter, if in familiarity, tends to greater 
decency and modesty, and altogether to better conduct ; and Mercury 
to greater mobility, diversity, activity, and notoriety of the passions. 


1 Kowepivot; perhaps, more properly, nocturnal; the word being used 
in contrast to ἡμερινοι, diurnal. 


Enp oF THE THtRD Book 


BOOK THE FOURTH 


CHAPTER I 
PROEM 


ἢ LL those circumstances have now been set forth, which occur 
vay previously to the birth, as well as at the actual birth, and after 
it, and which it seemed necessary to mention, as conducing 
toa Mnowledge of the general quality of the contemperament produced. 
And of the other points, now remaining, by which extrinsic events! are 
contemplated, those regarding the several fortunes of wealth and of 
rank claim to be taken first into consideration. Each of these fortunes 
has a distinct relationship ; for instance, that of wealth relates to the 
body, and that of rank to the mind. 


CHAPTER II 


THE FORTUNE OF WEALTH 


THE circumstances regulating the fortune of wealth are to be judged 
of from that part alone, which is expressly denominated the Part of 
Fortune ; the position of which is, in all cases, whether arising in the 
day or in the night, always as far removed from the ascendant as the 
Sun is distant from the Moon.? 

When the Part of Fortune has been determined, it must be ascer- 
tained to what planets the dominion of it belongs ; and their power and 
connexion, as also the power and connexion of others configurated with 
them, or in elevation above them, whether of the same or of an adverse 
condition, are then to be observed: for, if the planets which assume 
dominion of the Part of Fortune be in full force, they will create much 
wealth, and especially should the luminaries also give them suitable 
testimony in addition. 

In this manner, Saturn will effect the acquirement of wealth by 
means of buildings, agriculture, or navigation ; Jupiter, by holding some 
government, or office of trust, or by the priesthood; Mars, by the 
army and military command; Venus by means of friends, by the 


1 That is to say, such events as are independent of the will, and not neces- 


sarily consequent on any peculiar conformation of the mind or body. 
* Vide Chapter XIII of the 3rd Book. 


117 


118 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


dowry of wives, or by other gifts proceeding from women!; and 
Mercury by the sciences and by trade. 

Should Saturn, however, when thus in influence over the fortune of 
wealth, be also configurated with Jupiter, he particularly provides 
wealth through inheritance; especially, if the configuration should 
exist in the superior angles, Jupiter being also in a bicorporeal sign and 
receiving the application of the Moon ; for, in such a case, the native 
will also be adopted by persons unallied to him, and will become heir 
to their property. 

And, further, if other stars, of the same condition as those which 
rule the Part of Fortune, should likewise exhibit testimonies of domin- 
ion, the wealth will be permanent: but, on the other hand, if stars of 
an adverse condition should either be in elevation above the ruling 
places, or ascend in succession to them, the wealth will not continue. 
The general period of its duration is, however, to be calculated by 
means of the declination of the stars, which operate the loss, in respect 
of the angles and succedent houses.? 


CHAPTER III 
THE FORTUNE OF RANK 


Tue disposition of the luminaries and the respective familiarities, 
exercised by the stars attending them, are to be considered as indicative 
of the degree of rank or dignity.® 

For example, should the two luminaries be found in masculine signs 
and in angles, or even if only one of them be in an angle,* they being 
at the same time specially attended by a doryphory® composed of all 


1.1 have considered the words, γυναικείων δωρεων, as comprising “the 
dowry of wives,” as well as other “ gifts from women.” 

2 'That is to say, its duration will depend on the time requisite to complete 
the arc of direction or prorogation between the stars, operating the loss, and 
the places which give the wealth. And the calculation is to be made as pointed 
out in the 14th and 1§th Chapters of the 3rd Book. 

8 It seems that there have been different opinions on this point. Placidus 
makes the following remark on the subject: “1 do not take the dignities from 
the horoscope, but from the Sun and Medium Ceeli, according to Ptolemy 
and others.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 121.) 

4 The Perugio Latin, of 1646, says, “‘ If either both luminaries, or only that 
one of the chief quality’ (which Whalley defines to be the Sun by day, and 
the Moon by night) “ be in an angle,” &c. 

5 Doryphory. Vide Chapter V of the 3rd Book. On the present passage, 
Placidus has the following words: ‘‘ You are not to observe what is generally 
alleged by professors, respecting the satellites” (guast doryphory) “of the — 
luminaries, for dignities; viz. that the satellites are those planets which are 
found within 30°, on either side of the luminaries ; but that a satellite is [also] 


CHAP. III. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 119 


the five planets ; the Sun by such as are oriental, but the Moon by 
occidental, the persons then about to be born will consequently become 
kings or princes. And, if the attendant stars themselves should also be 
in angles, or configurated with the angle above the earth,! the said 
persons will become great, powerful, and mighty in the world: and 
even yet more abundantly so, provided the configurations, made by the 
attendant stars with the angles above the earth, be dexter,. But, when 
both luminaries may not be found in masculine signs as aforesaid, but the 
Sun only in a masculine and the Moon in a feminine sign, and only one 
ΟΥ̓ them posited in an angle, the other concomitant circumstances still 
existing in the mode above described, the persons about to be born will 
then become merely chieftains, invested with the sovereignty of life 
and death. 

And if the attendant stars, while the luminaries may be situated in 
the manner last-mentioned, should be neither actually in angles, nor 
bear any testimony to the angles, the persons then born, although they 
will still enjoy eminence, will attain only some limited dignity or 
distinction ; such as that of a delegated governor, or commander of an 
army, or dignitary of the priesthood; and they will not be invested 
with sovereignty. 

If, however, neither of the luminaries be in an angle, and it happen 
that most of the attendant stars be either themselves in angles, or 
configurated with the angles, the persons then born will not attain to 
any very eminent rank; yet they will take a leading part in ordinary 
civil and municipal affairs: but, should the attendant stars have no 
configuration with the angles, they will then remain altogether undis- 
tinguished and without advancement; and provided, further, that 
neither of the luminaries be found situated in a masculine sign, nor in an 
angle, nor be attended by any benefics, they will be born to complete 
obscurity and adversity. 

The general appearance of exaltation or debasement of rank is to be 
contemplated as before stated, but there are many gradations inter- 
mediate to those already specified, and requiring observation of the 
particular interchanges and variations, incidental to the luminaries 
themselves and their doryphory, and also to the dominion of the planets 


any kind of aspect of the stars to the luminaries of what kind soever : which, 
if it be made by application, its power extends inwardly over the whole orb 
of light of the aspecting planet, and the more so, as the proximity is greater ; 
but, by separation, it is not so. This doctrine may be seen in several chapters 
of Ptolemy; for, an aspecting star influences the significator, and disposes 
him to produce effects co-natural to him, by a subsequent direction. But a 
star of no aspect does not predispose the significator, and produces very little 
or no effect of its nature, by a subsequent direction ; this is the true doctrine 
of the stars.” (Cooper’s Translation, pp. 124, 125.) 
1 The angle of the mid-heaven ; see the first note to this Chapter. 


120 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


which compose their doryphory. For instance, should the benefics, or 
stars of the same condition, exercise the chief dominion, the dignities 
to be acquired will be not only important, but also more securely 
established ; and, on the other hand, if the chief dominion be claimed 
by the malefics, or by stars of an adverse condition, the dignities will 
be more subordinate, and more dangerous and evanescent. 

The species of dignity may be inferred by observing the peculiar 
qualities of the attendant stars. And, if Saturn have chief dominion of 
the doryphory, the power and authority derived therefrom will lead 
to wealth and profit: authority proceeding from Jupiter and Venus 
will be pleasurable, and attended by presents and honours: that pro- 
ceeding from Mars will consist in commanding armies, in obtaining 
victories, and in overawing the vanquished: and that proceeding from 
Mercury will be intellectual, superintending education and study, and 
directing the management of business. 


CHAPTER IV 
THE QUALITY OF EMPLOYMENT 


Tue dominion of the employment, or profession, is claimed in two 
quarters ; viz. by the Sun, and by the sign on the mid-heaven. 

It is, therefore, necessary to observe whether any planet may be 
making its oriental appearance nearest to the Sun, and whether any be 


posited in the mid-heaven ; especially, when also receiving the applica- 


tion of the Moon. And if one and the same planet possess both these 
qualifications, that is to say, make its nearest appearance to the Sun, and 
be also in the mid-heaven, that one alone must be elected to determine 
the present inquiry: and, likewise, though the planet should not be 
thus doubly qualified, but only singly, in whichever respect, even then 
that planet alone must still be elected provided itself alone should 
possess such single qualification. If, however, there should be one 
planet presenting its nearest appearance, and another in the mid- 
heaven conciliating the Moon, both must then be noticed; and which- 
ever of two may have greater sway, and possess greater rights of 
dominion, that one must be preferred. But where not any planet may 
be found so situated, neither making its appearance as above described, 
nor being in the mid-heaven, then that one, possessing the dominion of 
the mid-heaven,? is to be considered as lord of the employment : it is, 


1 See the 4th Chapter of the 8th Book of the Almagest inserted in the 
Appendix. 

2 The Greek says merely “‘ that one having the dominion,” without specify- 
ing the place of dominion : the Latin printed at Perugio, is, however, “‘ dominum 
accipe medii celt,”’ which is certainly the sense required by the tenor of the 
previous instructions. Whalley also has similarly rendered it. 


CHAP. Iv. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 121 


however, only some occasional occupation which can be thus denoted ; 
because persons, born under such a configuration, most commonly 
remain at leisure and unemployed. 

What has now been said, relates to the election of the lord of the 
employment or profession ; but the species of the employment will be 
distinguished by means of the respective properties of the three planets, 
Mars, Venus, and Mercury, and of the signs in which they may be 
posited. 

Mercury, for instance, produces writers, superintendents of business, 
accountants, teachers in the sciences, merchants and bankers: also, 
soothsayers, astrologers, and attendants on sacrifices, and, in short, all 
who live by the exercise of literature, and by furnishing explanation 
or interpretation ; as well as by stipend and salary, or allowance. If 
Saturn bear testimony jointly with Mercury, persons then born will 
become managers of the affairs of others, or interpreters of dreams, or 
will be engaged in temples for the purpose of divination, and for the 
sake of their fanaticism. But, if Jupiter join testimony, they will be 
painters, orators, or pleaders in argument, and occupied with eminent 
personages. 

Should Venus have dominion of the employment, she will cause 
persons to be engaged in the various perfumes of flowers, in unguents 
and wines, and also in colours, dyes, and in spices: thus she will pro- 
duce vendors of unguents, garland-makers,} wine-merchants, dealers in 
medical drugs, weavers, dealers in spices, painters, dyers, and vendors of 
apparel. If Saturn add his testimony to hers, he will cause persons to 
be employed in matters belonging to amusement and decoration ; and 
will also produce jugglers, scorcerers and charlatans, and all such as 
practise similarly. But, if Jupiter join testimony with Venus, persons 
will become prize-wrestlers, and garland-wearers,* and will be advanced 
in honour through female interest. 

Mars, ruling the employment, and being configurated with the Sun, 
will produce persons who operate by means of fire; for instance, 
cooks, as well as those who work in copper, brass, and other metals, by 


1 Among the ancients, a garland was an indispensable decoration at all 
public ceremonies, whether civil or religious, and at private banquets. The 
making of garlands was, therefore, a considerable employment. 

2 It would seem, from “ garland-wearers”’ being placed here in connection 
with “ prize-wrestlers”? (αθληται), that the author intended to point out 
persons competent to obtain the victors’ wreath in public exhibitions. But 
it appears that the word σεφανηῴφορος, garland-wearer, also signifies a person 
who was annually chosen by the priests to superintend religious ceremonies, 
an office similar to that of high priest. According to Athenzus, the 
Stephanephorus of Tarsos was invested with a purple tunic, edged or 
striped with white, and wore the laurel chaplet, which Plato, in the treatise 
de Legibus, describes as being constantly worn by these officers, although the 
other priests wore it only during the performance of the ceremonies. 


122 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


melting, burning, and casting: if Mars be separated from the Sun, he 
will make shipwrights, smiths, agriculturists, stonemasons, carpenters, 
and subordinate labourers. If Saturn bear testimony, in addition to 
Mars, persons will decome mariners, workers in wells, vaults or mines, 
painters, keepers of beasts or cattle, cooks or butchers, and attendants 
on baths or on exhibitions. And, if Jupiter join testimony, they will 
be soldiers, or mechanics, collectors of revenue, inn-keepers, toll- 
gatherers, or attendants on sacrifices. 

Further, should it happen that two arbiters of employment may be 
found together, and provided they should be Mercury and Venus, they 
will then produce musicians, melodists, and persons engaged in music, 
poetry, and songs: they will also produce (especially if changed in 
their places)1, mimics, actors, dealers in slaves, makers of musical 
instruments, choristers and musical performers, dancers, weavers, 
modellers in wax, and painters. And if Saturn join testimony with 
Mercury and Venus, the preparation and sale of female ornaments will 
be added to the aforesaid occupations. But, if Jupiter give testimony, 
the persons will become administrators of justice, guardians of public 
affairs, instructors of youth, and magistrates of the people. 

Should Mercury and Mars together be lords of the employment, 
persons will become statuaries, armour-makers, sculptors,? modellers of 
animals, wrestlers, surgeons, spies or informers, adulterers, busy in 
crime, and forgers. And, if Saturn also bear testimony in addition to 
Mercury and Mars, he will produce assassins, highwaymen, thieves, 
robbers lurking in ambush, marauders on cattle, and swindlers. But, if 
Jupiter afford testimony, he will engage persons in honourable warfare, 
and in industry; making them cautious and diligent in business, 
curious in foreign matters, and deriving profit from their pursuits. 

When Venus and Mars exercise the dominion together, persons will 
become dyers, dealers in unguents and perfumes, workers in tin, lead, 
gold, and silver, mock combatants or dancers in armour, dealers in 
medical drugs, agriculturists, and physicians, healing by means of 
medicine. Ande if Saturn add testimony to Venus and Mars, he will 
produce persons attendant on animals consecrated to religion; also 
grave-diggers and undertakers, mourners and musicians at funerals, and 
fanatics occupied in religious ceremonies, lamentations, and blood. 
But, if Jupiter add testimony, the persons will become regulators of 
sacrifices, augurs, holders of sacred offices, governors placed over 
women, and interpreters; and they will derive support from such 
occupations. 

The properties of the signs, in which the lords of the employment 
may be posited, are also influential in varying the employment. For 


1 Meaning probably “if in mutual reception,” which position has been 
before explained. 
2 Or makers of hieroglyphics—uepoyAvqor. 


CHAP. IV. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 123 


example, the signs of human shape promote all scientific pursuits, and 
such as are of utility to mankind ; the quadrupedal signs contribute to 
produce employment among metals, in business and trade, in house- 
building, and in the work of smiths and mechanics: the tropical and 
equinoctial signs tend to give employment in translation or interpreta- 
tion, in matters of exchange, in mensuration and agriculture, and in 
religious duties: the terrestrial and watery signs tend to employment 
in water, and in connection with water, as well in regard to the nurture 
of plants, as to ship-building ; they likewise contribute to employment 
in funerals, in embalming and preserving, and also in salt. 

Moreover, should the Moon herself actually occupy the place 
regulating the employment,! and, after her conjunction, continue in 
course with Mercury, being at the same time in Taurus, Capricorn, or 
Cancer, she will then produce soothsayers, attendants on sacrifices, and 
‘diviners by the basin.? If she be in Sagittarius or Pisces, she will make 
necromancers, and evokers of demons : ifin Virgo or Scorpio, magicians, 
astrologers, and oracular persons, possessing prescience: and, if in 
Libra, Aries, or Leo, she will produce fanatics, interpreters of dreams, 
and makers of false vows and adjurations. 

From the foregoing rules, the various forms of employment are to be 
inferred ; and its magnitude or importance will be manifested by the 
existing power of the ruling planets. For instance, if the said planets be 
oriental, or in angles, they will give the person eminence and authority 
in his employment ; but, if occidental or cadent, they will render him 
subordinate. And should the benefics be in elevation, the employment 
will be important, lucrative, secure, honourable, and agreeable ;_ but, 
on the other hand, if the siiglofl os be i in elevation above the lords of the 
employment, it will then be mean, disreputable, unprofitable, and 
insecure: thus, Saturn brings an adverse influence in coldness or 
tardiness, and in the composition or mixture of colours?; and Mars 


1 That is to say, the mid-heaven; as stated in the 4th Chapter of the 
3rd Book, and in the commencement of the present Chapter. 

2 This mode of divination, as practised by the Greeks, is mentioned by 
Potter. It is likewise described by a learned Doctor of Medicine, Geo. Pictorius 
Vigillanus (in his Treatise “de Speciebus Μαρίας: Ceremonialis,” printed at 
Strasburgh, 1531), as being used “when the fraudulent vanity of a demon 
renders things more like each other than eggs are to eggs.” And, according 
to this writer, it is practised by exorcising water, and pouring it into a basin, 
wherein the vain and refractory demon is immersed: the said demon will 
sometimes remain at the bottom, and sometimes raise himself to the surface, 
sending forth a slender hissing ; out of which the desired responses are to be 
formed. 

® Κρασεσι των xpwyatwv.—These words have been rendered literally, but 
they seem to contain some figurative meaning, rather than a literal one. 
Perhaps the preferable sense of them is, “ by a mixture of views,” or “from various 
pursuits being blended together.” 


124 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [Book Iv. 


produces opposition by audacity and publicity in enterprise: and both 
planets are alike hostile to proficiency and prosperity. 

The general period, at which any increase or diminution of the 
employment may take place, must, again in this case also, be determined 
by the disposition of the stars, which operate the effect towards the 
oriental and occidental angles. 


CHAPTER V 
MARRIAGE 


Tue consideration of circumstances relating to marriage, or the co- 
habitation of husband and wife, as sanctioned by law, succeeds to the 
foregoing details, and must be pursued in the following method. 
With regard to men, it is to be observed in what manner the Moon 
may be disposed ; for, in the first place, if she be found in the oriental 
quadrants, she will cause men either to marry early in life, or, after 
having over-passed their prime, to marry young women ; “ but, should 
she be situated in either of the occidental quadrants, men will then 
marry either late in life, or to women advanced in age!” : and if she be 
found under the Sun’s beams, and configurated with Saturn, she then 
entirely denies marriage. Secondly, should she be in a sign of single 
form, and in application to only one of the planets, she will cause men 
to marry only once; but, if she be in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, 
or in application to several planets, she will cause them to be married 
several times; and, provided also that the planets, which thus, either 
by adjacency or by testimony,? receive her application, be benefic, men 
will then obtain good wives ; but if, on the contrary, the said planets be 
malefic, bad. For example, if Saturn receive the Moon’s application, 
the wives whom he will provide will be troublesome and morose ; but, 
if Jupiter receive it, they will be decorous and economical; if Mars, 
bold and refractory; if Venus, cheerful, handsome, and agreeable ; 
and, if Mercury, sensible, prudent, and clever. Moreover, should 
Venus be found connected with Jupiter, Saturn,? or Mercury, she will 
render wives provident, and attached to their husbands and children ; 
but, if she be found connected with Mars, they will be irascible, 
unsteady, andindiscreet. ‘Thus far in reference to the marriage of men. 
But, in the case of women, the Sun must be observed, instead of the 
Moon: and, should he be posited in the oriental quadrants, women 
will be married either in their own youth, or to men younger than 


1 The words marked with inverted commas are not in the Greek; they 
are found, however, in two Latin translations; that of Basle, 1541, and that 
of Perugio, 1646. 

2 In other Editions, “‘ whether by conjunction or aspect.” 

8 “Saturn.” Not found in the Elzevir edition, but in others. 


= 


CHAP. V. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 125 


themselves ; but, if he be in the occidental quadrants, they will either 
be married late in life, or to men who have passed their prime, and are 
advanced in years. And should the Sun be in a sign of single form, or 
configurated with only one oriental planet, he will cause them to enter 
into matrimony only once ; but, if in a bicorporeal or multiform sign, 
or configurated with several oriental planets, he will then cause them 
to be often married. And Saturn, being configurated with the Sun, 
will provide husbands steadfast, advantageous, and industrious ; 
Jupiter, such as are honourable and noble-minded; Mars, severe 
husbands void of affection and intractable ; Venus, amiable and hand- 
some husbands; and Mercury, such as are provident and expert in 
business. But, if Venus be found connected with Saturn, she will 
indicate dull and timid husbands ; “ if with Jupiter, the husbands will 
be good, just, and modest! ; ” if with Mars, hasty, lustful, and adulter- 
ous; and if with Mercury, they will be extravagantly desirous of 
young persons. 

In regard to the Sun, those quadrants which precede the ascending 
and descending points of the zodiac, and, in respect of the Moon, those 
which are measured from her conjunction and opposition? to her 
intermediate quarters, are called oriental quadrants: the occidental 
quadrants are, of course, those lying opposite to the oriental. 

Whenever both nativities, viz. that of the husband and that of the 
wife, may exhibit the luminaries configurated together in concord, that 
Is to say, either in trine or in sextile to each other, the cohabitation will 
most usually be lasting ; especially if the said concord exist by means 
of interchange*; but its duration will be also much more securely 
established, provided the Moon in the husband’s nativity should corre- 
spond or agree with the Sun in the wife’s nativity. If, however, the 
relative positions of the luminaries be in signs inconjunct, or in opposi- 
tion, or in quartile, the cohabitation will be speedily dissolved upon 
slight causes, and the total separation of the parties will ensue. 

And should the configuration of the luminaries, when made in con- 
cord, be aspected by the benefics, the cohabitation will continue in 
respectability, comfort, and advantage; but, on the other hand, it 
will abound in strife, contention, and misfortune, if the malefics be in 
aspect to the said configuration. 

In like manner, even though the luminaries may not be favourably 


1 The words thus marked “‘ ” are not found in the Elzevir edition, but 
appear in the Latin one of Basle, 1541. 

2 [leps παιδας επιθυμητικους. 

3 That is to say, from the new and the full Moon. 

4 By mutual recepton ; according to Whalley, and also according to the 
Latin copy of Perugio, 1646. | 

5 Meaning, probably, if the Moon in the husband’s nativity should be in 
the same position as the Sun in the wife’s nativity, or harmoniously configurated 
with that position. 


126 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


configurated in concord, should the benefics still offer testimony to 
them, the cohabitation will then not be entirely broken off, nor totally 
destroyed for ever, but will be again renewed, and re-established as 
before. Butif, on the contrary, the malefics bear testimony to such 
discordant disposition of the luminaries, a dissolution of the cohabita- 
tion will take place, accompanied by scorn and injury. Should Mercury 
alone be conjoined with the malefics, it will be effected by means of 
some public inculpation ; and if Venus also be found with them, it will 
be on the ground of adultery, or sorcery, or some similar offence. 

There are, however, other varieties in the married state, which are 
to be contemplated by means of Venus, Mars, and Saturn. And should 
these planets act in familiarity with the luminaries, the cohabitation 
will be appropriate and domestic, and authorised by law; because 
Venus holds a certain affinity both to Mars and Saturn: her affinity to 
Mars, for instance, consists in each having exaltation in a sign belonging 
to the other’s triplicity,! and it operates in the cases of youthful and 
vigorous persons: while her affinity to Saturn arises from their 
respective houses being in the signs, again also, belonging to each 
other’s triplicity,? and relates to persons of more advanced age. 

Hence, if Venus be in concurrence with Mars, she will produce entire 
love and affection in the cohabiting parties; and if Mercury also 
coincide with the said planets, such affection will become publicly 
notorious. Should Venus be found in a sign mutually common and 
familiar, such as Capricorn, or Pisces,’ she will effect marriages between 
brothers and sisters and kindred by blood: and, provided she be also in 
the presence of the Moon, when the native may be male, she will cause 
him to connect himself with two sisters, or other near relatives; but, 
if the native be a female, a similar contract on her part, with two 
brothers or near relatives, will be indicated, when Venus may be also 
with Jupiter.* 

Again, if Venus be with Saturn, the cohabitation will be established 
entirely in happiness and constancy ; and if Mercury be present with 
them, it will be profitable; but, should Mars be present, it will be 
unsettled, calamitous, and afflicted by jealousy. And if Mars be con- 
figurated on equal terms with Venus, Saturn, and Mercury, he will 
effect marriage between persons of equal age; but, on the other hand, 
should he be more oriental, marriage will take place with a younger man 
or woman; and, if more occidental, with an older person. Should 
Venus and Saturn be found in signs common to each other, that is to 


1 The exaltation of Venus being in Pisces, and that of Mars in Capricorn. 
Vide Chapters XXJ and XXII, Book I. 


2 Libra being Venus’s house, and in Saturn’s triplicity;: and Capricorn 
g ἢ Ρ Y> tr 


being Saturn’s house, and in Venus’s triplicity. Vide Chapters XX and XXI, 
Book I. 


* Vide Note in p. 126. 4 Instead of the Moon. 


ee ON ae 


CHAP. V. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 127 


say, in Capricorn and Libra,! marriage will be contracted between 
persons kindred by blood: and, when the said position may happen in 
the ascendant, or in the mid-heaven, provided the Moon also should 
present herself there, men will become connected with their mothers, 
or maternal aunts, or with their mothers-in-law; and women with 
their own sons, or the sons of their brothers, or with their daughters’ 
husbands. But if, instead of the Moon, the Sun should be in con- 
currence with the said position, and especially should it happen that 
the planets in question may be occidental, men will then connect 
thenselves with their daughters, or the wives of their sons ; and women 
with their fathers, or paternal uncles, or the husbands of their daughters. 
When the aforesaid configurations,? although not existing in signs 
of affinity to each other,* should be found in feminine places, they will 
render the parties obscene, lustful and shameless ; for instance, when 
found in the anterior and hinder parts of Aries, and’near the Hyades of 
Taurus, about the urn of Aquarius, in the hinder parts of Leo, and in 
the face of Capricorn. And should the last-named planets, Venus and 
Saturn, be posited in angles, they will then, if posited in the first two 
angles, the eastern and southern, produce a total exposure of the 
passions, and cause them to be publicly canvassed ; but, if in the last 
two angles, the western and northern, they will produce eunuchs, or 
persons unprolific, and not possessing the proper channels of nature. 
The passions, liable to operate in males, are to be considered by 
observation of Mars: for should he be separated from Venus and Saturn, 
but yet, at the same time, be supported by the testimony of Jupiter, 
he will make men pure and decorous in sexual intercourse, and incline 
them to natural usages only: and, if he attach himself to Saturn only, 
he will render them cold in blood and dull in appetite; if, however, 
when Saturn and Mars may be thus connected together, Venus and 
Jupiter should also be configurated with them, men will then become 
easily excited and eager in desire, although they will still be continent, 
and restrain themselves in order to avoid reproach. But should Saturn 
be absent, and Mars be with Venus alone, or even although Jupiter 
also be with her, men will become highly licentious, and attempt to 
gratify their desires in every mode.* And further, if Venus be found 


1 Vide Note 3 in p. 126. 2 Of the planets before specified. 

8 These are such signs as are connected with each other in any manner 
similar to that before described, as connecting Capricorn with Pisces, and with 
Libra ; or, in other words, signs common to the planets configurated. 

4 The following also occurs here: “‘ καὶ εἰ μεν o εἰς τωνασερων δυτικος, o δε 
ETEPOS avaToALKos ἐσι, καὶ προς ανδρας και γυναῖκας erovTaL διακείμενοι, OVX’ 
υπερβολικως δε, εἰ δε αμφοτεροι οἱ acepes δυτικοι ευρεθωσι, προς povov Τὸ 
θηλυ εἐσονται Karadepers. θηλυκων δὲ των ζωδιων vrapxovTwv εν οἷς οἱ 
αἀσερες, καὶ αὐτοι παοχειν ἀνεξονται ta Tov OnAvos. εἰ δὲ αμῴοτεροι 
᾿ανατολικοι wot, προς μονον To appev ερμητικως εξουσι. τῶν δὲ ζωδιὼν 
APTEVLKWY οντων, προς πασαν αρσενικὴν ynALKLaY.” 


128 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


more occidental, men will connect themselves with low women, 
female servants, and aliens or vagabonds; but, should Mars be found 
occidental, with women of rank, and gentlewomen; or with women 
living with their husbands, or under the protection of men. Thus 
far with regard to males. 

In the case of females, Venus requires attention: for, if she be 
configurated with Jupiter, or with Mercury, she will cause women to be 
temperate and pure in sexual intercourse; still, however, when she 
may be thus connected with Mercury, if Saturn be not present also, 
she will cause them to be easily excited to desire; although they will 
control their desires, and avoid reproach. But, should Venus be 
conjoined or configurated with Mars alone, she will render women 
licentious and lustful; and if, to both these planets, when thus con- 
joined or configurated, Jupiter also present himself, Mars being at the 
same time under the rays of the Sun, women will then mingle in 
intercourse with servants, and persons meaner than themselves, or 
with aliens, or vagabonds: but, should it happen that Venus may be 
under the rays of the Sun, they will then connect themselves with their 
superiors or masters. And, further, should the planets be in feminine 
places, or configurated femininely, they will be content with their 
passive faculties only.? 

Saturn, in being conciliated with such positions as those now de- 
scribed, tends to produce greater obscenity ; Jupiter, greater decency ; 
and Mercury, greater publicity, and greater fickleness, or instability. 


CHAPTER VI 
CHILDREN 


THE next point to be investigated is that concerning children: and, to 
accomplish this, observation must be made of the planets posited in, 
or configurated with the place on the zenith,? or its succedent house, 
which latter is called the place of the good demon. And should it 
happen that not any planets may be present in the said places, nor 
configurated with them, it will then be necessary to take into considera- 
tion such as may be in opposition thereto. 

Now the Moon, Jupiter, and Venus are esteemed as givers of off- 
spring; but the Sun, Mars, and Saturn are considered as denying 
children altogether, or as allowing but few: while Mercury, being in 
quality common to both parties, lends co-operation to that with which 
he may be configurated, and gives offspring, when oriental, but with- 
holds, when occidental. 


1 ΤῸ this the following sentence succeeds: eav δὲ appevixws διακείμενοι 
ωσιν Ot GO Epes, και προς TO TOLELV, 
2 The angle of the mid-heaven. 


CHAP. VI.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 129 


To speak briefly, if the planets, which grant progeny, be so posited 
as described, and placed singly, the gift of progeny will be single only? ; 
but should they be in bicorporeal or in feminine signs, they will grant 
double offsprings*: so likewise if they should be in prolific or seminal 
signs, such as Pisces, Cancer, and Scorpio, they will grant twins, or 
even more. And provided they should also be masculinely constituted, 
as well by configuration with the Sun, as by being in masculine signs, 
they will grant male children ; but otherwise, if femininely constituted, 
female. 

But, although the said planets, even if beneath the malefics in 
elevation, or, even if found in barren places, or in signs such as those of 
Leo and Virgo, will still grant children; yet such children, thus in- 
dicated, will neither be healthy, nor continue in life. Should it happen, 
however, that the Sun and the malefics may be in entire possession of the 
places above mentioned, viz. that on the zenith, or the succedent house 
allotted to the good demon ; and provided they be, at the same time, 
in masculine or barren signs, and the benefics be not in elevation above 
them, a total privation of offspring is thereby indicated ; but, should 
they be in feminine or prolific signs, or supported by the testimony of 
the benefics, children will then be granted; yet they will be liable 
to disease, and short-lived. 

If, however, planets of each condition should be configurated with, 
and-have prerogative in prolific signs, there will then ensue a loss of 
either all the children, or only few, or else the major part of them ; in 
the same proportion as that in which the planets, bearing testimony to 
either condition, may preponderate on one side rather than the other ; 
by excelling in number, or in influence, in consequence of being posited 
more orientally, more genuinely in angles, higher in elevation, or 
successively ascending. 

When the lords of the aforesaid signs may be such as are givers of 
offspring, and be either oriental, or in places proper to themselves, 
the children thus granted will become eminent and illustrious: but, 
if occidental, or in places not proper to themselves, the children will 
then become undistinguished and abject. Should the said lords also be 
in concord with the part of fortune, and with the ascendant, they will 
render the children amiable, and cause them to be beloved by their 
parents, and to inherit their parents’ substance: but, if found incon- 
junct, and not in concord with the said parts, the children will then 
become odious and mischievous to their parents, and will forfeit the 
inheritance of their substance. 


1 The meaning, apparent from the commencement of the chapter, is this : 
‘Should such planets be in the mid-heaven or its succedent house, or con- 
figurated with either.” 2 Μοναδικην, single, or one at a birth. 

3. Διδυμογωνιαν, double, or two at a birth. 

4 That on the mid-heaven, and that on the eleventh house. 


130 PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS [BOOK IVv.. 


Further, should the planets which grant progeny be appropriately 
configurated with each other, they will promote brotherly love, and | 
mutual regard and affection among the children; but, if inconjunct, 
or in opposition, they will excite in them mutual hatred, deceit, and 
treachery. 

The general investigation regarding children is to be conducted in 
the foregoing method: but, in order to enquire into particular cir- 
cumstances consequent on the above, it will be necessary to assume, as 
an ascendant, the position of each planet which gives offspring, and to 
observe the separate schemes; drawing inferences therefrom as in 
the case of a nativity. 


CHAPTER VII 
FRIENDS AND ENEMIES 


Wiru respect to friendship and enmity, it may be observed that great 
and lasting familiarities, or disagreements, are respectively called 
sympathies and enmities ; while the smaller, such as arise occasionally, 
and subsist for a short time only, are denominated casual intimacies 
and strifes: the whole are to be contemplated according to the following 
rules. 

Indications of great and lasting friendships, or enmities, may be 
perceived by observation of the ruling places, exhibited in the respective 
nativities of both the persons, between whom the friendship or enmity 
may subsist. It is consequently essential to observe the places of the 
Sun, the Moon, the ascendant, and the part of fortune; for, should 
all these in both nativities be in the same signs, or should either all or 
most of them be counterchanged in position in each nativity, and 
especially should the two ascendants be within the distance of seven- 
teen degrees from each other,! they will create fixed and indissoluble 
friendship. On the other hand, should they be in signs inconjunct, or 
in opposition, they will produce great and lasting enmity. If, however, 
they be not constituted in either of the modes above mentioned, but 
merely configurated in signs,? they will then produce minor friendship ; 
provided such configuration exist by trine or sextile; but, if by quartile, 
they will excite minor enmity, so as to take effect at certain particular 
times, in which the friendship remains, as it were, inactive and subdued, 
while the malefics transit the configuration: and, in a similar manner, 
enmity also will be softened and abated, when the benefics may enter 
upon the configuration. 


1 Or, regard each other within the distance of seventeen degrees. 

2 That is to say; if the places of the Sun, &c., in one nativity be con- 
figurated with such parts of the zodiac as are occupied by the Sun, &c., in the 
other nativity. 

3. Of any of the four places above described. 


\ 


CHAP. VII. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 131 


The friendship and enmity, which men bear towards each other, may 
be classed under three general heads. One kind is suggested by spon- 
taneous wilfulness; another, by the idea of profit; and another, by 
pain and pleasure mutually excited. 

And, therefore, should either all or most of the aforesaid places be 
in familiarity with each other, friendship of all the three kinds will be 
established : so, also, should the places be entirely without familiarity, 
similar enmity will be established. If, however, familiarity, or absence 
of familiarity (as the case may be), exist only as regards the places of the 
luminaries, friendship or enmity will then be established by spontaneous 
will ; and friendship thus produced is the best and most secure; while, 
on the other hand, enmity so arising is, in like manner, the worst and 
most dangerous, The friendship, or enmity, consequent on the familiar- 
ity or non-familiarity of the respective parts of Fortune, will be estab- 
lished on the idea of profit ; and that, consequent on a similar disposi- 
tion of the respective ascendants, will arise from pain or pleasure 
mutually excited between the parties. 

It will, however, be necessary to pay still further attention to the 
places in question, in order to observe whether any and what planets 
may be in elevation above them, or in aspect to them ; because, among 
all the said places, that particular one, to which any planet in elevation, 
or in succession, may be adjacent, whether in the same sign, or in the 
next, will possess the more powerful influence over friendship or enmity : 
and whichever place may have its aspecting planets more powerfully 
benefic, will operate in a greater degree! to advantage in friendship, 
and to the relaxation of enmity. The foregoing instructions are 
applicable to such friendships or enmities as are great and lasting. 

But, in the case of others, which subsist only occasionally, and which 
have been defined as casual intimacies and strifes, it is essential to make 
observation of the motions of the planets, as exhibited by each nativity ; 
that is to say, the times are to be calculated, on the completion of 
which the motions of the planets of one nativity will cause them to 
enter on certain places of the other nativity ; for it is at such periods 
that certain particular friendships and enmities occur, continuing for 
a short time, until the said ingress of the planets shall have passed over. 

For instance, Saturn and Jupiter, when making ingress upon each 
other’s places, produce friendship by certain agreements, or engage- 
ments, relating either to agriculture or to inheritance: Saturn and 
Mars create contention and treachery spontaneously entertained : 
Saturn and Venus, friendship between kindred ; liable, however, soon 
to grow cool: Saturn and Mercury, friendship on account of business, 
or profit, or some secret art or mystery. 

Jupiter and Mars create friendship in the direction of affairs, and by 
means of dignities ; Jupiter and Venus also create friendship by means 


1 ‘Than the rest of the places. 


132 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


of female persons, or attendants on religion, or on oracles: Jupiter and 
Mercury, friendship by means of eloquence and science, and philo- 
sophical inclinations. 

Mars and Venus cause friendship in the course of amours, adultery, — 
and fornication: Mars and Mercury excite hatred and strife by 
offences committed in business and trade, or by sorcery. 

And Venus and Mercury produce communion by means of the arts 
and sciences, by a mutual interest in literature, or by female persons. 

It is in this manner that the planets operate in producing friendship 
or enmity. And their comparative intensity or relaxation of vigour is 
to be distinguished by the situation of the places, which they occupy, 
with regard to the four principal and ruling places!: for, should they 
be posited in angles, at the places of the respective parts of Fortune, or 
at those of the luminaries, they will render the casual intimacies or 
strifes more eminent and remarkable; but, if they be remote from 
these places, their effects will not be highly conspicuous. The com- 
parative degree of injury or advantage, liable to be received, is to be 
discerned by means of the good or evil properties of such planets as 
may be thus in aspect to the aforesaid places. 

With respect to servants,” the sign of the evil demon? is considered as 
the place to which the disposition ruling over them must be referred ; 
and it is to be observed what planets are in aspect to that place, both at 
the actual time of nativity, and at that of any ingresses made upon it, 
or oppositions to it; and also, especially, whether the lords of the said 
sign may be configurated in familiarity with the ruling places of the 
nativity, or not in familiarity. 


CHAPTER VIII 


TRAVELLING 


Tue circumstances indicative of travel are to be considered by means 
of the situation held by both the luminaries, in respect to the angles, and 
especially, by means of that held by the Moon. For, should she be 
descending, or cadent from the angles, she will cause journeys and changes 
of residence: Mars, also, if descending, or cadent from the zenith, 
will sometimes do the same, provided he may occupy a situation in 
quartile, or in opposition to the luminaries. And, if the part of Fortune, 
also, should happen to be placed in signs which produce travelling, the 
course and practice of the whole life will be engaged in foreign lands. 


1 Those of the Sun, Moon, Ascendant, and part of Fortune, as before 
mentioned. 

2 “and the attachment, or disagreement, subsisting between them 
and their masters ” ;—so Allatius, and the Latin translation printed at Perugio. 

3 The twelfth house. 


CHAP. VIII. ] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 133 


And further, provided the benefics superintend the aforesaid places, 
or ascend in succession to them, the engagements abroad will be honour- 
able and lucrative, and the return home speedy and unobstructed : 
but if, on the contrary, the malefics superintend or ascend in succession 
to those places, the journey outward will then lead to peril and mis- 
fortune, and the return will be replete with difficulty. But it is, at the 
same time, necessary in all cases to consider the contemperament also, and 
to observe such of the existing configurations as are more predominant. 

It most usually happens, that, if the luminaries be posited in the 
cadent houses of the oriental quadrants, the travel will take place in the 
eastern or southern quarters of the world ; and that, if placed in western 
situations, or in an occidental quadrant, travel will be then prosecuted 
in the northern or western parts. And, should the signs, which operate 
travel, be themselves single in form, or should the planets, having 
dominion of them, be singly posited, the journeys will then take place 
after long intervals, and occasionally only: but, if the said signs be 
bicorporeal, or double in form or figure, travel will be constantly 
repeated and continued. 

Thus, when Jupiter and Venus may be in dominion over the lumin- 
aries, and over the places producing travel, they will render the journeys 
agreeable, as well as free from danger: for the traveller will be joy- 
fully forwarded on his way by the magistrates of the country, and by the 
concurrent assistance of friendly persons ; the state of the atmosphere 
will also be favourable, and he will meet with abundance of accommoda- 
tion. And, provided Mercury also be present with the planets above- 
specified, utility, profit, presents and honours will likewise be derived 
from the journey. 

Saturn and Mars, if controlling the luminaries, and, especially, if 
placed distant from each other, will produce great dangers, and at the 
same time render the journey fruitless and unavailing. Should they be 
in watery signs, the dangers will arise by shipwreck, or among deserts 
and wilderness? ; if in fixed signs, by precipices, and adverse blasts of 
wind ; in tropical and equinoctial signs, by want of food and other 
necessaries, and by some unwholesome state of the atmosphere; in 
signs of human form, by robbery, treachery, and various depredations ; 
and, if in terrestrial signs, by the attack of wild beasts, or from earth- 
quakes. And, should Mercury also lend concurrence, the traveller will 
incur further danger from accusations made against him, as well as 
from reptiles and venomous stings or bites. 

The question, whether the events will be advantageous or injurious 
in quality, must, however, be further considered by observation (made 


1 The probable meaning is, “if not acting in concert”: but the Latin 
of Perugio says, ““ἱ sint oppositt secundum longitudinem.” 

2 There seems a misprint here in the original: δυσωδίων, “ foul vapours,” 
instead of δυσοδων, “ wildernesses.” 


134 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BOOK Iv. 


in the forms already detailed), of the peculiar properties of the places, 


in which the lords of employment, of wealth, of the body, or of rank, 


may be posited. And the periods, at which travelling will take place, 
are to be considered by the occasional ingress of the five planets.+ 


CHAPTER IX 


THE KIND OF DEATH 


It now remains to treat of the kind and species of death. It is, however, — 
first to be determined, by the rules already delivered regarding the dura- — 


tion of life,2 whether death will ensue from an oriental or occidental 
position of the predominating influence. And, if death ensue from some 


oriental position, or meeting of rays, the place of such meeting must — 


be observed, and by means of that place the kind of death is to be dis- 
tinguished ; if from the descension, or setting, of the significator, or 


prorogator, the place of descension® must be considered: because death — 
is to be expected conformable in character to the influences, whatever — 


they may be, which preside over the said places ; or, if not any influences 
should directly preside, it will then be conformable to the influences, of 
whatever kind, which may be brought first in succession to the places in 


question: the configuration of the stars, the property of the aforesaid — 
anzretic places, and the nature of the signs and of the terms,? are, also, — 


all of them co-operative. 
Thus, for example, if the dominion of death be vested in Saturn, he 
will produce death by means of lingering diseases ; cough, rheumatism, 


flux, ague, disorder of the spleen, dropsy, colic, and complaints in the © 
womb ; and, in short, by all such diseases as proceed from the super- — 


abundance of cold. 
Jupiter effects death by quinsey, inflammation of the lungs, apoplexy, 


spasm, pains in the head, morbid performance of the heart, and by all — 
diseases arising from the superabundance of air, and from immoderate ~ 


and impure respiration. 
Mars causes death by constant fevers, semitertians, sudden and 
spontaneous wounds, diseases of the kidneys, expectoration of blood, 


and hemorrhages of various kinds; by miscarriage, or abortion, and 


by childbirth, by erysipelas, and, in short, by such diseases as proceed 


from abundant and immediate heat. 
Venus produces death by disorders of the stomach, and of the liver, 


1 On the places indicative of travelling. 

2 Vide the 14th Chapter of the 3rd Book; on the number of the modes 
of prorogation. 

8 That is to say, the sign and degree on the occidental horizon. 


4 See a subsequent note, p. 135, which gives an instance of the mode in 


which, Placidus applied the power of the terms, in an anzretic direction. 


_ CHAP. IX.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 135 


by scurvy and dysentry: also by consumption or wasting away,! and by 
fistula and poison, and by all diseases incident on the superabundance 
or poverty of moisture, and its corruption. 

Lastly, Mercury causes death to proceed from fury, madness, 
melancholy, epilepsy, falling fits, coughs, and obstructions, and by such 
diseases as arise from superabundant or disproportionate dryness. 

When the lords of death may fully possess their own peculiar and 
natural properties, and when neither of the malefics may be in elevation 
above them, death will ensue in the modes above detailed, and in the 
ordinary course of nature. But a violent and remarkable death will 
occur when both the malefics, either in conjunction, or in quartile or 
Opposition to each other, may be lords of the anzretic places; or if 
both, or only one of the two, should attack either both the luminaries, 
or even only the Sun or the Moon. Insucha case, the evil character 
of the death will proceed from the concurrence of the malefic influence, 
and its magnitude or remarkable nature from the additional testimony 
of the luminaries: its quality, also, will be known by means of the rest 
of the planets and stars in configuration, and by the signs which contain 
the malefic influence.? 

Hence, if it happen that Saturn be in fixed signs, and in quartile or 
opposition to the Sun, and contrary in condition, he will produce death 
by suffocation, occasioned either by multitudes of people, or by hanging 
or strangulation : so, likewise, should he be occidental, and the Moon 
be succedent to him, he will operate the same effects. If he be posited 
in places or signs of bestial form, the native will be destroyed by wild 
beasts: and, if Jupiter also offer testimony, being at the same time 
badly afflicted, the death will then occur in public, and by day; for 
example, by being exposed to combats with wild beasts. If Saturn be 
posited in opposition to either of the luminaries in the ascendant,* he 


1 Ava σηψεων. Perhaps more properly, putridity or rottenness. The 
Perugio Latin translation renders it by “‘ cancer.” 

2 Placidus, in treating of the nativity of Lewis, Cardinal Zachia, uses these 
words: “This example also teaches us what the sentiments of Ptolemy were 
concerning a violent death ; when, in a peremptory place, both the enemies 
meet together, it is to be understood, that in the nativity the violence is some- 
times first preordained from the unfortunate position of the Apheta ; at other 
times quite the contrary. But, because the direct direction happened to be 
in the terms of Mercury, the sickness was attended with a delirium and lethargy, 
so that you may perceive this to have been the true cause of the native’s death.” 
(Cooper’s Translation, pp. 198, 199.) 

3 Hide ανθωροσκοπησει προσοιον δηποτε των φωτων : which Allatius has 
translated, “if he should be in the ascendant opposed to either of the lumin- 
aries” (st in horoscopo altert luminum opponatur) ; but the Latin copy of Basle, 
1541, as well as that of Perugio, 1646, give the passage as now rendered. And 
it appears in a subsequent place, p. 201 (where the word ανθωροσκοπων occurs), 
that it can only be properly translated “ in opposition to the ascendant.” 


136 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [ΒΟῸΚ Iv. 


will cause death in prison: if he be configurated with Mercury, and 
especially if near the constellation of the Serpent in the sphere, and in 
terrestrial signs of the zodiac, be will produce death by venomous 
wounds or bites, and by reptiles and wild beasts. And, should Venus 


also attach herself to Saturn and Mercury thus combined, death willthen - 


ensue by poison or female treachery. If Saturn be in Virgo or Pisces, or 


watery signs, and configurated with the Moon, he will operate death — 


by means of water, by drowning and suffocation; and, if found near 


Argo, by shipwreck. Should he be in tropical or quadrupedal signs, and 
the Sun be either in conjunction with him, or in opposition ; or if, 
instead of the Sun, Mars should so present himself, death will be caused 
by the fall of houses or buildings ; and, if posited in the mid-heaven, 
death will happen by falls from heights or precipices. These are the 
various effects of Saturn, when configurated as described. 


Mars, if in signs of human form, and posited in quartile or in opposi- 


tion to the Sun or Moon, and contrary in condition, will operate death 
by slaughter, either in civil or foreign war, or by suicide: if Venus add 
her testimony, death will be inflicted by women, or by assassins in the 
employment of women: and, should Mercury also be configurated with 


them, death will happen from robbers, thieves, or highwaymen. If 
Mars be in mutilated or imperfect signs, or near the Gorgon! of Perseus, _ 
he will produce death by decapitation, or by mutilation of limb. If 


found in Scorpio or Taurus, he will cause death by surgical amputation, 
burning or searing, or also by spasms or convulsions. Should he be found 
in the mid-heaven, either above or below the earth, death will be in- 


flicted by crucifixion or impalement, and especially if he be in the vicin- 


ity of Cepheus or Andromeda. If descending, or in opposition to the 
ascendant,? he will produce death by fire: and, if in quadrupedal 
signs, by falls and fractures. Should Jupiter, however, bear testimony 
to Mars, and be at the same time afflicted, death will ensue from the 
wrath of princes and kings, and from judicial condemnation. 

If it happen that the malefics be in concurrence with each other in the 


first instance, and afterwards in mutual opposition, in any of the afore- 


said situations, the evil character of the death will be yet further 


augmented ; but its species or quality, and its dominion, will depend | 


upon that one which may be in occupation of the aneretic place. And, 


if both the malefics claim prerogative in the aneretic places, the bodies | 


of persons who thus die will be cast abroad without interment, and will 


' 
᾿ 


be devoured by beasts and birds: these circumstances will especially 
ensue, when the malefics may be found in signs similar in form to beasts 
and birds; and provided not any one of the benefics should offer 


testimony to the place below the earth,? nor to the aneretic places. 


1 Caput Meduse. 2 Ανθωροσκοπων. Vide note 3 in Ὁ. 135. 
8 That is to say, the lower heaven, or imum-ceeli. Whalley has translated 
it, “ above the earth,” instead of “ below”; mistaking ὑπὸ for ὑπερ. 


| 


de 


i 


CHAP. X.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 137 


Lastly, death will occur in foreign lands, when it may happen that 
the planets controlling the aneretic places may be posited in cadent 
houses ; especially if the Moon be present in the said places also, or if 
she be found in quartile or in opposition.} 


CHAPTER X 
THE PERIODICAL DIVISIONS OF TIME 


In addition to the foregoing brief observations, applicable to the various 
forms of death, further attention is demanded with respect to the divis- 
ion of time, which requires to be contemplated in its natural order and 
succession. 

Now as, in all genethlialogical cases, a certain common and general 
arrangement, affecting the region or country and the race or generation, 
is pre-supposed to be in operation, to which arrangement particular 
inferences, relating to the form of the body, the properties of the mind, 
and national habits and variations, must each be subservient ; and as, 
in these respects, certain causes more general and predominating are 
pre-supposed in existence before particular causes, due care must con- 
sequently be taken, in order to make an inference consistent with the 
course of nature, to observe always the original and predominating 
cause, and never to lose sight of it; lest some similarity in nativities 
(if any such should exist) might induce an assertion when the original 
predominating cause proceeding from the region itself has been over- 
looked, that the native of Aithiopia will be born of white complexion, 
and with long and straight hair ; or, on the other hand, that the native 
of Germany or of Gaul will be black in complexion, and have curled 


1 On this chapter Whalley makes the following annotations : ‘‘ One direction, 
how malevolent soever, rarely kills ; and, in most nativities, there is required a 
train of malevolent directions to concur to death: where several malevolent 
directions concur so together, without the aid of intervenings of the benevolents, 
they fail not to destroy life. 

‘In such trains of directions, the author here distinguisheth between the 
killing planet and the causer of the quality of death ; for one planet doth not 
give both. The foremost of the malevolent train is the killing place, and shows 
the time of death; but the following directions, though benevolent, show 
the quality. If the train fall altogether, and none follow, for the quality 
observe those which precede, though at a distance and benevolent also ; for, 
though the benevolent contribute to the preservation of life, yet they frequently 
specify the disease which is the cause of death. And with these, our author 
tells us, concur the configurating stars, the quality of the stars and signs, and 
the terms in which the lords happen. In violent deaths, the genethliacal 
positions of the lights are to be observed, and how the malefics affect them, 

and [how they] are also concerned by directions in the quality or death.” See 
also Chap. XIV, Book 11. 


F 


138 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [BooK Iv. | 


hair; or, that the said nations are polished in manners, and cultivate - 
learning, but that the people of Greece are barbarous and illiterate; 
and so, in short, of any other countries ; without duly considering the — 
national differences and variations in their several courses of life, 
So also, with regard to the division of time, it is in the same manner — 
essential to consider the different qualities of the several ages of life, and 
to pre-determine the appropriate fitness of every age to such events as 
may be expected: in order to avoid the gross error which might arise 
from a merely vague consideration of the subject, by attributing to 
infancy some deed or circumstance of too complete a nature and belong- 
ing rather to manhood, or by ascribing to extreme old age the pro- 
creation of children, or some other action belonging to youth ; and to 
adapt, on the contrary, to each separate age such circumstances as seem, 
by due observation of the periods, to be suitable and appropriate thereto, 
The mode of consideration? applicable to human nature is universally — 
one and the same; and it is analogous to the arrangement of the seven — 
planetary orbs.? It, therefore, duly commences with the first age οὗ 
human life, and the first sphere next above the earth, that of the — 
Moon ; and it terminates with the final age of man, and the last of the 
planetary spheres, which is that of Saturn; and, in fact, it accordingly — 
happens that the appropriate qualities of each sphere take effect in a — 
corresponding age of life, each age being subjected to one particular 
sphere. ‘These observations are necessary, because the general divisions — 
of time must be considered by means of the spheres, as a primary — 
arrangement ; although minor distinctions are to be made by means ~ 
of the existing peculiarities found in nativities. ‘ 
Hence, the first age of infancy, which endures for four years, agreeing — 
in number with the quadrennial period of the Moon, is consequently — 
adapted to her; being in its nature moist and incompact, presenting — 
rapidity of growth, being nourished by moist things, and possessing — 
a highly variable habit. Its mental incompleteness is likewise in accord- — 
ance with its familiar relation to the Moon, and her operative influence. — 
The age after this continues for ten years, and accommodates itself 
to the second sphere, that of Mercury. In this period, the intellectual — 
and reasoning faculties of the mind begin to take their character, imbib- } 
ing the seeds of learning, and developing, as it were, the elements and j 
germs of the genius and abilities, and their peculiar quality. The mind — 
is also roused to discipline and instruction, and to its first exercises. j 
Venus corresponds with the next and third age, which lasts throughout © 
the following eight years, the number of her own period: from her, the | 
movement of the seminal vessels originates, as well as an unrestrained — 
impetuosity and precipitancy in amours. 


1 With respect to the periodical divisions of time. ia 
2 It will, of course, be remembered, that the Sun, in the Ptolemaic astronomy, 
is counted as a planetary orb. ! 


CHAP. x.] PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS 139 


The fourth and adult age next succeeds, and is subject to the fourth 
sphere, that of the Sun: it endures for nineteen years, according to the 
Sun’s number. Authority of action now commences in the mind, the 
career of life is entered upon, distinction and glory are desired, and 
puerile irregularities are relinquished for more orderly conduct, and the 
pursuit of honour. 

Mars, next after the Sun, claims the fifth age, that of manhood, 
agreeing in duration with his own period, viz. fifteen years. He induces 
greater austerity of life, together with vexation, care, and trouble. 

Jupiter occupies the sixth sphere, and influences the maturer age, 
during the twelve years corresponding to his own period. He operates 
the relinquishment of labour, of hazardous employment and tumult, 
and produces greater gravity, foresight, prudence, and sagacity, favour- 
ing the claim to honour, respect, and privilege. 

Saturn, moving in the last sphere, regulates the final old age, as 
agreeing with its chilliness. He obstructs the mental movements, the 
appetites and enjoyments ; rendering them imbecile and dull, in con- 
formity with the dullness of his own motion. 

The common properties attributable to the various times of life are 
subject, in a general manner, to this previous adaptation ; but there are 
particular periods, arising from the respective peculiarities of nativities, 
which also require determination, and must be ascertained from the 
ruling prorogations ; that is to say, from the whole of them, and not 
from any single one only, as in the case of the duration of life. For 
example, prorogation made from the ascendant is to be applied to 
events affecting the body, and to travelling, or change of residence ; 
that from the part of Fortune, to incidents affecting the substance or 
wealth; that from the Moon, to actions of the mind, and to communion! 
and cohabitation ; that from the Sun, to dignities and glory ; and that 
from the mid-heaven, to other particular circumstances of life, such as 
employment, friendship, and the possession of children. So that thus, 
at one and the same time any single planet, whether benefic or malefic, 
will not possess the sole dominion ; for many conflicting events fre- 
quently occur at the same period, and a person may, at one and the same 
time, lose a kinsman, yet inherit his substance; or be at onceillin health, 
yet prosperous and advantageously established in regard to fortune ; 
or be struggling with adversity and in want, yet, notwithstanding, be 
also a father and beget children ; or he may experience other similar 
contrarieties : because individuals are subject to occurrences which may 
affect either the body, the mind, the rank, or the condition of wealth, and 
which are not altogether fortunate or unfortunate at the same period. 
Something of the kind will, however, frequently happen in cases of 
perfect good fortune or distress, when meetings of all the benefics or 
malefics may concur in all or most of the prorogations. Still such cases 


1 The Latin copy of Basle, 1541, says, “‘ to marriages.” 


140 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [Book Iv. 


are but rare, because human nature in general is not subjected to the 
extremity either of good or evil, but rather to their moderate alteration 
and counter-change. 

The prorogatory places must, therefore, be separately distinguished 
in the mode before pointed out ; and the planets meeting the proroga- 
tions must again be all taken into consideration: not only those which 
may be aneretic (as in the case of the duration of life), nor those only 
which may be configurated bodily,1 or in opposition or quartile, but 
also those in trine or sextile. And, first, the times in each proro- 
gation will be governed by the planet occupying or configurated with 
the actual prorogatory degree itself: if, however, there be found no 
planet thus constituted, the nearest preceding planet will govern the 
times until another, which may be in aspect to the degree following in 
the order of the signs, shall take them ; and this one, again, will do the 
same until the next in succession shall take them.? The like rule obtains 
with respect to any other planets received into dominion, and with 
respect to those in occupation of the terms. 

Further, in prorogations of the ascendant, the degrees of distances 
will be equal in number to the ascensional times of the particular 
latitude; but, in prorogation, from the mid-heaven, to the times of 
culmination ; and, in other prorogations, they will be in proportion to 
the ascensions, or descensions, or culminations, and will depend on their 
proximity to the angles ; as has been already said in treating of the dura- 
tion of life.® 

The arbiters of general times are to be determined by the foregoing 
method; but arbiters of annual periods as follows: viz. after the 
number of years which have elapsed since the birth has been ascertained, 
the amount is to be projected from each place of prorogation, in the 
succession of the signs, at the rate of one sign for a year,* and the lord 


1 “Bodily,” or in conjunction. 

2 On this passage, Whalley remarks, “ we are to observe in direction, that 
the star in exact ray with the prorogator shall be ruler until the prorogator 
meets another ray ; that then the planet whose ray it is shall take the dominion, 
and so on. But if no planet aspect the hyleg (prorogator) exactly, that which 
casts its rays before the prorogator is to be taken for ruler of the time, till 
another planet’s ray comes in by direction. And the lord of the term, in which 
the direction falls, must be considered as a co-partner in this dominion.” 

8 Vide Chap. XIV, Book 3. 

4 The Greek is simply εἰς τα ἐπομενα κατα Ewdiov ; but the context proves 
that the entire meaning must be as now given, although the Latin translation 
of Perugio renders it “one year to each degree.” Whalley explains that by 
annual periods “ the author intends profections: for the taking of which, for 
every year from the birth, add one sign to the sign in which the aphetics are 
at birth, and the sign which ends at the year desired is the sign profectional for 
that year, and the lord of that sign is chronocrator (arbitor) for that year; so 
far as the degrees of that sign reach. For example, if a prorogator at birth 


CHAP. X. | PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS I4I 


of the last sign! is to be assumed as arbiter. And, with regard to periods 
reckoned by months, the same rule is to be observed: for in this case 
also, the number of the month, as counted from the month of the nativ- 
ity, is to be projected from such places as possess the dominion of the 
year, in the proportion of twenty-eight days per sign. So, likewise, in 
the case of periods reckoned by days, the number of the day, counted 
from the day of birth, must be projected from the monthly places of 
‘dominion, allowing for each sign two days and a third.? 

It is, however, necessary to notice the ingresses made on places 
allotted to different periods ; for they take effect in no small degree on 
the events of the period. 'Thus, the ingresses made by Saturn, on places 
of general periods, require special observation ; those made by Jupiter, 
on places of annual periods ; those made by the Sun, Mars, Venus, and 
Mercury, on monthly places ; and the Moon’s transit over daily places. 
It must also be remembered, that arbiters of general periods are chiefly 
paramount over the events; and that, to their influence, the arbiters 
of particular periods (each of whom acting by its own proper nature) 
present either co-operation or obstruction ; and that the ingresses also 
operate on events, by increasing or diminishing their force and extent. 

The general characteristic property, and the duration of the period, 
will be indicated by the place of prorogation, as also by the lord of the 
general times, and by the planet in possession of the terms; by means 
of the familiarity subsisting, from the actual birth, between each 
planet, and the places of which they may have respectively and originally 
taken dominion. The arbiters of time will also give indication whether 
the event will be good or evil, by means of their own naturally benefic 
or malefic property and temperament, and by their original familiarity 
or variance with the place of which they have become lords. But the 
period, at which the event will become more strongly evident, is shown 


be in 15° of Gemini, to 15° of Cancer serves the first year; but the first six 
months are ruled by Mercury, and the last six by the Moon and Jupiter ; and 
so on. 

1 The Latin translation of Basle, 1541, says, “‘ the lord of that sign in which 
the number shall terminate.” 

* Whalley says here, “let a sign be added for each month to the sign of 
the year. So, in the example before proposed, the last 15° of Gemini, and the 
first 15° of Cancer, shall serve for the first month: the last 15° of Cancer and 
the first 15° of Leo, for the second month; and so on. And for days, from 
15° of Gemini to 15° of Cancer, rules two days and eight hours after birth, &c.” 

Placidus is of opinion, “ that Ptolemy, speaking of annual places, is to be 
understood of the places of secondary directions; and that when he speaks 
of the menstrual, he hints at the places of progressions.” (Cooper’s Trans- 
lation, pp. 25 and 57.) 

 Placidus says, that “ active ingresses, if they be similar, to the pre-ordained 
effects, cause them to influence ; if dissimilar, they either diminish or retard ; 


as Ptolemy has it in the last Chapter of Book IV.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 27.) 


142 PTOLEMY’S TETRABIBLOS [ΒΟΟΚ Iv. 


by the relative positions of the annual and monthly signs towards the 
places wherein the causes exist, and also by the ingresses of the planets. 

The mode in which the Sun and Moon may be disposed, in reference 
to the signs relating to annual and monthly periods, is also indicative. 
For example, should they, from the date of the nativity, be posited in 
concord with the operative places, and keep a position of concord at 
the ingresses, they will produce good; but, if adversely posited, evil. 
And also, if they be not in concord with the said places, and provided 
they be contrary in condition, and in opposition or in quartile, to the 
transits, they will cause evil: should they, however, not be in quartile, 
nor in opposition, but otherwise configurated, their influence then will 
not be equally malefic. 

Should it happen that the same planets may be lords of the times,? 
as well as of the ingresses, the effect will be extreme and unalloyed, if 
ofa favourable nature ; and more particularly unmitigated, if evil. And 
should the said planets be not only lords of the times, but likewise hold 
dominion from the date of the nativity, and provided also that all the 
prorogations, or most of them, should tend to, or depend on, one and the 
same place, or, should the prorogations not be so constituted, yet 
notwithstanding, if the meetings occurring at the periods be found to 
be either all, or most of them, benefic or malefic, they will wholly 
produce, in all respects, good or evil fortune, respectively. 

It is in this method, which preserves a natural order and succession, 
that times and seasons require to be contemplated. 


1 Placidus observes, that “the primary directions of the significators to 
their promittors, and the lords of the terms, Ptolemy calls the General Arbiters 
of Times, because they pre-ordain the general times of their effects ; which, as 
its motion is slow and its perseverance long, discovers its effects after a very 
long time ; that is, after months and years. In order that we may know, in 
this extent of time, on what particular month and day the effects appear, 
Ptolemy proposes these motions for observation, wherein, when the majority 
of the causes agree together, then doubtless the effect is accomplished, or most 
clearly manifests itself.” (Cooper’s Translation, p. 109.) And he says after- 
wards, in speaking of secondary directions, progressions, ingresses, &c., “ these 
subsequent motions of the causes demand our greatest attention.” ([bid., p. 110.) 
In the Appendix to the same book, at p. 438, the proper equation of time, or 
measurement of the arcs of direction, is also treated of, in reference to the 
16th canon of Placidus, which is as follows :— 


“To equate the Arc of Direction. Add the arc of direction to the right 
ascension of the natal Sun; look for this sum in the table of right ascensions 
under the ecliptic, and take the degree and minute of longitude corresponding 
with that sum; then, in the best ephemeris, reckon in how many days and 
hours the Sun, from the day and hour of birth, has arrived at that degree and 
minute. The number of days indicate as many years ; every two hours over, 
reckon a month.” (Lbid., p. 55.) | 


2 Whether general or annual. 


CHAP. X. | PTOLEMY’S 'TETRABIBLOS 143 


And now, in adverting to the scope allotted to this work in its com- 
mencement, all further adaptation of the forms of events liable to take 
effect at particular times will here be relinquished ; because the operative 
influences which the stars exercise in all events, whether general or 
particular, may be arranged in proper order, if care be taken that the 
causes set forth by the Rules of Science, and the causes arising from any 
existing commixture, be duly combined and blended together. 


THE END 


APPENDIX 


NO. I 


ALMAGEST ; BOOK VIII, CHAP. IV 


HE various constellations of the fixed stars having now been 
duly described, their aspects remain to be investigated. 

Independently of the steadfast and immutable aspects which 

the said stars preserve among themselves, either rectilinearly, or tri- 

angularly, or by other similar forms,? they have also certain aspects 

considered as referring exclusively to the planets and the Sun and Moon, 

or parts of the zodiac; certain others to the earth only; and others, 

again, to the earth, the planets and the Sun and Moon, or parts of the 
zodiac, combined. 

With regard to the planets only, and parts of the zodiac, aspects are 
properly considered as made to them by the fixed stars, when the said 
planets and fixed stars may be posited on one and the same of those 
circles which are drawn through the poles of the zodiac; or, also, if 
they be posited on different circles, provided a trinal or sextile distance 
between them may be preserved ; that is to say, a distance equal to a 
right angle and a third part more, or a distance equal to two-thirds of a 
right angle; and provided, also, that the fixed stars be on such parts 
of the circle as are liable to be transited by any one of the planets. 
These parts are situated within the latitude of the zodiac, which cir- 
cumscribes the planetary motions. And as far as the five planets are con- 
cerned, the aspects of the fixed stars depend upon the visible mutual 
conjunctions, or configurations, made in the forms above prescribed ; 
but, with respect to the Sun and Moon, they depend on occultations, 
conjunctions, and succedent risings of the stars. Occultation is when 
a star becomes invisible by being carried under the rays of the luminary ; 
conjunction, when it is placed under the luminary’s centre ; and suc- 
cedent rising, when it begins to reappear on issuing out beyond the rays. 

In regard to the earth only, the aspects of the fixed stars are four in 
number, and are known by the common term of angles: to speak, 
however, more particularly, they are the oriental horizon, the meridian 
or mid-heaven above the earth, the occidental horizon, and the meridian 
or mid-heaven below the earth. And in that part of the earth where 
the equator is in the zenith, the whole of the fixed stars are found to 


1 That is to say, by the opposition, trine, &c. 
144 


APPENDIX 145 


rise and set, and to be above as well as below the earth, once in each 
revolution ; because the situation of the poles of the equator, being 
in this manner on the plane of the horizon, thereby prevents the con- 
stant visibility or invisibility of any one of the parallel circles. But in 
other parts of the earth, where the pole of the equator is in the zenith, 
the fixed stars can never set nor rise ; because the equator itself is then 
on the plane of the horizon, and circumscribes the two hemispheres 
(which it thus creates, one above and the other below the earth) in such 
a manner, that in one revolution every star must twice transit the meri- 
dian, some of them above, others below the earth. In other declina- 
tions, however, between these extreme positions of the equator, as just 
mentioned, there are certain of the circles always visible, and others 
never visible ; consequently, the stars intercepted between the first of 
such circles and the poles can neither rise not set, but must, in the course 
of one revolution, twice transit the meridian ; above the earth, if the 
said stars be on a circle always visible ; but below the earth, if on a circle 
never visible. ‘The other stars, however, situated on the greater parallels, 
both rise and set, and are found in each revolution once on the meridian 
above the earth, and once on that below the earth. In all these cases, 
the time occupied in proceeding round from any angle to the same 
again, must be everywhere equal in its duration, for it is marked by one 
sensible revolution; and the time occupied in passing from either 
meridianal angle to the angle diametrically opposite, is also everywhere 
equal; because it is marked by the half of one revolution. So, also, 
the passage from either horizontal angle to its opposite angle is again 
effected in the same equal portion of time, wherever the equator may 
be in the zenith, for it is then likewise marked by the half of an entire 
revolution ; because on such a position of the equator, all the parallels 
are then divided, as well by the horizon as by the meridian, into two 
equal parts. But in all other declinations, the time of passage of a semi- 
circle above the earth is not equal to that of its passage below the earth, 
except only in the case of the equinoctial circle itself, which, in an oblique 
sphere, is the only one divided by the horizon into two equal parts, all 
others (its parallels) being bisected into dissimilar and unequal arcs. It 
follows, accordingly, that the time contained in the space between 
rising or setting, and either meridian, must be equal to the time be- 
tween the same meridian and rising and setting ; because the meridian 
divides equally such portions of the parallels as are above or under the 
earth. But in proceeding in an oblique sphere, from rising or setting to 
either meridian, the time occupied must be unequal; and in a right 
sphere, equal, because the entire portions above the earth are, in a right 
sphere only, equal to those below the earth ; whence, for instance, in a 
right sphere, whatever stars may be together on the meridian must 
also all rise and set together, until their progress becomes perceptible by 
the poles of the zodiac ; while, on the other hand, in an oblique sphere, 
whatever stars may be together on the meridian can neither all rise 
F * 


146 APPENDIX 


together nor set together ; for the more southern stars must always rise 
later than those which are more northern, and set earlier. 

The aspects made by the fixed stars, in regard to the planets or parts 
of the zodiac, and the earth combined, are considered, in a general 
manner, by the rising, or meridianal position, or setting of the same 
fixed stars in conjunction with any planet or part of the zodiac; but 
their aspects are properly distinguishable, by means of the Sun, in the 
nine following modes :— 


1. The first is called matutine subsolar, when the star is found to- 
gether with the Sun in the oriental horizon. Of this aspect, one species 
is called the oriental, invisible, and succedent rising ; when the star, 
at the commencement of its occultation, rises immediately after the 
Sun: another is called the precise oriental co-rising ; when the star 
is found in partile conjunction with the Sun in the oriental horizon : 
another is the oriental, precedent, and visible rising ; when the star, 
beginning to appear, rises before the Sun. 


2. The second aspect is termed matutine location in the mid-heaven ; 
when the star is found on the meridian, either above or below the earth, 
while the Sun is on the oriental horizon. And of this aspect, one species 
is called a succedent and oriental location in the mid-heaven, invisible ; 
when, immediately after the Sun’s rising, the star shall be found on the 
meridian: another is the precise oriental location in the mid-heaven ; 
when, exactly as the Sun rises, the star is at the same time on the 
meridian ; another is the oriental precedent location in the mid-heaven ; 
when the star first shall come to the meridian above the earth, and the 
Sun may then immediately rise. 


3. The third, called matutine setting, is when the Sun may be actually 
in the oriental horizon, but the star in the occidental. One of the forms 
of this aspect is called the oriental, succedent setting, invisible ; when 
the star sets immediately after the Sun’s rising: another is the precise 
oriental co-setting, when the star sets at the moment of the Sun’s rising : 
another is the oriental, precedent, and visible setting, when the Sun does 
not rise until immediately after the setting of the star. 


4. The fourth aspect is named meridianal subsolar, and takes place 
when the Sun is actually on the meridian, but the star on the oriental 
horizon. Of this, one is diurnal and invisible; when the star rises 
while the Sun is posited on the meridian above the earth: another is 
nocturnal and visible ; when the star rises while the Sun is placed on the 
meridian below the earth. 

5. The fifth is called meridianal location in the mid-heaven ; when 
the Sun, as well as the star, may be at the same time on the meridian. 
Of this aspect, two sorts are diurnal and invisible ; when the star is on 
the meridian above the earth, together with the Sun, or on that below 


1 On this side of the equator. 


APPENDIX 147 


the earth, diametrically opposite to the Sun. T'wo also are nocturnal, 
and of these, one is invisible ; when the star is on the meridian under the 
earth, together with the Sun: the other, however, is visible ; when the 


star is on the meridian above the earth, diametrically opposite to the 
Sun. 


6. The sixth is meridianal setting ; when the star is found on the 
occidental horizon, while the Sun is on the meridian. Of this, one 
species is diurnal and invisible; when the star sets while the Sun is 
above the earth on the meridian: the other is nocturnal and visible ; 
when the star sets while the Sun is on the meridian below the earth. 


7. The seventh aspect is called vespertine subsolar ; when the star 
is found on the oriental horizon, while the Sun is posited on the occi- 
dental horizon. One form of this aspect is the vespertine succedent 
rising, visible ; when the star rises immediately after sunset : another is 
the precise vespertine co-rising ; when the star rises and the Sun sets 
at one and the same time: another is the precedent, vespertine rising, 
invisible ; when the star rises immediately before the Sun sets. 


8. The eighth is named vespertine location in the mid-heaven ; 
when the star is on the meridian, either above or below the earth, while 
the Sun is placed on the occidental horizon. Of this aspect, one kind 
is called a visible vespertine location in the mid-heaven ; when the star 
is found there immediately after sunset: another is the precise ves- 
pertine location in the mid-heaven ; when the star is found there at the 
moment of sunset ; another is the vespertine precedent location in the 


mid-heaven, invisible ; when the star arrives there immediately before 
sunset. 


g. The ninth aspect is called vespertine setting; when the star, 
together with the Sun, is on the occidental horizon. One form of this 
aspect is the vespertine, succedent and visible setting ; when the star, 
at the commencement of its occultation, sets immediately after the 
Sun : another is the precise vespertine setting ; when the star sets at the 
same moment with the Sun: another is the precedent, invisible setting ; 


when the star, before it emerges from its occultation, sets before 
the Sun. 


NO. II 
ALMAGEST ; BOOK II. EXTRACT FROM CHAP. IX 


Of Circumstances regulated by Ascensions 


In any climate whatever, the magnitude of a given day or night is to 
be computed by the number of ascensional times proper to that parti- 
cular climate. For example, the magnitude of the day will be ascer- 
tained by numbering the times between the Sun’s zodiacal degree and 
the degree diametrically opposite, in the succession of the signs ; and 


148 APPENDIX 


that of the night, by numbering the times, from the degree diametrically 
opposite to the Sun, onwards, in the order of the signs, to be degree 
actually occupied by the Sun: because, by dividing the respective 
amounts of these times so obtained, by fifteen, the number of equatorial 
hours belonging to each space will be exhibited ; and if the division be 
made by twelve, instead of fifteen, the result will show the numbers of 
degrees equivalent to one temporal hour of either of the said spaces 
respectively.+ 

The magnitude of any temporal hour may be, however, more easily 
found by referring to the annexed Table of Ascensions, and taking the 
difference between the respective aggregate numbers, inserted therein 
under the heads of the equinoctial parallel or right sphere, and of any 
particular climate for which the magnitude of the temporal hour is 
required ; and, if the said hour be a diurnal hour, the aggregate times 
as stated against the zodiacal degree occupied by the Sun; but, if 
nocturnal, those stated against the degree diametrically opposite, are 
to be compared ; and the sixth part of the difference between them is to 
be added, if the said degree be in the northern signs, to the fifteen times 
of an equatorial hour; but subtracted therefrom, if in the southern 
signs. ‘The amount thus obtained will be the required number of 
degrees of the temporal hour in question.? 

And if it be required to reduce the temporal hours of any given day 
or night, in a certain climate, into equatorial hours, they must be 
multiplied by their proper horary times, whether diurnal or nocturnal, 


1 Thus (according to the Table inserted at p. 152), in the climate or 
latitude of Lower Aigypt, the times of ascension between the first point of 
Gemini and the first point of Sagittarius, diametrically opposite, are 205° 18’, 
which, being divided by 15, give 13 hours 41 minutes and a fraction of equa- 
torial time, as the length of the day of the first point of Gemini. And the same 
number of times of ascension, divided by 12, give 17° 6’ and a fraction of the 
equator, as the length of the diurnal temporal hour. In the latitude of Southern 
Britain, the times of ascension between the same points as above mentioned 
are 236° 2’, which, divided by 15, give 15 hours 44 minutes and a fraction of 
equatorial time, as the length of the day of the first point of Gemini; and, 
if divided by 12, they produce 19° 40’ and a fraction of the equator, as the 
length of the diurnal temporal hour. 

2 Thus, the aggregate times of ascension, in a right sphere, of the first 
point of Gemini are 57° 44’; and, in the climate of Lower A’gypt, 45° 5’: 
the sixth part of the difference between them is 2° 6’ and a fraction, which, 
added to 15°, again makes the diurnal temporal hour of the first point of 
Gemini equal to 17° 6’ and a fraction of the equator. In the climate of Southern 
Britain, the aggregate times of ascension of the first point of Gemini are 


29° 43’: the sixth part of the difference between that sum and 57° 44’ of © 


right ascension is 4° 40’ and a fraction, which, added to 15°, makes the diurnal 
temporal hour of the first point of Gemini, in South Britain, equal to 19° 40° 
and a fraction of the equator, as before shown. 


APPENDIX 149 


as the case may be; the product is then to be divided by fifteen, and 
the quotient will necessarily be the number of equatorial hours in the 
climate in question, on the given day or night.1_ On the other hand, 
equatorial hours are also to be reduced into temporal hours by being 
multiplied by fifteen, the product of which is to be divided by the horary 
times proper to the given day or night in the said climate. 

The degree ascending in the ecliptic, at any given temporal hour, 
may also be ascertained by multiplying the number of temporal hours 
since sunrise, if the given hour be diurnal, but if nocturnal, since sunset, 
by their proper horary times ; and the product is to be added, in the 
succession of the signs, to the aggregate number (as shown by the ascen- 
sions proper to the climate) of the Sun’s degree, if the given hour be 
diurnal, but, if nocturnal, to that of the degree diametrically opposite, 
and that particular degree of the ecliptic which shall correspond with 
the total number thus found in the ascensions of the climate will be the 
degree then ascending.? 

But, in order to ascertain the degree on the meridian above the earth, 
the number of temporal hours since the preceding noon are also to be 
multiplied by their proper horary times, and the product is to be added 
to the aggregate number of the Sun’s right ascension ; and that degree 
of the ecliptic, with which the total number as found in the aggregate 


1 For example, 
Diurnal horary times of the first point of Gemini, in the 


latitude of Alexandria . ; ; ; : , ΠΣ Ὁ σ᾽ 
Number of temporal hours , ; ᾿ : , 12 
15)205 18 ὁ 
Diurnal equatorial hours of the first point of Gemini in the 
latitude of Alexandria . , : ν ᾿ A uae sae | ye | 
Diurnal horary times of the first point of Gemini in the latitude 
of Southern Britain. ; ; ‘ ‘ : . 19° 40° ἂν 
Number of temporal hours . ‘ ‘ ; ‘ : 12 
296 1... ὃ 


Diurnal equatorial hours of the first point of Gemini in the 
latitude of Southern Britain : ᾿ ; ; ς SES ee" 8 


2 Let the first point of Gemini be on the meridian above the earth; the 
number of temporal hours since sunrise will then be 6, by which 17° 6’ 30” 
are to multiplied. The product will be 102° 39’: this, added to 45° 5’, the 
aggregate number of the first point of Gemini in the latitude of Alexandria, 
will give 147° 44’, which, in the ascensions of the climate in question, will 
correspond to the 3d degree of Virgo, and show that to be the degree ascending. 
In the latitude of Southern Britain the total number would still amount to 
the same, viz. 147° 44’, but it would show 7° and about 30’ of Virgo to be 
ascending. 


150 APPENDIX 


times of right ascension shall correspond, will then be on the meridian.1 
The degree on the oriental horizon will, however, also show what — 
degrees occupies the meridian; for, by subtracting go times (the ~ 
amount of the quadrant) from the aggregate number ascribed to the said 
ascending degree in the Table proper to the climate, the number so 
reduced will be found, in the aggregate times of the Table of Right 
Ascension, to correspond with the degree on the meridian. And again, 
on the other hand, by adding go to the aggregate times ascribed by 
right of ascension to the degree on the meridian above the earth, the 
degree ascending may be obtained, for it will be that degree which 
corresponds to that total number, as stated in the Table proper to the 
climate. ? 

The Sun always preserves an equal distance in equatorial hours from 
all parts of the same meridian; but his distance in equatorial hours 
from different meridians varies according to the degrees of distance 
between meridian and meridian. 

The foregoing extracts have been made to show the entire agreement 
between the astronomy of the Tetrabiblos and that of the Almagest. 
The Tables herein given from the latter work are, of course, now, in 
some degree, superseded by others of modern calculation, infinitely 
more complete. 


1 Let the first point of Gemini be three temporal hours past the meridian ; 
these hours reduced to degrees, in the latitude of Alexandria, will give 51° 19’, 
which, added to the right ascension of the first point of Gemini, make 109° 3’, 
showing the 18th degree of Cancer on the meridian. In the latitude of Southern 
Britain, these hours would produce 59°, which, added to the right ascension, 
would make 116° 44’, and show the 25th degree of Cancer on the meridian. 

2 Thus, in the latitude of Alexandria, when the first point of Gemini is 
three temporal hours past the meridian, the 16th degree of Libra will be on 
the ascendant, and the aggregate times of ascension of that degree in the said 
latitude are 109° 3’: by subtracting 90 from this sum, the remainder will be 
19° 3’, the right ascension of the mid-heaven answering to the 18th degree 
of Cancer. In the latitude of Southern Britain, the 18th degree of Libra would 
be on the ascendant, of which degree the aggregate times of ascension in that 
latitude are 206° 44’, from which, if 90 be subtracted, the remainder will 
be 116° 44’, the right ascension of the mid-heaven answering to the 25th degree 
of Cancer. The converse of these operations seems too obvious to need 
explanation. 


Tasie or LatTirupEs, As SHOWN BY THE DURATION OF 


LONGEST DAY. 


APPENDIX 


THE Loncest Day 


[From the Almagest.] 


LATITUDE. 
M. D. M. 
ο fe) ο 
15 4 15 
30 8 25 
45 12 30 
O 16 27 
15 20 14 
30 23 SI 
45 27 40 
O 130 22 
15 33 18 
30 36 ο 
45 48 35 
Oo 40 56 
15 43 5 
30 45 I 
45 | 46 51 
fe) 48 32 


1 Alexandria, 


LONGEST DAY. LATITUDE. 
H. M. D. M. 
16 15 50 15 
16 15. [ἐκ 35 
16 45 52 50 
17 ο 54 I 
17 15 55 0 
17 30 56 ο 
17 45 57 ο 
18 ο 58 ο 
18 30 59 30 
19 ο 61 ο 
19 30 62 ο 
20 ο 63 O 
21 Ἰῶν 64. 30 
22 Oo 65 30 
23 ο 66 fe) 
24 ο 66 10 


2 Southern Britain, 


151 


152 APPENDIX 


EXTRACT FROM THE TABLE OF ASCENSION (CONTAINED IN THE 
ALMAGEST), CALCULATED FOR EVERY TENTH 
DEGREE OF THE ZODIAC. 


8th Climate thro’ 


in a Right Sphere Southern Britain, 


3rd Climate, thro’ 


ὦ [funder the Equator, | Lower 2gypt, Lat. en ¥ 
bp Diurnal Arc g0° 2p! N. Diurnal pe Rael tee : 
SIGNS. δὶ 12 Hours: Arc 14 Hours. 6 Fla: 36 Me 
Ω . 
ἕ bs aig Aggregate 
ΤΉΝ Ἢ Times. 
D. M. 
Aries . : .| τὸ 6.48 
20 13.43 
30 20.53 
Taurus ‘ .} τὸ 28.26 
20 36.28 
30 45. 5 
Gemini 1 τὸ 54.22 
20 64.22 
30 75-0 
Cancer : .| τὸ 86.12 
20 97.46 
30 109.37 
Leo . ἢ 1 τὸ 121.32 
20 133.26 
30 145.13 
Virgo . ; 1 τὸ 156.53 
20 168.28 
30 180. O 
Libra . ; .| τὸ 191.32 
20 203. 7 
30 214.47 
Scorpio : .| τὸ 226.34 
20 238.28 
30 250.23 
Sagittarius . Ἵ 10 262.14 
20 273.48 
30 285. ὁ 
Capricornus . .| τὸ 295.38 
20 305.38 
30 314.55 
Aquarius. .| τὸ 323.32 
20 331.34 
30 339: 7 
Pisces . ; -| τὸ 346.17 
20 353.12 
30 360. 0 


APPENDIX 153 


No. III. 


THE CENTILOQUY, OR HUNDRED APHORISMS OF CLAUDIUS PTOLEMY! ; 
OTHERWISE CALLED, THE FRUIT OF HIS FOUR BOOKS 


I, Jupcment must be regulated by thyself, as well as by the science ; 
for it is not possible that particular forms of events should be declared 
by any person, however scientific ; since the understanding conceives 
only a certain general idea of some sensible event, and not its particular 
form. It is, therefore, necessary for him who practices herein to adopt 
inference. ‘They only who are inspired by the deity can predict 
particulars. 


II. When an enquirer shall make mature search into an expected 
event, there will be found no material difference between the event 
ifself and his idea of it. 


III. Whosoever may be adapted to any particular event or pursuit, 
will assuredly have the star indicative thereof very potent in his 
nativity. 

IV. A mind apt in knowledge will discover truth more readily than 
one practised in the highest branches of science. 


V. A skilful person, acquainted with the nature of the stars, is 
enabled to avert many of their effects, and to prepare himself for those 
effects before they arrive. 


VI. It is advantageous to make choice of days and hours at a time 
well constituted by the nativity. Should the time be adverse, the choice 
will in no respect avail, however favourable an issue it may chance to 
promise. 


VII. The mingled influences of the stars can be understood by no 
one who has not previously acquired knowledge of the combinations and 
varieties existing in nature. 


VIII. A sagacious mind improves the operation of the heavens, as 
a skilful farmer, by cultivation, improves nature. 


1 Moxon’s Mathematical Dictionary says, that the ““ Centiloquium is a 
book containing one hundred astrological aphorisms, commonly ascribed to 
Ptolemy, as its author, but by some to Hermes Trismegistus.” ‘This account, 
however, seems to be inaccurate; for the Centiloquy attributed to Osiris’s 
contemporary and counsellor (eulogized by Lilly as having been “ one of the 
wisest of all mortal men, and as ancient as Moses ”’), is very different from that 
known by the name of the Καρπος, or “ Fruit of the Tetrabiblos.”” Whether 
this latter Centiloquy be really the work of Ptolemy is another question: it 
has been usually edited as his, but some of the aphorisms seem to relate to 
horary questions only, which are not adverted to in the Tetrabiblos, and there 
are others also which do not appear to result from the doctrine of that book. 


154 APPENDIX 


IX. In their generation and corruption forms are influenced by the 
celestial forms, of which the framers of talismans consequently avail 
themselves, by observing the ingresses of the stars thereupon. 


X. In the election of days and hours, make use of the malefics, to 
the same moderate extent as the skilful physician would use poisons in 
order to perform cures. 


XI. A day and hour are not to be elected until the quality of the 
object proposed shall be known. 


XII. Love and hatred prohibit the true accomplishment of judg- 
ments; and, inasmuch as they lessen the most important, so likewise 
they magnify the most trivial things. 


XIII. In every indication made by the constitution of the heavens, 
secondary stars, whether auxiliary or injurious thereto, are also to be 
used. 

XIV. The astrologer will be entangled in a labyrinth of error, when 
the seventh house and its lord shall be afflicted. 


XV. Signs cadent from the ascendant of any kingdom are the as- 
cendants of that kingdom’s enemies. But the angles and succedent 
houses are the ascendants of its friends. It is the same in all doctrines 
and institutions. 


XVI. When the benefics may be controlled in the eighth house, 
they bring mischief by means of good men: if, on the other hand, they 
be well affected, they will prevent mischief. 


XVII. Give no judgment as to the future life of an aged person, 
until the number of years he may live shall have been reckoned. 


XVIII. If, while a benefic may ascend, both the luminaries should 
be in the same minute,! the native will be equally and highly pros- 
perous in all things which can befall him. So, likewise, if the luminaries 
be mutually opposed by the east and west. But the contrary effect will 
be produced, should a malefic be on the ascendant. 


XIX. The efficacy of purgation is impeded by the Moon’s con- 
junction with Jupiter. 

XX. Pierce not with iron that part of the body which may be 
governed by the sign actually occupied by the Moon. 


XXI. When the Moon may be in Scorpio or Pisces, purgation may 
be advantageously used, provided the lord of the ascendant be coupled 
with some star posited below the earth. If he be coupled with a star 
placed above the earth, the potion swallowed will be vomited up. 


XXII. Neither put on nor lay aside any garment for the first time, 
when the Moon may be located in Leo. And it will be still worse to do 
so, should she be badly affected. 


1 Of the same degree and sign, 


APPENDIX 155 


" . . 
XXIII. Aspects between the Moon and stars give the native much 
activity ; and, if the stars be in power, they indicate an efficient, but if 
weak an inert, excitation to action. 


XXIV. An eclipse of the luminaries, if in the angles of the nativity, 
or of an annual revolution, is noxious; and the effects take place accord- 
ing to the space between the ascendant and the place of eclipse. And 
as, in a solar eclipse, a year is reckoned for an hour, so likewise, in a lunar 
eclipse, a month is reckoned for an hour. 


XXV. The progression of a significator, posited in the mid-heaven, 
is to be made by right ascension ; of another posited in the ascendant, 
by the oblique ascension of the particular latitude. 


XXVI. There is obvious concealment in the case, if the star signifi- 
cative of any particular affair be in conjunction with the Sun, either 
under the earth or in a place foreign to its own nature. On the other 
hand, there is manifestation, should the star be raised to elevation out 
of its depression, and be located in its own place. 


XXVII. Venus gives pleasure to the native in that part of the body 
which may be ruled by the sign she occupies. It is the same with other 
stars. 

XXVIII. When the Moon may not hold a familiarity with two 
planets, as is desirable, care should be taken to connect her, if possible, 
with some fixed star combining their qualities. 


XXIX. The fixed stars grant extremely good fortune, unconnected 
with the understanding ; but it is most commonly marked by calami- 
ties, unless the planets also agree in the felicity. 


XXX. Observe the creation of the first king of any dynasty; for 
if the ascendant at that creation should agree with the ascendant of 
the nativity of the king’s son, he will succeed his father. 


_ XXXI. When the star ruling over any kingdom shall enter into a 
climacterical place, either the king, or some one of the chief men of his 
kingdom, will die. 

XXXII. Concord between two persons is produced by an harmoni- 
ous figuration of the stars, indicative of the matter whereby good will 
is constituted, in the nativity of either person. 

XXXIII. Loveand hatred are discernible, as well from the concord 
and discord of the luminaries, as from the ascendants of both nativities : 
but obeying signs increase good will. 

XXXIV. If the lord of the place of the new Moon be in an angle, 
he is indicative of the events liable to happen in that month. 

XXXV. When the Sun arrives at the place of any star, he excites the 
influence of that star in the atmosphere. 

XXXVI. In the foundation of cities, consider the fixed stars which 
may seem to contribute thereto ; but in the erection of houses, observe 


156 APPENDIX 


the planets. The kings of every city which has Mars in culmination will 
most commonly perish by the sword. 


XXXVII. If Virgo or Pisces be on the ascendant, the native will 
create his own dignity; but if Aries or Libra is on the ascendant, he 
will cause his own death. The other signs are to be contemplated in the 
same way. 


XXXVIII. Mercury, if established in either house of Saturn, and in 
power, gives the native a speculative and inquisitive intellect: if in a 
house of Mars, and especially if in Aries, he gives eloquence. 


XXXIX. Affliction of the eleventh house, in the creation of a king, 
indicates damage in his household and his treasury: affliction of the 
second house denotes the detriment of his subject’s wealth. 


XL. When the ascendant is oppressed by the malefics, the native 
will delight in sordid things, and approve ill-favoured odours. 


XLI. Beware the affliction of the eighth house and its lord, at a 
time of departure ; and that of the second house and its lord, at.a time 
of return. 


XLII. Should a disease begin when the Moon may be in a sign 
occupied at the birth by some malefic, or in quartile or opposition to 
any such sign, such disease will be most severe ; and if the malefic also 
behold the said sign, it will be dangerous. On the other hand, there will 
be no danger if the Moon be in a place held at the time of birth by some 
benefic. 


XLIII. The malefic figures of a nation are strengthened by adverse 
figurations of existing times. 


XLIV. It is an evil case if the ascendant of a sick person resist 
the figuration of his own nativity ; and if the time should not bring 
up any benefic. 


XLV. If the ascendant, or principal significators, be not in human 
signs, the native himself will be also estranged from human nature. 


XLVI. In nativities much happiness is conferred by the fixed stars ; 
and also by the angles of the new Moon, and by the place of a 
kingdom’s Part of Fortune, should the ascendant be found in any 
of them. 


XLVII. Ifa malefic in one nativity fall on the place of a benefic in 
another nativity, he who has the benefic will suffer damage from him 
who has the malefic. 


XLVIII. If the mid-heaven of a prince be the ascendant of his 
subject, or if their respective significators be configurated in a bene- 
volent form, they will continue long inseparable. It will be the same, 
also, should the sixth house of a subject or servant be the ascendant of 
his prince or master. 


APPENDIX 157 


XLIX. If the ascendant of a servant be the mid-heaven in his 
master’s nativity, the master will place so much confidence in that 
servant as to be ruled by him. 


L. Overlook none of the hundred and nineteen conjunctions ; for 
on them depends the knowledge of worldly operations, whether of 
generation or of corruption. 


LI. Make the sign occupied by the Moon at the time of birth the 
sign ascending at the conception ; and consider that in which she may be 
posited at the conception, or the opposite one, as the sign ascending at 


the birth. 


LII. Men of tall stature have their lords of nativity in elevation, 
and their ascendants in the beginnings of signs ; but the lords of men of 
short stature will be found in declination.! It must also be seen whether 
the signs be right or oblique. 


LIII. The lords of nativity of slight or thin men have no latitude, 
but those of stout or fat men have; and, if the latitude be south, the 
native will be active ; if north, inactive. 


LIV. In the construction of a building, the principal rulers, if 
coupled with a star below the earth, will impede the erection. 


LV. Mars’ evil influence over ships is diminished if he be neither 
in the mid-heaven nor in the eleventh house ; but if in either of those 
places, he renders the ship liable to be captured by pirates. And if the 
ascendant be afflicted by any fixed star of the nature of Mars, the ship 
will be burned. 


LVI. While the Moon is in her first quarter, withdrawing from her 
conjunction with the Sun, the bodily humours expand until her second 
quarter: in her other quarters they decrease. 


LVII. If, during a sickness, the seventh house and its lord be 
afflicted, change the physician. 


LVIII. Observe the place of an aspect, and its distance from the 
ascendant of the year; for the event will happen when the profection 
may arrive thither. 


LIX. Before pronouncing that an absent person shall die, observe 
whether he may not become intoxicated; before declaring that he 
shall receive a wound, see whether he may not be let blood; and 
before saying that he shall find treasure, examine whether he may 
not receive his own deposit; for the figures of all these things may 
be similar. 


LX. In cases of sickness, observe the critical days, and the Moon’s 
progress in the angles of a figure of sixteen sides. If those angles be well 
affected, it is favourable for the invalid ; if they be afflicted, unfavour- 
able. 


1 Or in obscure situations. 


158 APPENDIX 


LXI. The! Moon is significative of bodily matters, which, in re- 
spect of motion, resemble her. 


LXII. By marking exactly the beginning of a conjunction,! judg- 
ment may be made of the variation of the weather in the ensuing month. 
It will depend upon the lord of the angle of every figure, for he controls 
the nature of the atmosphere ; assuming also at these times the quality 
of the existing weather. 


LXIII. In the conjunction of Saturn and Jupiter, pronounce 
according to the nature of that one which may be higher in elevation. 
Follow the same rule with other stars. 


LXIV. After ascertaining the lord of the inquiry, see what power 
he may have in the annual revolution, or in the ascendant of the new 
Moon ; and pronounce accordingly. 


LXV. In the least conjunction, the difference of the mean con- 
junction, and in the mean conjunction: the difference of the greatest 
conjunction.? 


LXVI. Consider no profection by itself alone, but make reference 
also to the qualifications and impediments of the stars. 


LXVII. Years are diminished by the imbecility of the receiver. 


LXVIII. A malefic, when matutine, signifies an accident; when 
vespertine, a disease. 


LXIX. The native’s sight will be impaired if the Moon be opposed 
to the Sun, and joined with nebulous stars ; and if the Moon be in the 
western angle, and both the malefic stars in the eastern angle, the Sun 
being in an angle also, the native will become blind. 


LXX. Insanity is produced if the Moon have no connection with 
Mercury ; and, if neither of them be connected with the ascendant, 
Saturn being in occupation of the angle by night, but Mars by day, 
especially if in Cancer, Virgo, or Pisces, a demoniac affection will be 


produced. 


LXXI. If both luminaries may be in masculine signs, in the nativities 
of males, their actions will be consonant with nature ; but if so placed 
in the nativities of females, they increase their action. And Mars and 
Venus, if matutine, incline to the masculine gender ; if vespertine, to 
the feminine. 


LXXII. Matters of education are to be considered by the ascending 
lords of triplicity ; matters of life, by the lords of the conditionary 
luminary’s triplicity. 


1 Of the Sun and Moon. 


2 On this aphorism Partridge has said, ‘‘ how Ptolemy meant it to be under- 
stood, I know not ; and so I leave it.” 


APPENDIX 159 


LXXIII. If the Sun be found with the Gorgon’s head (Caput 
Medus@), and not aspected by any benefic star, and if there be no 
benefic present in the eighth house, and the lord of the conditionary 
luminary be opposed to Mars, or in quartile to him, the native will be 
beheaded. If the luminary culminate, his body will be maimed or 
mangled ; and if the aspect in quartile be from Gemini or Pisces, his 
hands and feet will be amputated. 


LXXIV. Mars, if ascending, uniformly gives a scar in the face. 


LXXV. Ifthe Sun be in conjunction with the lord of the ascendant, 
in Leo, and Mars have no prerogative in the ascendant, and if there be no 
benefic in the eighth house, the native will be burned. 


LXXVI. If Saturn hold the mid-heaven, and the conditionary 
luminary be opposed to him, the native will perish in the ruins of 
buildings, provided the sign on the lower heaven be an earthly sign ; 
if it be a watery sign, he will be drowned or suffocated by water: if a 
human sign, he will be strangled by men, or will perish by the halter 
or thescourge. Should there, however, be a benefic in the eighth house, 
he will not suffer death, although he will be brought near it. 


LXXVII. Profection of the ascendant is to be made for matters 
affecting the body ; of the Part of Fortune, for extrinsic circumstances ; 
of the Moon, for the connection between the body and the spirit ; 
and of the mid-heaven, for the employment or profession. 


LXXVIII. A star often dispenses influence in a place in which 
it has no prerogative, thus bringing unexpected advantage to the 
native. 


LXXIX. Whoever has Mars in the eleventh house, does not govern 
his master. 


LXXX. If Venus be in conjunction with Saturn, and have any 
lord of house in the seventh house, the native will be of spurious 
origin. 

LXXXI. Times are reckoned in seven ways; viz. by the space 
between two significators ; by the space between their mutual aspects ; 
by the approach of one to the other; by the space between either of 
them and the place appropriated to the proposed event; by the de- 
scension of a star, with its addition or diminution ; by the changing of 
a significator ; and by the approach of a planet to its place. 

LXXXII. When a figure may be equipoised, observe the horoscope 
(or figure) at the new or full moon, and, if that also be equipoised, be not 
hasty in giving judgment. 

LXXXIII. The time of obtaining a grant indicates the affection 
between the applicant and his prince ; but the seat! shows the nature of 
the office ;— 

1 Or part of heaven indicating the grant. 


160 APPENDIX 


LXXXIV. And if Mars be lord of the ascendant at the time of 
entering on possession, and posited in the second house, or coupled with 
the lord of the second, he brings much mischief. 


LXXXV. Should the lord of the ascendant be configurated with the 


lord ‘of the second house, the prince will spontaneously create many 
charges. 


LXXXVI. The Sun is the source of the vital power ; the Moon, of 
the natural power. 


LXXXVII. Monthly revolutions are made in twenty-eight days, two 
hours and about eighteen minutes. Judgment is also made by some 
persons by means of the Sun’s progress ; that is to say, by his partial 
equations to that degree and minute which he might at the be- 
ginning. 


LXXXVIII. In making profection of the part of Fortune for a 
whole annual revolution, a space equal to that between the Sun and 
Moon is to be reckoned from the ascendant. 


LXXXIX. Consider the grandfather’s affairs from the seventh house 
and the uncle’s from the sixth. 


XC. Should the significator be in aspect to the ascendant, the hidden 
event or object will correspond in its nature with the ascendant ; but 
if the ascendant be not so aspected, the nature of the event will accord 
with that of the place in which the significator is posited. ‘The lord 
of the hour shows its colour; the place of the Moon its time ; and, if 
above the earth, it will be a novel thing; if below, old. The part of 
Fortune indicates its quantity, whether long or short. The lords of the 
terms, and of the lower heaven and mid-heaven, and of the Moon, shows 
its substance or value. 


XCI. Should the ruler of a sick person be combust, it is an evil 
portent ; and especially if the part of Fortune be afflicted. 


XCII. Saturn, if oriental, is not so highly noxious to a sick person ; 
nor Mars, if occidental. 


XCIII. Judgment is not to be drawn from any figure until the next 
conjunction shall have been considered: for principles are varied by 
every conjunction ; and therefore, to avoid error, both the last and the 
next should be combined. 


XCIV. The place of the more potent significator indicates the 
thoughts of the inquirer. 


XCV. The stars rising with the tenth house prove how far the 
native may be fitted to the occupation which he follows. 


XCVI. In an eclipse, such significations as are made nearest the 
angles, show the events decreed. The nature of the stars in accordance 
with the eclipse, plants as well as fixed stars, and also the appearances 


APPENDIX 161 


co-ascending, are likewise to be considered, and judgment is to be given 
accordingly. 


XCVII. The event inquired about will be speedily accomplished, 
should the lord of the new or full Moon be in an angle. 


XCVIII. Shooting stars, and meteors like flowing hair, bear a 
secondary part in judgments. 


XCIX. Shooting stars denote the dryness of the air; and, if they 
are projected to one part only, they indicate wind therefrom: if to 
various parts, they indicate diminution of waters, a turbulent atmo- 
sphere, and incursions of armies. 


C. If comets, whose distance is eleven signs behind the Sun, appear 
in angles, the king of some kingdom, or one of the princes or chief men 
of a kingdom, will die. If in a succedent house, the affairs of the 
kingdom’s treasury will prosper, but the governor or ruler will be 
changed. Ifina cadent house, there will be diseases and sudden deaths. 
And if comets be in motion from the west towards the east, a foreign foe 
will invade the country: if not in motion, the foe will be provincial, or 
domestic. 


END OF THE CENTILOQUY 


NO. IV 
THE ZODIACAL PLANISPHERE 


Tue Reader is desired to refer to the Plate at end of book containing 
diagrams of the Zodiacal Planisphere, which has been spoken of in the 
Note in p. 99. 


Fig. 1 is the Planisphere adjusted for the northern latitude of 30° 22’ 
(where the longest day consists of fourteen equatorial hours), agreeably 
to the “ Exemplification ” given by Ptolemy in Chapter XV, Book 3. 
It represents that portion of the celestial sphere which is contained 
between the tropics: the central horizontal line is the equator; the 
curved line extending longitudinally from east to west is the ecliptic ; 
the central perpendicular line is the meridian, or cusp of the roth house ; 
the other short lines, cutting the equator transversely, are the cusps of 
the other houses; that of the Ist house being the eastern horizon ; 
that of the 7th, the western horizon. Hence, the distance from the 
Ist house to the meridian, or from the meridian to the 7th house, shows 
the semi-diurnal arc of any parallel of declination in the ecliptic; and 
the distance of the 7th house to the 4th, or from the 4th to the Ist, 
shows the semi-nocturnal arc. ‘The distance from the cusp of one house 
to that of the next, taken on the same parallel, is also equal to two 


162 APPENDIX 


temporal hours ; thus, for instance, in the latitude above quoted, the 
semi-diurnal arc of οὗ is 6h. 50 m., or 102° 39’ of the equator; con- 
sequently the diurnal temporal hour is equal to one equatorial hour 
and eight minutes, or to 17° 6’ of the equator. 

In his first example, Ptolemy directs 0° ¥ to be placed on the ascend- 
ant, so that the beginning of ¥f may be on the mid-heaven; o° 0 must, 
therefore, fall on the point A, distant from the mid-heaven 147° 44’ of 
the equator, as measured by the line AB; because every point in the 
sphere always preserves one and the same parallel with the equator ; 
and οὗ II, in passing to the mid-heaven, must proceed along the line 
AB. In the present case, however, it is required to know how long o° u 
will be in coming to the ascendant, the given position of οὗ Ὁ. Now 
o° 0 will be on the ascendant when it arrives at the point G; therefore 
the distance from A to C is the amount of the prorogation between 
o° ¥ (when posited on the ascendant) and o° 11, and it is equal to 45° 5’ 
of the equator. In the second example, 0° ¥ is placed on the mid-heaven, 
which position must be at D, so that o° m must necessarily be at E; 
and the distance from E to B, equal to 57° 44’ of the equator, is the 
prorogation between o° ¥Y and o° 01, when of ¥ is on the mid-heaven. 
In the third example, 0°¥ is supposed to be on the 7th house, descending, 
at F, so that @ is on the mid-heaven, and οὗ 0 at the point G, in advance 
of the mid-heaven 32° 16’ of the equator, as shown by the distance 
BG. Now it is required to bring οὐ πὶ to the 7th house (the place of 
o° 0), and it will be there on arriving at H, distant from B 102° 39’ of the 
equator; but aso° 0 is already at G, the distance from G to H, equal to 
70° 23’ of the equator, is the amount of the prorogation between οὗ Ὁ 
and o° 1, when οὗ Ὑ is on the 7th house. The fourth example places 
o° Ὁ at I, three temporal hours past the meridian ; o° 0 therefore falls on 
the point K, at the distance of 13 equatorial degrees before the meridian 
or mid-heaven, and will be three temporal hours past the meridian (the 
position of o° Ὁ) on arriving at L, distant 51 equatorial degrees from the 
mid-heaven: the whole distance from K (the first position of 0° 11) to 
L, its second position, equal to 64 degrees of the equator, is therefore 
the prorogation between 0° ¥ and o° 1, when 0° ¥ is past the meridian 
at the distance of three temporal hours. Ptolemy has also instanced two 
other positions for o° Ὁ ; viz. at two temporal hours past the meridian, 
and at two temporal hours before the occidental angle; or, in other 
words, on the cusp of the gth house, and on that of the 8th. Now, if 
οὗ Ὁ beon the cusp of the 9th house, it must be at M, and o° a will be 
at N, distant 62 equatorial degrees from Q, which is also on the cusp of 
the 9th. Ifo° ¥ be onthe cusp of the 8th, it must be at O, and οὗ π 
will be at P, distant 66 equatorial degrees from R, which is also on the 
cusp of the 8th: these two several numbers of degrees will be the re- 
spective prorogations between οὗ ¥ and οὗ 1, when o° ¥ is placed on 
the 9th and 8th houses. 

Ptolemy’s “ Exemplification ’ has been followed thus minutely in 


APPENDIX 163 


order to show how perfectly Mr. Ranger’s invention is adapted to assist 
(if not to supersede) arithmetical calculation ; for, after the Planisphere 
has once been accurately laid down, a line drawn parallel to the equator, 
from the significator to the promittor, or to the promittor’s pole of 
position, and measured by degrees of the equator, will accomplish the 
whole operation of ascertaining the amount of prorogation. 


Fig. 2 is the Equator extended, zn plano, on a scale proportionate to 
the planispheres in Figs. 1 and 3 : it is divided into 360 degrees, and into 
equal time, as measured by the 24 hours of the earth’s daily rotation on 
its axis, and by smaller portions of four minutes each, corresponding 
with degrees of the equator. 


Fig. 3 is the Planisphere set for the latitude of Southern Britain, 
51° 30’ N., where the longest day is 16 h. 30 m., the semi-diurnal arc 
of o° m being consequently 7 ἢ. 52 m., or 118° of the equator, and its 
diurnal temporal hour equal to one hour and nearly nineteen minutes 
of equatorial time, or to 19° 40’ of the equator. In applying Ptolemy’s 
examples, given in Chapter XV, Book 3, to this latitude, it will follow 
that, when οὗ Y may be on the ascendant, o° m will be at A, and will 
subsequently arrive at the ascendant at C, after the passage of 29° 43’ 
of the equator. When οὗ Ὁ may be on the mid-heaven at D, o° πὶ will 
be at E, and will arrive at B, on the mid-heaven, after the passage of 
57° 44’ of the equator, asin Fig.1. Wheno°® ¥ may beon the 7th house, 
at F, o° o will be at G, and will come to the 7th house, at H, after the 
passage of 85°45’ of the equator. Ifo° ¥ be three temporal hours past 
the meridian, at I, o° mM would be at K, again 13 equatorial degrees 
before the meridian, as in Fig. 1, and will be three temporal hours past 
the meridian, a position similar to that assumed for 0° Y, on arriving at 
L, distant from the mid-heaven §9 equatorial degrees ; thus making the 
whole distance, from K to L, 17 equatorial degrees. If 0° Y be on the 
gth house, at M, οὗ will be at N, distant from Q (also on the gth 
house) about 67 equatorial degrees. Ifo° Y be on the 8th house, at O, 
o° o will be at P, distant from R (also on the 8th house) about 76 
equatorial degrees. 

By taking the trouble to calculate the distances between the several 
positions given by Ptolemy, the Reader may satisfy himself of the 
sufficiency of this Planisphere for the purpose for which it was first 
projected ; viz. for the more expeditious measurement of the arcs of 
direction. The Tables of Ascensions, extracted from the Almagest, in 
p- 152, will show that the arcs, as measured in Figs. 1 and 2 of the plate, 
exactly tally with the amounts of distance obtained by calculating arith- 
metically, according to the respective latitudes, as quoted in the Tables. 


The slight view which has been here given of the Zodiacal Plani- 
sphere invented by Mr. Ranger, must not be considered as pretending to 


164 APPENDIX 


offer a complete idea of its powers: they are so manifold and various, 
that another volume would be required to detail them fully ; and it has 
now been used only in order to give a better illustration of Ptolemy’s 
examples of the spaces of prorogation than mere words can do. To 
persons conversant with the mathematical part of astronomy, the facility 
with which a complete representation of zodiacal latitude, declination, 
the poles of position, crepusculine circles, and other phenomena, may 
be made by this Planisphere, will be sufficiently obvious from the accom- 
panying Figures. 


FINIs 


Oe ee ESN 


wy 


ASTROLOGICAL PUBLICATIONS. 


A CONCISE ENCYCLOPAEDIA OF PSYCHOLOGICAL 

ASTROLOGY. By Charles E. O. Carter, B.A. 
In this book the author, who is in the front rank of modern astrological 
thinkers, has compressed into the most compact and systematic form the 
results of prolonged and careful research. Both in point of arrangement 
and matter it is essentially original, and will especially appeal to those who 
require something more than the mere reiteration of the quasi-scientific 
aphorisms of medieval writers. Cr. 8vo, cloth gilt. 160 pages. Post 
free 5/3. 


TRANSITS AND PLANETARY PERIODS. By Sepharial. 


Very few students have solved the problem of transits, and hitherto it has 
been customary with certain exponents to refer these important signals to the 
radical positions of the planets only, and chiefly to the Significators in a 
horoscope of birth which are the Midheaven, Ascendant, Sun and Moon. It 
will here be shown not only that these are not the only transits to which we 
must direct our attention, but that they are by no means the most important 
or significant. Cr. 8vo, cloth. 5,- πεῖ. Post free 5/3. 


ECLIPSES. By Sepharial. 
Astronomically and Astrologically considered and explained. Cr. 8vo, 
cloth. Post free 3/9. 


A MANUAL OF OCCULTISM. By Sepharial. 
A complete Exposition of the Occult Arts and Sciences. With numerous 
diagrams and illustrations. Astrology — Palmistry — Thaumaturgy — 
Kabalism—Numerology—Talismans— Hypnotism—Divination—The Tarot 
— Cartomancy—Crystal-Gazing—Clairvoyance—Geomancy — Psychometry 


—Dowsing — Dreams — Sortileges— Alchemy. Demy 8vo, cloth. Post 
free 77/-. 


THE KABALA OF NUMBERS. Parts I and IL By Sepharial. 
Handbooks dealing with the Traditional Interpretation of Numbers and 
their Predictive Value. Two vols. Deals with: The Power of Numbers— 
Geometrical Relations of Thought—Numerology— Number, Form, Colour, 
Sound — Names, Numbers, and Incidents — Chance Events — Thought 
Reading by Numbers—The Significance of Numbers—Of Things Lost— 
Success and Failure—The Law of Values—Etc. etc. Crown 8vo, cloth. 
Post free 3/9 each vol. 


THE LAW OF VALUES. By Sepharial. 
An Exposition of the Primary Causes of Stock and Share Fluctuations. 
The only scientific statement of the cosmical laws underlying the rise and 
fall of securities. By means of it the investor can regulate his investments 
so as to be sure of his profits. In flexible leather covers to fit the pocket. 


Post free 5/3. 
THE ASTROLOGICAL READY RECKONER. By Sepharial. 


Tables for the immediate calculation of Planets’ longitudes without logar- 
ithms; Planetary Periods for calculating the places of the Planets for all 
time past and future ; Tables for finding the places of all Eclipses with their 
magnitudes and dates, where apparent, etc. ; Cyclic Periods for calculating 
the Great Conjunctions ; Places of New and Full Moons for all time ; How 
to convert Old Dates into New Style, ete. Small Cr. 8vo, cloth gilt. 
Post free 3/9. 


| Complete catalogue sent post free. 
London: W. Foulsham & Co., Ltd., 10 & 11 Red Lion Ct., Fleet St., E.C.4 


ASTROLOGICAL PUBLICATIONS. 


MANUAL OF ASTROLOGY. By Sepharial. 
Book I.—Treats with the symbols and natures of the celestial bodies, etc. 
II.—Deals with reading of the Horoscope concerning the judgment of 
life. IIIs—Teaches the various methods by which the times of events 
may be determined. IV.—Hindu astrology with a translation of the 
famous Kavi, etc. Post free 12/9. 


NEW DICTIONARY OF ASTROLOGY. _ By Sepharial. 
The Standard Work. Just Published. In which all Technical and 
Abstruse Terms used in the Text Books of the Science are intimately 
explained and illustrated. Cr. 8vo, cloth. 7/6net. Post free 7/9. 


THE SCIENCE OF FOREKNOWLEDGE. By Sepharial. 
The publishers have been requested by the author to bring this book 
prominently before the public, especially those interested in Sepharial’s 
life work in the Science of Astrology. It contains information not else- 
where to be found, and constitutes a sound argument for the antiquity, 
validity and utility of the Science of Foreknowledge. All interested in 
this grand old science will not fail to add this work to their library. 
Cr. 8vo, cloth gilt. Post free 5/3. 


THE DAILY GUIDE. By Sepharial. 


Astrology lucidly explained. Here is a book that can safely be put into 
the hands of the student in the earlier stages of his study of the ancient 
science of Astrology, and equally into those of the critic who has never 
given a preliminary thought to the subject. It is a book that carries 
conviction and affords means of testing which seldom pertains to much 
of our modern science. A student can sit down with this book in hand 
and prove the truth of Astrology for himself. Cr. 8vo, 96 pages, cloth. 
Post free 2/9. 


PRIMARY DIRECTIONS MADE EASY. By Sepharial. 
The author demonstrates that a true system of Primary Direction in the 
horoscope can be effected by means of a simple inspection of Tables of 
Houses only, in a few minutes, Post free 3/9. 


DIRECTIONAL ASTROLOGY. By Sepharial. 


Being a complete survey of Prognostic Astronomy, to which is added a 
discussion of Problematic Points, and a complete set of Tables necessary 
for the calculation of Arcs of Direction and other Useful Tables of value 
to the Astrologer. Cr. 8vo, cloth gilt, 192 pages. Post free 6/3. 


THE SILVER KEY. By Sepharial. 
A guide to Successful Speculation. Especially applicable to Racing. 
An application of the principles of gravity and tidal action to the question 
of selection. This work embodies an entirely novel principle of great 
interest to sportsmen and speculative investors, supported by a set of 
tables by which all complex calculations are eliminated, Cr. 8vo, cloth. 
Post free 5/3. 


ARCANA OF ASTROLOGY. By Dr. Simmonite. 
This is the fullest practical work on Genethlialogy ever offered. It is 
arranged in a manner suitable for all students, and contains thirty-five 
chapters of explanatory matter and tables, which make the science 
capable of being understood and practised by all. New Edition. 
Post free 15/6. 


Complete catalogue sent post free. 
London: W. Foulsham & Co., Ltd., 10 & 11 Red Lion Ct., Fleet St., E.C. 


ass 


ΓΤ ee A 


᾿ τὰ, ᾿" β 
ἐπε centres | | ἐξ εξ STIS SES κενὰ ot eer rp φϑοσυφδοκιν τα apr : ΜΠ 
eee Pe ᾿ ᾿ ᾿ | | 
’ 
: 
| ᾿ 


yr 
ΤΣ τ ων 


eee 
Pe ee τς 


ῃ 
yeh) 
Hae ae als 


+) 


ea Serie 
se : 
ZZ. 


Ν 


ῃ 


Root ἘΞ - Σ te : 
᾿ ς pie 3 
Sey 3 x 
: ᾿ ἀξ τας ὁ ak oe 


ἘΞ ΣΕ ετις 
; : ν᾿ -— 
eS 


ξεν στ 
ee 


SISO 


SS ee Ξασνν